Yamaha PSR-A300 de handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: PSR-A300

Categorie: Muziekinstrumenten

Type: de handleiding

Owner’s Manual

Bedienungsanleitung

Mode d’emploi

Owner’s Manual

Bedienungsanleitung

Mode d’emploi

2 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual

PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL

This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply

(adapter). DO NOT connect this product to any power sup-

ply or adapter other than one described in the manual, on

the name plate, or speciﬁcally recommended by Yamaha.

This product should be used only with the components

supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by

Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is used, please observe all safety

markings and instructions that accompany the accessory

product.

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO

CHANGE:

The information contained in this manual is believed to be

correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves

the right to change or modify any of the speciﬁcations with-

out notice or obligation to update existing units.

This product, either alone or in combination with an ampli-

ﬁer and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of pro-

ducing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing

loss. DO NOT operate for long periods of time at a high

volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you

experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you

should consult an audiologist.

IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time

period before damage occurs.

NOTICE:

Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relat-

ing to how a function or effect works (when the unit is

operating as designed) are not covered by the manufac-

turer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibil-

ity. Please study this manual carefully and consult your

dealer before requesting service.

ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES:

Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user

safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe

that our products and the production methods used to pro-

duce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the let-

ter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the

following:

Battery Notice:

This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable bat-

tery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average

life span of this type of battery is approximately ﬁve years.

When replacement becomes necessary, contact a quali-

ﬁed service representative to perform the replacement.

This product may also use “household” type batteries.

Some of these may be rechargeable. Make sure that the

battery being charged is a rechargeable type and that the

charger is intended for the battery being charged.

When installing batteries, do not mix batteries with new, or

with batteries of a different type. Batteries MUST be

installed correctly. Mismatches or incorrect installation

may result in overheating and battery case rupture.

Warning:

Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery.

Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used

batteries promptly and as regulated by the laws in your

area. Note: Check with any retailer of household type bat-

teries in your area for battery disposal information.

Disposal Notice:

Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or

for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an

end, please observe all local, state, and federal regula-

tions that relate to the disposal of products that contain

lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable to

assist you, please contact Yamaha directly.

NAME PLATE LOCATION:

The name plate is located on the bottom of the product.

The model number, serial number, power requirements,

etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model

number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the

spaces provided below and retain this manual as a perma-

nent record of your purchase.

Model

Serial No.

Purchase Date

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION

92-BP (bottom)

PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 3

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY

THIS UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the instruc-

tions contained in this manual, meets FCC require-

ments. Modiﬁcations not expressly approved by

Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC,

to use the product.

2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to

accessories and/or another product use only high qual-

ity shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product

MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Fail-

ure to follow instructions could void your FCC authori-

zation to use this product in the USA.

3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to

comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regula-

tions, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance

with these requirements provides a reasonable level of

assurance that your use of this product in a residential

environment will not result in harmful interference with

other electronic devices. This equipment generates/

uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used

according to the instructions found in the users man-

ual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of

other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regula-

tions does not guarantee that interference will not

occur in all installations. If this product is found to be

the source of interference, which can be determined by

turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate

the problem by using one of the following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being

affected by the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit

breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line ﬁlter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reori-

ent the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm rib-

bon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfac-

tory results, please contact the local retailer authorized

to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate

the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corpo-

ration of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600

Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620

The above statements apply ONLY to those products

distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its

subsidiaries.

FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)

* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.

Entsorgung leerer Batterien (nur innerhalb Deutschlands)

Leisten Sie einen Beitrag zum Umweltschutz. Verbrauchte Batterien oder

Akkumulatoren dürfen nicht in den Hausmüll. Sie können bei einer Sam-

melstelle für Altbatterien bzw. Sondermüll abgegeben werden. Informieren

Sie sich bei Ihrer Kommune.

(class B)

(battery)

OBSERVERA!

Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) så länge som den ar

ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har stängts av.

ADVARSEL: Netspæendingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt, sålæenge

netledningen siddr i en stikkontakt, som er t endt — også selvom der or

slukket på apparatets afbryder.

VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko laitetta

verkosta.

(standby)

4 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual

PRECAUTIONS

PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING

* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.

WARNING

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from

electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, ﬁre or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to,

the following:

• Only use the voltage speciﬁed as correct for the instrument. The required

voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument.

• Use the speciﬁed adaptor (PA-3B, PA-3C or an equivalent recommended by

Yamaha) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument

or overheating.

• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may

have accumulated on it.

• Do not place the AC adaptor cord near heat sources such as heaters or

radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place

heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip

over, or roll anything over it.

• Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or

modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If

it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have

it inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet

conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into

any openings.

• Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.

• Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit.

A burning item may fall over and cause a ﬁre.

• If the AC adaptor cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a

sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or

smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power

switch, disconnect the adaptor plug from the outlet, and have the instrument

inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

CAUTION

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage

to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

•When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold

the plug itself and not the cord.

• Unplug the AC power adaptor when not using the instrument, or during

electrical storms.

• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-

connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause

overheating in the outlet.

• Always make sure all batteries are inserted in conformity with the +/- polarity

markings. Failure to do so might result in overheating, ﬁre, or battery ﬂuid

leakage.

• Always replace all batteries at the same time. Do not use new batteries

together with old ones. Also, do not mix battery types, such as alkaline

batteries with manganese batteries, or batteries from different makers, or

different types of batteries from the same maker, since this can cause

overheating, ﬁre, or battery ﬂuid leakage.

• Do not dispose of batteries in ﬁre.

• Do not attempt to recharge batteries that are not intended to be charged.

•When the batteries run out, or if the instrument is not to be used for a long

time, remove the batteries from the instrument to prevent possible leakage of

the battery ﬂuid.

• Keep batteries away from children.

• If the batteries do leak, avoid contact with the leaked ﬂuid. If the battery ﬂuid

should come in contact with your eyes, mouth, or skin, wash immediately with

water and consult a doctor. Battery ﬂuid is corrosive and may possibly cause

loss of sight or chemical burns.

• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold

or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to

prevent the possibility of panel disﬁguration or damage to the internal

components.

• Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment,

mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or

radio may generate noise.

• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might

accidentally fall over.

Power supply/AC power adaptor

Do not open

Water warning

Fire warning

If you notice any abnormality

Power supply/AC power adaptor

Battery

Location

(4)-9 1/2

PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 5

• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected adaptor and other cables.

• Use only the stand speciﬁed for the instrument. When attaching the stand or

rack, use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the

internal components or result in the instrument falling over.

• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the

power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all

components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the

volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the

volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level.

•When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint thinners,

solvents, cleaning ﬂuids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.

• Do not insert a ﬁnger or hand in any gaps on the instrument.

• Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the

panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and unplug

the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by

qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this

might discolor the panel or keyboard.

• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do

not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.

• Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high or

uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If

you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician.

Saving and backing up your data

• The panel settings and some other types of data will be lost if the power is

turned off before they are saved. Be sure to save data you want to keep to the

internal Flash Memory (page 33) before turning off the power. Saved data may

be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation. Save the important data to

your computer. For information on sending the data, see page 67.

Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.

When using a power adaptor, even when the power is off, electricity is still ﬂowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a

long time, make sure you unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet.

Make sure to discard used batteries according to local regulations.

● COPYRIGHT NOTICE

This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect

to which it has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer soft-

ware, style ﬁles, MIDI ﬁles, WAVE data, musical scores and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and

contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences.

DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES.

● Trademarks

•Windows is the registered trademark of Microsoft

Corporation.

• All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders.

Connections

Maintenance

Handling caution

Saving data

Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modiﬁcations to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.

• The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from

those on your instrument.

(4)-9 2/2

6 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual

Congratulations and thank you for purchasing

the Yamaha PSR-A300 PORTATONE!

Please read this owner’s manual carefully before using the instrument

in order to take full advantage of its various features.

Make sure to keep this manual in a safe and handy place even after you ﬁnish reading,

and refer to it often when you need to better understand an operation or function.

GM System Level 1

“GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which ensures that any GM-compat-

ible music data can be accurately played by any GM-compatible tone generator, regardless of

manufacturer. The GM mark is afﬁxed to all software and hardware products that support GM

System Level.

XGlite

As its name implies, “XGlite” is a simpliﬁed version of Yamaha’s high-quality XG tone gener-

ation format. Naturally, you can play back any XG song data using an XGlite tone generator.

However, keep in mind that some songs may play back differently compared to the original

data, due to the reduced set of control parameters and effects.

Stereo Sampled Piano

The instrument has a special Portable Grand Piano Voice—created by state-of-the-art stereo

sampling technology and using Yamaha’s sophisticated AWM (Advanced Wave memory) tone

generation system.

Yamaha Education Suite 5

The instrument features the new Yamaha Education Suite—a set of learning tools that utilize

the latest technology to make studying and practicing music more fun and fulﬁlling than ever

before!

Touch Response

The exceptionally natural Touch Response feature, with a convenient front panel on/off switch,

gives you maximum expressive level control over the voices.

The PSR-A300 package includes the following items. Please check that you have them all.

• Music rest • Owner’s manual (this book)

Panel logos

Supplied Accessories

● Music rest

Insert the music

rest into the slots

as shown.

PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 7

Panel logos ................................................................6

Supplied Accessories.................................................6

Setting Up 8

Power Requirements .................................................8

Connecting headphones (PHONES/OUTPUT Jack) .9

Connecting a footswitch (SUSTAIN Jack) .................9

Using the MIDI Terminals ..........................................9

Turn on the power......................................................9

Panel Controls and Terminals 10

Front Panel ..............................................................10

Rear Panel ...............................................................10

— Quick Guide —

Step 1

Changing the Voices 12

Try playing a variety of instrument Voices ...............12

Playing Two Voices Simultaneously—Dual .............13

Playing Different Voices with the Left and

Right Hands—Split ...............................................14

Playing the Grand Piano Voice ................................15

Drum kits & Oriental Percussion kits........................15

Step 2

Fun Sounds 17

Step 3

Play With The Metronome 18

Start the metronome ................................................18

Step 4

Playing Songs 20

Select and Listen to a Specific Song .......................20

Step 5

Play with a Style 22

Selecting a rhythm of a Style ...................................22

Playing with a Style..................................................23

Step 6

Record your own performance 25

Recording Your Performance ..................................25

Recording to a specified track..................................26

Deleting User Songs ................................................28

Step 7

Using Oriental Scales 29

Setting an Oriental Scale—Scale Setting ................29

Registering the Scale settings .................................30

Recall the Scale settings..........................................31

Set the Accompaniment Tuning on..........................31

Step 8

Play with the Pitch Bend Wheel 32

Adding pitch variations with the Pitch Bend Wheel..32

Adjust the pitch bend range .....................................32

Backup and Initialization 33

Backup .....................................................................33

Initialization ..............................................................33

Basic Operation and Displays 34

Basic Operation....................................................... 34

Display..................................................................... 36

Song Lesson 37

Lesson 1 (Listen & Learn) ....................................... 37

Lesson 2 (Timing).................................................... 39

Lesson 3 (Waiting) .................................................. 40

Song settings 41

Changing the Melody Voice .................................... 41

Song Volume........................................................... 41

Mute ........................................................................ 42

Practice Makes Perfect ........................................... 43

Play With a Variety of Effects 44

Adding Harmony...................................................... 44

Adding Reverb......................................................... 45

Adding Chorus......................................................... 46

Adding Panel Sustain .............................................. 46

Handy Performance Features 47

Touch Response Sensitivity .................................... 47

Setting the Split Point .............................................. 48

Transpose ............................................................... 48

Tuning ..................................................................... 49

One Touch Setting .................................................. 49

Changing the tempo of the Song/Style.................... 50

Adjusting the Voice Parameters .............................. 50

Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions 51

Various ways to start and stop Style playback ........ 51

Pattern Variation (Sections) .................................... 53

Adjusting the Style Volume ..................................... 55

Playing Auto Accompaniment Chords 56

Easy Chords............................................................ 56

Standard Chords ..................................................... 56

Looking up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary ...... 58

Function Settings 60

Select the item and change the value ..................... 60

About MIDI 62

What is MIDI?.......................................................... 62

What You Can Do With MIDI................................... 62

Transferring Performance Data To and

From Another Instrument..................................... 63

Transferring data between the PSR-A300

and a computer.................................................... 65

Troubleshooting ...........................................................68

Index ..............................................................................69

Voice List.......................................................................71

Maximum Polyphony ............................................... 71

Drum Kit & Oriental Percussion Kit List.....................78

Style List........................................................................83

Effect Type List .............................................................84

MIDI Implementation Chart ..........................................86

MIDI Data Format ..........................................................88

Effect map ............................................................... 90

Specifications ...............................................................91

Contents

8 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

Be sure to do the following operations BEFORE turning on the power.

Although the instrument will run either from an optional AC adaptor or batteries, Yamaha recommends use of an

AC adaptor whenever possible. An AC adaptor is more environmentally friendly than batteries and does not

deplete resources.

■ Using an AC Power Adaptor

q Make sure that the power of the instrument is off

(the backlit display is off).

w Connect the AC adaptor (PA-3B, PA-3C or other

adaptor speciﬁcally recommended by Yamaha) to

the power supply jack.

e Plug the AC adaptor into an AC outlet.

■ Using Batteries

q Open the battery compartment cover located on the

instrument’s bottom panel.

w Insert the six new alkaline batteries, being careful

to follow the polarity markings on the side of the

compartment.

e Replace the compartment cover, making sure that it

locks ﬁrmly in place.

For battery operation the instrument requires six 1.5V

“AA” size, LR6 or equivalent batteries. (Alkaline batter-

ies are recommended.) When battery power becomes

too low for proper operation, the volume may be

reduced, the sound may be distorted, and other prob-

lems may occur. When this happens, make sure to

replace all batteries, following the precautions listed

below.

If necessary, also make sure to save all important User

data (see page 33), since custom panel settings are

lost when the batteries are removed.

Power Requirements

• Use ONLY a Yamaha PA-3B or PA-3C AC Power Adap-

tor (or other adaptor speciﬁcally recommended by

Yamaha) to power your instrument from the AC mains.

The use of other adaptors may result in irreparable

damage to both the adaptor and the instrument.

WARNING

• Unplug the AC Power Adaptor when not using the

instrument, or during electrical storms.

CAUTION

PA-3B or

PA-3C

AC outlet

•Never connect or disconnect the AC power adaptor when

the batteries are installed in the instrument and the power

is on. Doing so will turn the power off, possibly resulting

in loss of the data being transferred and the data cur-

rently in the transfer destination during transferring or

recording a data.

CAUTION

• Use alkaline batteries for this instrument. Other types of

batteries (including rechargeable batteries) may have

sudden drops of power when battery power becomes low,

possibly resulting in loss of data in the ﬂash memory.

• Make sure to install the batteries with the proper orienta-

tion, maintaining the correct polarity (as shown). Incor-

rect battery installation may result in heat, ﬁre and/or

leaking of corrosive chemicals.

• When the batteries run down, replace them with a com-

plete set of six new batteries. NEVER mix old and new

batteries. Do not use different kinds of batteries (e.g.

alkaline and manganese) at the same time.

• If the instrument is not to be in use for a long time,

remove the batteries from it, in order to prevent possible

ﬂuid leakage from the battery.

• Please use the power adaptor when transferring data to

ﬂash memory. Batteries (including rechargeable types)

can be drained rapidly by this type of operation. If the bat-

teries do become drained during a data transfer, both the

data being transferred and the data currently in the trans-

fer destination will be lost.

CAUTION

Setting Up

PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 9

Make all necessary connections BEFORE turning the power on.

The PSR-A300 speakers are automatically shut off

when a plug is inserted into this jack. The PHONES/

OUTPUT jack also functions as an external output.

You can connect the PHONES/OUTPUT jack to a

keyboard ampliﬁer, stereo system, mixer, tape

recorder, or other line-level audio device to send the

instrument’s output signal to that device.

The sustain function lets you produce a natural sustain

as you play by pressing an optional footswitch. Plug

the Yamaha FC4 or FC5 footswitch into this jack and

use it to switch sustain on and off.

The instrument also features MIDI terminals, allow-

ing you to interface the instrument with other MIDI

instruments or computers. (For more information, see

page 62.)

Turn down the volume by turning the [MASTER

VOLUME] control to the left and press the

[STANDBY/ON] switch to turn on the power. Press-

ing the switch again turns the power off.

Backup data in the ﬂash memory (page 33) is loaded

to the instrument when the power is turned on. If no

backup data exists on ﬂash memory, all instrument

settings are restored to the initial factory defaults

when the power is turned on.

Connecting headphones (PHONES/OUTPUT Jack)

Connecting a footswitch (SUSTAIN Jack)

•Avoid listening with the headphones at high volume for

long periods of time; doing so may not only result in ear

fatigue, it may be damaging to your hearing.

WARNING

•To prevent damage to the speakers, set the volume of the

external devices at the minimum setting and turn power

off the devices before connecting them. Failure to

observe these precautions may result in electric shock or

equipment damage. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all

devices at their minimum levels and gradually raise the

volume controls while playing the instrument to set the

desired listening level.

CAUTION

• Make sure that the footswitch plug is properly connected to

the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the power.

• Do not press the footswitch while turning the power on. Doing

this changes the recognized polarity of the footswitch, result-

ing in reversed footswitch operation.

NOTE

Using the MIDI Terminals

Turn on the power

MIDI instrument

• MIDI cables (sold separately) must be used for connecting to

MIDI devices. They can be bought at music stores, etc.

NOTE

• When using a power adaptor, even when the power is off,

a small amount of electricity is still being consumed by

the instrument. When you are not using the instrument for

a long time, make sure to unplug the AC power adaptor

from the wall AC outlet, and/or remove the batteries from

the instrument.

CAUTION

•Never attempt to turn the power off when a “Writing!”

message is shown in the display. Doing so can damage

the ﬂash memory and result in a loss of data.

CAUTION

10 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual

Panel Controls and Terminals

■ Front Panel

q [STANDBY/ON] switch....................................page 9, 34

w [MASTER VOLUME] control ......................... pages 9, 34

e LESSON PART

[L] button .............................................................page 38

[R] button............................................................. page 38

e [REC TRACK 2] button........................................page 27

[REC TRACK 1] button........................................page 27

r [LISTEN & LEARN] button..................................page 38

t [TIMING] button................................................... page 39

y [WAITING] button ................................................page 40

u [FUNCTION] button..................................... pages 60, 35

i [SONG] button............................................. pages 20, 35

o [STYLE] button............................................ pages 22, 35

!0 [VOICE] button ............................................ pages 12, 35

!1 Number buttons [0]-[9], [+/YES], [-/NO].............page 35

!2 [DEMO] button.....................................................page 21

!3 [METRONOME ON/OFF] button .........................page 18

!4 [A-B REPEAT] button..........................................page 43

!5 [REW] button .......................................................page 21

!6 [FF] button ...........................................................page 21

!9 [PAUSE] button....................................................page 21

!4 [ACMP ON/OFF] button ......................................page 23

!5 [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button................................ page 53

!6 [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button................................... page 53

!9 [SYNC START] button ......................................... page 23

!7 [TEMPO/TAP] button...........................................page 50

!8 [REC] button........................................................ page 25

@0 [START/STOP] button .........................................page 34

@1 [PORTABLE GRAND] button .............................. page 15

@2 [SOUND EFFECT KIT] button............................. page 17

@3 [REVERB ON/OFF] button.................................. page 45

@4 [SPLIT ON/OFF] button.......................................page 14

@5 [DUAL ON/OFF] button .......................................page 13

@6 [HARMONY ON/OFF] button ..............................page 44

@7 [TOUCH ON/OFF] button ....................................page 47

@8 [PITCH BEND] wheel...........................................page 32

@9 [ORIENTAL SCALE] buttons ..............................page 29

■ Rear Panel

#0 MIDI IN/OUT terminals ........................................page 62

#1 SUSTAIN jack.........................................................page 9

#2 PHONES/OUTPUT jack ......................................... page 9

#3 DC IN 12V jack.......................................................page 8

When the lesson mode

When the recording mode

When the Song mode

When the Style mode

!5 !7

Style List (page 83)

Song List (page 21)

■ Front Panel

Panel Controls and Terminals

PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 11

GrandPno

001

GrandPno

001

@6 @7

Voice List (page 72)Display (page 36)

#3#2#1#0

■ Rear Panel

12 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual

— Quick Guide —

Step

Changing the Voices

In addition to the piano Voice, a wide variety of other instrument Voices can be selected and

played, including guitar, trumpet and ﬂute. The Voice selected here becomes the Main Voice.

Press the [VOICE] button.

The Voice number and name are displayed.

Select a Voice.

Select the desired Voice by using the number buttons [0]-[9], [+],

[-].

Refer to the Voice List on page 72.

Play the keyboard.

Try selecting and playing different Voices.

Try playing a variety of instrument Voices

GrandPno

001

Voice number Voice name

Appears when the

Voice mode.

Flute

084

The Voice shown here

becomes the Main Voice

for the instrument.

PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 13

Quick Guide

You can select a second Voice which will play in addition to the Main Voice selected on the previ-

ous page. This second Voice is known as the Dual Voice.

Press the [DUAL ON/OFF] button to turn the Dual function on.

When Dual is on, you can play a Dual Voice in a layer with the

Main Voice.

To turn the Dual Voice off and play only the Main Voice, press the

[DUAL ON/OFF] button again.

The best-suited Dual Voice is automatically selected whenever you

turn Dual on, but you can select any of the available Dual Voices.

Press and hold the [DUAL ON/OFF] button for longer than a second.

“D. Voice” appears in the display for a few seconds, then the Dual

Voice will appear.

Select a Dual Voice.

Select the desired Dual Voice by using the number buttons [0]-

[9], [+], [-].

Refer to the Voice List on page 72.

Playing Two Voices Simultaneously—Dual

Two Voices sound at the

same time

Play the Dual Voice

Flute

084

001

Appears when Dual

is on.

Selecting a Dual Voice

•You can also access the

Dual Voice setting display

by pressing the [FUNC-

TION] button several times,

then selecting Dual Voice.

NOTE

Marimba

102

001

Hold for longer

than a second.

Currently selected Dual Voice

Step 1 Changing the Voices

14 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual

In the Split mode you can play different Voices to the left and right of the keyboard “Split Point.”

The main and Dual Voices can be played to the right of the Split Point, while the Voice played to

the left of the Split Point is known as the “Split Voice”

Press the [SPLIT ON/OFF] button to turn the Split function on.

When Split is on you can play a Split Voice to the left of the Split

Point.

When you don’t want to play a Split Voice, press the [SPLIT ON/

OFF] button to turn Split off.

You can select a different Split Voice by following the procedure out-

lined below.

Press and hold the [SPLIT ON/OFF] button for longer than a second.

“S. Voice” appears in the display for a few seconds, then the Split

Voice will appear.

Select a Split Voice

Select the desired Split Voice by using the number buttons [0]-

[9], [+], [-].

Refer to the Voice List on page 72.

Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands—Split

Main Voice and Dual

Voice

Split Voice

Split Point

Play the Split Voice

Choir

059

001

Appears when Split

is on.

• The Split Point setting can

be changed as required

(page 48).

NOTE

Select a Split Voice

•You can also access the

Split Voice setting display

by pressing the [FUNC-

TION] button several times,

then selecting the Split

Voice.

NOTE

FngrBass

040

001

Hold for longer

than a second.

The currently selected

Split Voice

PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 15

Quick Guide

When you simply want to play a piano Voice, all you have to do is press one convenient button.

Press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button.

The Voice “Grand Piano 001” will automatically be selected as

the Main Voice.

Drum kits and oriental percussion kits are collections

of drum and percussion instruments.

When drum kits and oriental percussion kits (Voice

number 109-121 or 518-523) are selected, you can

play different percussion sounds directly from the

keyboard.

Press the [VOICE] button.

Select the desired kit.

Select one of the Voice numbers from 109-121 or 518-523 by

using the number buttons [0]-[9], [+], [-].

Playing the Grand Piano Voice

Drum kits & Oriental Percussion kits

Std.Kit1

109

Example: 109 Standard Kit 1

Step 1 Changing the Voices

16 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual

Try out each key.

You’ll hear bongo drums, congas, maracas, and more—a compre-

hensive variety of drum and percussion sounds.

Details on the instruments and key assignments of each kit can be

found in the Drum Kit & Oriental Percussion Kit List on page 78.

● Drum Kit List

● Oriental Percussion Kit List

109 Standard Kit 1 116 Jazz Kit

110 Standard Kit 2 117 Brush Kit

111 Room Kit 118 Symphony Kit

112 Rock Kit 119 SFX Kit 1

113 Electronic Kit 120 SFX Kit 2

114 Analog Kit 121 Sound Effect Kit

115 Dance Kit

518 Arabic Kit 521 Arabic Mix Kit

519 Khaligi Kit 522 Khaligi Mix Kit

520 Irani Kit 523 Irani Mix Kit

PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 17

Quick Guide

Step

Fun Sounds

This instrument also includes a wide range of unique

sound effects. Try out each key and enjoy the sounds!

As you try out the various keys you’ll hear the sound of

a dog barking, running water, a creaking door and many

other unique effects.

Press the [SOUND EFFECT KIT] button.

Try out each key and enjoy the sounds. Don’t forget the black

keys!

You’ll be able to play various sound effects from the keyboard:

barking, braying, yelling, and much more.

Details on the instruments and key assignments of each sound

effect kit can be found in the Drum Kit & Oriental Percussion Kit

List on page 78.

After trying out these sounds, press the [PORTABLE GRAND]

button to reset the instrument Voice to the default setting of Voice

“001 Grand Piano.”

— Quick Guide —

Step 2 Fun Sounds

18 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual

Step

Play With The Metronome

The instrument includes a metronome with adjustable tempo and time signature. Play and set the

tempo that is most comfortable for you.

Turn the metronome on and start it by pressing the [METRONOME ON/

OFF] button.

To stop the metronome, press the [METRONOME ON/OFF] but-

ton again.

Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to display the tempo.

Set the metronome tempo by using the number buttons [0]-[9], [+], [-].

The tempo can be adjusted between 32-280.

Start the metronome

Starting the metronome

GrandPno

001

Displays the

current beat.

Setting the metronome tempo

Tempo

090

Tempo value

— Quick Guide —

PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 19

Quick Guide

A chime will sound on the ﬁrst beat of each measure, while a metro-

nome click will sound on all others. You can also set the time signature

to “00,” in which case the chime will not sound and the click sound

will be heard on all beats.

Press and hold the [METRONOME ON/OFF] button for longer than a

second

The time signature appears in the display.

Set the time signature by using the number buttons [0]-[9], [+], [-].

The metronome can be set for time signatures of 0 to 15 beats.

Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until “MetroVol”

appears.

Set the metronome volume by using the number buttons [0]-[9], [+], [-].

Setting the Metronome Time Signature

TimeSig

Time signature

Hold for longer

than a second.

• The time signature cannot

be changed for Songs and

Styles, because each has a

ﬁxed time signature.

NOTE

Setting the Metronome Volume

MetroVol

100

Metronome Volume

Step 3 Play With The Metronome

20 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual

Step

Playing Songs

This instrument has 35 built-in Songs.

Listening to a Song

Press the [SONG] button.

The Song number and name are displayed.

Select the desired Song by using the number buttons [0]-[9], [+], [-].

Refer to the Song List on next page.

Press the [START/STOP] button.

The Song will begin playing.

You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [START/

STOP] button.

001-035 Built in Songs (see next page)

036-040 User Songs (Songs you record yourself).

041- Songs transferred from a computer on page 67

Select and Listen to a Speciﬁc Song

Arabic

001

Song number Song name

Appears when

the Song mode is

active.

•You can play Songs

recorded from the instru-

ment or transferred from a

computer. The procedure

for playing these Songs is

the same as that of the

built-in Songs.

NOTE

— Quick Guide —

PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 21

Quick Guide

● Song List

• Songs with an asterisk mark (*) are ones which do not have a left part. Therefore, the lesson is applicable only for the right hand.

• Some of the classic and/or traditional songs have been edited for length or for ease in learning, and may not be exactly the same

as the original.

● Other Operations

[REW] button ........... Fast-reverses the Song if pressed during playback (no sound is heard

during fast reverse). Decreases the measure number if pressed while

playback is stopped.

[FF] button................ Fast-forwards the Song if pressed during playback. Increases the

measure number if pressed while playback is stopped.

[PAUSE] button ........ Temporarily stops playback. Press this button a second time to resume

playback from the point at which it was stopped.

● Using the [DEMO] button

Press the [DEMO] button to play Songs 001, 002, 003, 004, 005 in sequence,

and playback will continue repeatedly starting again from the ﬁrst Song 001.

You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [DEMO] or [START/

STOP] button.

No. Song Name

DEMO

001*

Arabic Demo

002*

Khaligi Demo

003*

Irani Demo

004*

Greek Demo

005*

Tu r kish Demo

CLASSICAL MELODIES

006*

Waltz (The Sleeping Beauty) (P. I. Tchaikovsky)

007*

Air (Orchestral Suite) (J. S. Bach)

008*

Minuetto/Boccherini (L. Boccherini)

009*

Pizzicato Polka (J. Strauss II)

010*

Romanze/Beethoven (L. v. Beethoven)

011*

Sicilienne/Fauré (G. Fauré)

012*

Méditation (Thaïs) (J. Massenet)

013*

Grand March (Aida) (G. Verdi)

014*

Swan Lake (P. I. Tchaikovsky)

015*

Le Cygne (Le Carnaval des Animaux)

(C. Saint-Saëns)

PIANO SOLO

016

Für Elise (L. v. Beethoven)

017

Valse op.64-1 “Petit Chien” (F. Chopin)

018

Andante grazioso (Sonate K.331) (W. A. Mozart)

019

24 Preludes op.28-7 (F. Chopin)

020

Fröhlicher Landmann (Album für die Jugend)

(R. Schumann)

021

Träumerei (Kinderszenen) (R. Schumann)

022

Thema (Impromptus D.935-3) (F. Schubert)

023

La Chevaleresque (J. F. Burgmüller)

024

Menuett BWV. Anh.116 (J. S. Bach)

025

Invention Nr.1 (J. S. Bach)

PIANO ENSEMBLE

026

Londonderry Air (Traditional)

027

Twinkle Twinkle Little Star (Traditional)

028

Loch Lomond (Traditional)

029

Home Sweet Home (H. R. Bishop)

030

Nocturne op.9-2 (F. Chopin)

031

Etude op.10-3 “Chanson de L’adieu” (F. Chopin)

032

Menuett BWV. Anh.114 (J. S. Bach)

033

Piano Concerto No.21 2nd mov. (W. A. Mozart)

034

Romanze (Serenade K.525) (W. A. Mozart)

035

Ode to Joy (L. v. Beethoven)

No. Song Name

Step 4 Playing Songs

22 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual

Step

Play with a Style

The Style feature provides built-in backing and rhythm parts in 135 different musical styles, cover-

ing a wide variety of musical categories, including rock, blues, techno and much more. You can

also load commercially available Style Files to the instrument. To do this load the Style ﬁles from

computer, and then register a style data to Style number 136. (Refer to the information on transfer-

ring data on page 67 and registering Styles on page 61.)

Here’s how to play a rhythm of a Style. The rhythm sound consists of percussion instruments.

Press the [STYLE] button.

The Style number and name are displayed.

Select a Style.

Select the desired Style by using the number buttons [0]-[9], [+],

[-].

Refer to the Style List on page 83.

Press the [START/STOP] button.

The Style rhythm will start.

You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [START/

STOP] button.

● STYLE FILE

The Style File Format “SFF” is Yamaha’s original style ﬁle format which

uses a unique conversion system to provide high-quality automatic

accompaniment based on a wide range of chord types.

Selecting a rhythm of a Style

8BtModrn

001

Style number Style name

Appears when

the Style mode is

active.

Swing H

016

— Quick Guide —

PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 23

Quick Guide

On the previous page, you’ve learned how to select your favorite rhythm of a Style. Here, you’ll

learn how to expand on that rhythm with bass and chord backing, and use all of it as your accom-

paniment as you play.

Press the [STYLE] button and then select a Style.

Turn auto accompaniment on.

Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button.

Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button again to turn the auto accom-

paniment off.

Turn SYNC START on.

Press the [SYNC START] button.

When the Sync Start standby mode is engaged, Style playback

will begin as soon as you play a chord in the accompaniment

range of the keyboard. You can turn off Sync Start standby mode

by pressing the [SYNC START] button.

● When auto accompaniment is on ...

The keys to the left of the Split Point (54; F#2) will play only

chords.

This is known as the “Auto Accompaniment range.”

Playing with a Style

8BtModrn

001

Appears when auto

accompaniment is on

•You can change the Split

Point. Refer to “Setting the

Split Point” on page 48.

NOTE

Split Point (54; F#2)

Auto Accompani-

ment range

8BtModrn

001

Flashes when Sync

Start is on.

Step 5 Play with a Style

24 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual

The Style will begin playing as soon as you play a chord in the

accompaniment range of the keyboard.

Not sure how to play chords? No problem! This instrument is

capable of playing chords even if you only play one key.

Try playing one, two or three keys (any notes will do) in the auto

accompaniment range of the keyboard. Different keys will pro-

duce different results.

Refer to page 56 for detailed instructions for playing chords.

Try playing other chords with your left hand and play a melody with

your right hand.

You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP]

button.

Auto Accompani-

ment range

Split Point

Auto Accompani-

ment range

Split Point

PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 25

Quick Guide

Step

Record your own

performance

You can record up to ﬁve of your own performances as User Songs (User 1-5: Song numbers 036-

040). Think of each User Song as a kind of basket or drawer for storing your recording. Remem-

ber that you can also record a Style (containing chord changes) along with your own performance.

Press the [REC] button.

After you’ve selected the desired User Song for recording, you

can select a Style to be recorded as well. To do this, press the

[STYLE] button and select the Style number while the ACMP

indication is on.

You can turn off the Record mode by pressing the [REC] button

again ( and stop ﬂashing).

Start recording.

When you play the keyboard, recording will begin.

By playing keys to the left of the Split Point when the Auto

Accompaniment is set to on, the Style starts sounding and is

recorded with your performance.

When Auto Accompaniment is set to off, only your keyboard per-

formance is recorded.

Recording Your Performance

User 1

rEC

001

Flashes

The lowest-numbered unrecorded User Song

(Song numbers 036-040) available for record-

ing is displayed. If you want to select the Song

you will be recording, select the desired Song

number by using the [+] and [-] buttons.

•A total of approximately

10,000 notes or 5,500

chord changes can be

recorded to the ﬁve User

Songs.

NOTE

• Accompaniment cannot be

turned on or off once the

[REC] button is pressed.

NOTE

• If all User Songs (Song

numbers 036-040) contain

recorded data, Song 036

will automatically be

selected. In this case, you

will record over and erase

any previous data in Song

036, so be careful that

you won’t be erasing any

material you want to

keep!

CAUTION

Split Point

— Quick Guide —

Step 6 Record your own performance

26 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual

Stop recording.

Pressing the [START/STOP] button stops recording and writes

the data to the User Song. (A “Writing!” message is shown.)

To playback the newly recorded performance, press the [START/

STOP] button.

The User Songs are organized into two tracks: Track 1 and Track 2. You can specify the track you

want to record to.

If you start recording by specifying a track, the track will be overwrit-

ten (existing data in the track is deleted and replaced with the new

recording).

Only your keyboard performance can be recorded to Track 1. Either a

Style or your performance can be recorded to Track 2, resulting in a

User Song like that depicted below.

●In order to record with the Style, turn the Auto Accompa-

niment to on (see Steps 1-2 on page 23), and then record

according to the instructions.

●

In order to record only your performance, turn the Auto Accom-

paniment to off and record according to the normal steps.

•Never attempt to turn the

power off when a “Writ-

ing!” message is shown

in the display. Doing so

can damage the ﬂash

memory and result in a

loss of data.

CAUTION

•Keep in mind that any

kind of power failure dur-

ing recording—such as

the power being turned

off, the AC adaptor being

plugged/unplugged or the

batteries running down—

will result in data loss.

CAUTION

• Use the Musicsoft Down-

loader to backup the User

Songs to a computer (page

66).

NOTE

(The “ACMP ON” lights.)

(The “ACMP ON” is unlit.)

Recording to a speciﬁed track

About track recording

• Record following the steps

in the previous page, and

your performance will be

recorded to Track 1 and the

Style (if you are playing

one) will be recorded to

Trac k 2.

NOTE

User Song

Recording to the

speciﬁed track

* When playing

the Style

Data that can be

recorded to Track 2

Data that can be

recorded to Track 1

Your own keyboard

performance only

Style playback* (including

chord changes) or your

own keyboard performance

•You cannot record the met-

ronome click, or the Trans-

pose and Tuning settings.

• The settings and buttons

below cannot be changed,

or if changed, the new set-

tings cannot be recorded if

entered during the record-

ing process.

ACMP ON/OFF, split

point, reverb type, chorus

type, harmony type,

[FUNCTION] button,

[PORTABLE GRAND]

button, [SOUND

EFFECT KIT] button.

NOTE

Track 1

Your own keyboard

performance

Track 2

Style

Track 1

Your own keyboard

performance

Track 2

Your own keyboard

performance

User Song User Song

PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 27

Quick Guide

Turn ACMP (auto accompaniment) on or off,

depending on what you want to record.

If you want to record Style playback, turn ACMP on. If you

want to record only your own keyboard performance, turn

ACMP off.

Specify the track you want to record.

Specify the track 2 when you want to record the Style.

When you want to record your own keyboard performance, you

can specify either track.

● Recording to Track 1

Press the [REC] button and [REC TRACK 1] button

simultaneously.

● Recording to Track 2

Press the [REC] button and [REC TRACK 2] button

simultaneously.

Press the [+], [-] buttons to select the User Song you want to record.

If you want to record Style playback to Track 2, press the

[STYLE] button and select the desired Style.

Start recording

Perform steps 2 and 3 on pages 25-26.

By playing keys to the left of the Split Point when the Auto

Accompaniment is set to on, the Style starts sounding and is

recorded. Only your performance is recorded by playing the

keyboard (any key is OK) when the Auto Accompaniment is set

to off.

Specifying track recording

•Keep in mind that both Tracks

1 and 2 will be overwritten

with new data if you record

without specifying the tracks.

• The both “L” and “R” ﬂashes,

this indicates that you have

speciﬁed Track 1 when the

Auto Accompaniment is on. If

you want to record your own

performance, press the

[TRACK 2] button to stop the

“L” ﬂashing. If you want to

record a Style, press the

[REC] button to cancel the

recording, and repeat the pro-

cedure from the beginning.

NOTE

User 1

rEC

001

Flashes when track 1 is

selected for recording.

Press simulta-

neously

User 1

rEC

001

Flashes

when track 2

is selected

for recording.

Lights when recorded data exists.

Tu r ns off when there is no recorded data, or when Mute

is set to on (page 42) to turn off playback of the track.

Press simulta-

neously

User 3

rEC

•You can record a new track

while listening to a previously

recorded track (the track indi-

cation will appear). You can

also mute recorded tracks

(the track will disappear)

while recording a new track

by pressing the desired track

button.

NOTE

Step 6 Record your own performance

28 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual

Deleting an entire User Song

Press the [SONG] button and select the User Song you want to

delete by using the number buttons [0]-[9], [+], [-].

Press and hold the [REC] button for longer than a second.

The Song Delete display appears.

You can cancel the delete operation by pressing the [-/NO] but-

ton.

Press the [+/YES] button.

A conﬁrmation message will appear on the display.

You can cancel the delete operation by pressing the [-/NO] but-

ton.

Press the [+/YES] button to delete the Song.

“Writing!” message will appear while the track is

being deleted.

Deleting User Songs

•You cannot delete a speciﬁc

track from a User Song.

NOTE

User 1

036

ClrUser1

YEs

Hold for longer

than a second.

Sure?

YEs

Writing!

PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 29

Quick Guide

Step

Using Oriental Scales

The Oriental Scales feature lets you simply and easily raise or lower the pitches of speciﬁc notes

and create your own scales. You can change the scale settings at any time-even when you are

playing. Up to four scale settings can be stored for instant recall, whenever you need them.

The ORIENTAL SCALE [SETTING] buttons, located at the top left side of the panel, simulate a

one-octave keyboard (C through B). Pressing each button turns the Scale Setting feature of the

speciﬁc note on/off. The Scale Setting feature affects all the notes having the same note name in

all octave registers. When this is set to on (the indicator above the selected button is lit), you can

play the keyboard in the Oriental scale. The default scale setting (tuning) for each note is -50

cents. You can also adjust the scale tuning by 1 cent as follows.

Call up the Scale Tuning function by pressing and holding the

desired “note” button (C-B) in the Scale Tuning section for longer

than a second.

Adjust the Scale Tuning.

Use the [+]/[-] or number buttons to adjust the desired tuning.

The range is from “-64” to “63” cents (one cent is one hundredth

of a semitone).

Setting an Oriental Scale—Scale Setting

• The Scale Setting function

is always turned off, when-

ever the power switch is

turned on.

• Scale tunings are not effec-

tive for song playback, Split

Voices or keyboard percus-

sion.

NOTE

Adjusting the Scale Tuning

Tune D

Current cent value

Hold for longer

than a second.

•You can also access the

Scale Setting display by

pressing the [FUNCTION]

button several times.

NOTE

Step 7 Using Oriental Scales

30 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual

● Using the [+] and [-] buttons:

Press the [+] or [-] button, repeatedly if necessary, until the

desired pitch value appears in the display. Or press and hold the

[+] or [-] button, until the desired pitch value appears in the dis-

play.

● Negative values:

You can also enter negative values directly, by simultaneously

holding down the [-] button and using the number buttons.

Adjust other notes as desired.

To do this, simply repeat steps 1-2 above.

Scale settings and on/off settings are memorized by the Scale Memory function.

Set the scale tuning of each note.

While holding the ORIENTAL SCALE [MEMORY] button, press one of

the [MEMORY 1-4] buttons. The indicator of the selected button will

light to indicate that the data has been stored.

• Press the [-] and [+] buttons

simultaneously to instantly

reset the value to its default

setting (0 cents).

NOTE

Registering the Scale settings

•Never attempt to turn the

power off when a “Writ-

ing!” message is shown

in the display. Doing so

can damage the ﬂash

memory and result in a

loss of data.

CAUTION

• The Scale Memory data is

retained in memory even

when the power is turned

off.

NOTE

PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 31

Quick Guide

The scale settings stored to a SCALE MEMORY button can be recalled at any time simply by

pressing the appropriate button.

Scale Memory can be turned off by pressing the currently lit [MEMORY 1-4] button. The indicator

goes out and the PSR-A300 returns to the regular scale setting.

You can select whether Scale Tuning is applied to accompaniment or not. Press the [FUNCTION]

button, repeatedly if necessary, until “TuneAcc” appears on the display, then turn it on or off by

using the [+]/[-] buttons.

Recall the Scale settings

Set the Accompaniment Tuning on

TuneAcc

oFF

Current setting

Step 7 Using Oriental Scales

32 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual

Step

Play with the Pitch

Bend Wheel

The [PITCH BEND] wheel can be used to add smooth pitch variations to notes you play on the

keyboard.

Roll the wheel upward to raise the pitch, or downward to lower the pitch. When you release the

wheel it will automatically return to center position and the keyboard pitch will return to normal.

The range of the pitch bend wheel can be adjusted in semitone increments. When the pitch bend

range is set to “2,” for example, rolling the wheel all the way up will produce a maximum pitch rise

of 2 semitones (one whole tone), and rolling it all the way down will produce a maximum pitch drop

of the same amount (2 semitones or one whole tone). With the highest possible pitch bend range

setting of “12,” the pitch bend range becomes +/-1 octave.

Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until “PBRange”

appears.

Use the number buttons [0]-[9], [+], [-] to set the Pitch Bend range as

required.

Adding pitch variations with the Pitch Bend Wheel

Adjust the pitch bend range

Currently Pitch Bend range

PBRange

Pitch Bend range

PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 33

Backup and Initialization

Backup

Some internal parameters will revert to their default values if not saved

before the power is turned off.

In order to backup these parameters press and hold the [FUNCTION] but-

ton for longer than a second.

* The User Songs and loaded Styles are automatically backed up when recording is completed,

ensuring that the data is not deleted even when you fail to backup.

Initialization

This function erases all backup data in the instrument’s ﬂash memory and restores the initial default

settings. The following initialization procedures are provided.

To clear data backed up to the internal ﬂash memory (described above),

turn the power on by pressing the [STANDBY/ON] switch while holding

the highest white key on the keyboard. The backed up data will be erased

and the default values restored.

To clear Song data and Style data that has been transferred to the internal

ﬂash memory from a computer, simultaneously hold down the highest

white key and the three highest black keys on the keyboard and turn the

power on by pressing the [STANDBY/ON] switch.

● Parameters that are saved in backup:

• User Songs* • Loaded Styles*

• Touch Response on/off setting • Scale Memory

• The following Function settings: Tuning, Scale Tune, Accompaniment Tuning ON/OFF,

Pitch Bend Range, Split Point, Touch Sensitivity, Style Volume, Song Volume,

Metronome Volume, Demo Cancel, Panel Sustain

Hold for longer than a second.

Backup Clear

• When you execute the

Backup Clear operation,

backup parameters will

be cleared. You can save

the backup parameters

(containing the ﬁve User

Songs) by using Music-

soft Downloader to trans-

fer them to a computer.

Refer to the section

“Transferring a user ﬁle

from the PSR-A300 to a

computer” on page 67.

CAUTION

Flash Clear

• When you execute the

Flash Clear operation,

Song data you have pur-

chased and downloaded

will also be cleared. Make

sure to save your impor-

tant data by transferring

to a computer using

Musicsoft Downloader

(page 67).

CAUTION

34 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual

GrandPno

001

Turn down the volume by turning the

[MASTER VOLUME] control to the left

and press the [STANDBY/ON] switch to

turn on the power.

Press the [STANDBY/ON] switch again

to turn the power OFF.

Turning the power on

Turn the [MASTER VOLUME] dial.

Adjusting the volume

Rotate coun-

terclockwise

to lower the

volume.

Rotate clock-

wise to

increase the

volume.

Press the [START/STOP] button after pressing

the [SONG] or [STYLE] button to start play-

back of the selected Song or Style (rhythm).

About the [START/STOP] button

The “Press & Hold” symbol that

appears next to some buttons indicates

that the button can be pressed and

held for longer than a second to call

up a related or different function.

The “Press & Hold” Symbol

Basic Operation and Displays

Basic Operation

PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 35

Basic Operation and Displays

When you select a basic function, the name and

number of the currently selected Song, Style and

Voice is shown. From this display, you can select

the desired Song, Style or Voice.

Press a button to select a basic function

Press the [SONG] button to

select a Song.

Press the [STYLE] button to

select a Style.

Press the [VOICE] button to

select a Voice.

The [FUNCTION] button contains

47 settings.

Each time you press the [FUNC-

TION] button, the setting item is

selected in sequence, and the value of

the selected item can be changed in

the display.

Function Settings (page 60)

● Number buttons [0]-[9]

The number buttons can be used to directly enter a Song,

Style or Voice number or parameter value.

For numbers that start with one or two zeroes, the ﬁrst

zeroes can be omitted

● [+], [-] buttons

Press the [+] button brieﬂy to increase the value by 1, or

press the [-] button brieﬂy to decrease the value by 1. Press

and hold either button to continuously increase or decrease

the value in the corresponding direction.

Set the number or value

Press number but-

tons [0], [0], [2].

BritePno

002

Example: Selecting Voice 002, Bright Piano.

Press brieﬂy to

decrease.

Press brieﬂy to

increase.

36 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation and Displays

GrandPno

001

003

The Main display shows all of the current basic settings for Song, Style and Voice. It also includes a range of

indicators that show the on/off status for various functions.

Display

Displays the melody and chord notes of a Song

when the Song lesson function is in use, or the

notes of chords you specify when the Dictio-

nary function is in use. At other times the notes

you play on the keyboard are displayed.

Notation

•Any notes occurring below or above the staff are

indicated by “8va” in the notation.

•For a few speciﬁc chords, not all notes may be

shown in the notation section of the display. This is

due to space limitations in the display.

NOTE

Information related to the

Song/recording tracks is shown

here. (See pages 25 and 42.)

Lit: Track contains data

Unlit: Tr ack is muted or contains no data

Flashing: Tr ack is selected as recording track

Indicates the current measure

during playback of a Song.

Indicates the beat of the cur-

rent Style or Song with ﬂash-

ing arrows.

Song/recording track display

Measure

Beat Display

003

Indicates the name of the

chord currently being

played back, or the name of

the chord being played on the keyboard.

Appears when the auto

accompaniment is on.

Indicates notes currently

being played.

Indicates the melody and

chord notes of a Song when the Song lesson

function is in use. Also indicates the notes of a

chord—either when playing a chord or when

using the Dictionary function.

Chord Display

ACMP ON

Keyboard Display

Appears when the Dual func-

tion is on (page 13).

Appears when the Harmony

function is on (page 44).

Appears when the Split func-

tion is on (page 14).

Appears when Reverb is on

(page 45).

Appears when Touch

Response is on (page 47).

DUAL

HARMONY

SPLIT

REVERB

TOUCH RESPONSE

PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 37

Song Lesson

Yamaha Education Suite 5

You can select any Song you like and use it for a left-hand, right-hand, or both-hands

lesson. Song Lesson lets you learn how to play Songs in three easy steps. Songs that

can be used with the Lesson feature include Songs transferred from a computer to

ﬂash memory (SMF Format 0 only; see page 65). The procedure for transferring songs

are described on page 67.

■ Lesson Flow

■ The practice methods:

Lesson 1 (Listen & Learn) ........ Listen and learn the melody or rhythm of a selected Song.

Lesson 2 (Timing) ...................... Learn to play the notes at the correct timing along with the Song.

Lesson 3 (Waiting) ..................... Learn to play the correct notes.

Lesson 1 (Listen & Learn)

There’s no need to play the keyboard in Lesson 1.

The model melody/chords (in other words, the musical material you should

learn) of the part you selected will sound. Listen to it carefully and learn it

well.

1 Select the desired Song for your lesson.

Press the [SONG] button, and then select a Song (referring to the Song

list on page 21) by using the number buttons [0]-[9], [+] and [-]. If you

want to practice a Song you’ve transferred from a computer, select one

of the Songs beginning from Song number 041.

The instrument includes 35 built in Songs. Some Songs (as shown

below) are intended for use as right-hand lessons, and cannot be used

for left-hand or both-hands lessons.

● Songs for right-hand lesson

Song numbers: 001-015

Select a Song

for your lesson.

Select the part you want

to practice.

Select the practice

method.

Start the

Lesson!

• User Songs cannot be used

for the lesson.

NOTE

•You cannot select the part

during Song playback

before Lesson 1 starts. If a

Song is currently being

played back, stop the Song

ﬁrst, then continue from

Step

NOTE

Chevaler

023

001

Song Lesson

38 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual

2 Select the part you want to practice.

Press the [R] button for a right-hand lesson, [L] button for a left-hand

lesson, or press both the [R] and [L] buttons simultaneously for a both-

hands lesson. The selected part is displayed.

A “No LPart” message is shown in the display if you select the left part

in one of the Songs 001-015, which do not have left part data. These

Songs cannot be used for left-hand or both-hands lessons.

3 Start Lesson 1.

Press the [LISTEN & LEARN] button to start Lesson 1.

The melody of the part you selected in Step

2 will sound. Listen to it

carefully and learn it well.

4 Stop the Lesson mode.

You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/

STOP] button.

Right

Left

BothHand

Both-hands lesson

Right-hand lessonLeft-hand lesson

•For songs transferred from

a computer, the “No LPart”

indication does not appear,

even when there is no left

hand part in the song.

NOTE

No LPart

•Even after Lesson 1 has

started and the Song is

playing, you can still select

the part.

• When the melody Voice of

the Song is changed, the

key position shown in the

display may be shifted (in

octave units), depending on

the Voice selected (page

41).

•You can select Lessons 1-3

by pressing the [LISTEN &

LEARN], [TIMING] and

[WAITING] buttons, respec-

tively.

NOTE

LISTEN

011

The notation and key positions of the model

melody are shown in the display.

Song Lesson

PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 39

Lesson 2 (Timing)

In this lesson, try playing the notes with the correct timing. Simply

concentrate on playing each note in time with the rhythmic accompa-

niment. The correct notes sound even if you play wrong notes as long

as you play in time with the rhythm.

1 Select a Song for your lesson.

2 Select the part you want to prac-

tice.

3 Start Lesson 2.

Press the [TIMING] button to start Lesson 2.

Play the notes shown in the display.

In Lesson 2, simply play each note in time with the music.

4 Stop the Lesson mode.

You can stop the Lesson mode at any

time by pressing the [START/STOP]

button.

When the lesson Song has played all the way through in Lesson mode 2 or

3, your performance will be evaluated in four levels: OK, Good, Very

Good, or Excellent.

Good

Very0Good

Excellent

•You cannot use Dual or Split Voices

during lessons.

• The Split Point is ﬁxed and it can-

not be changed. For the left-hand

lesson, it is ﬁxed at 59 or B2; for

the left-hand chord lesson, it is

ﬁxed at 54 or F

NOTE

•You cannot select the part during

Song playback before Lesson 2

starts. If a Song is currently being

played back, stop the Song ﬁrst,

then continue from Step

NOTE

•Even after Lesson 2 has started

and the Song is playing, you can

still select the part.

NOTE

TIMING

004

Grade

Song Lesson

40 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual

Lesson 3 (Waiting)

In this mode, try playing the correct notes. The notes you should play

appear in the score and the keyboard on the display. The Song pauses until

you play the right note.

1 Select a Song for your lesson.

2 Select the part you want to practice.

3 Start Lesson 3.

Press the [WAITING] button to start Lesson 3.

Play the notes shown in the display.

Try playing the correct notes.

4 Stop the Lesson mode.

You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/

STOP] button.

•You cannot select the part

during Song playback

before Lesson 3 starts. If a

Song is currently being

played back, stop the Song

ﬁrst, then continue from

Step

NOTE

•Even after Lesson 3 has

started and the Song is

playing, you can still select

the part.

NOTE

WAITING

PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 41

Song settings

Changing the Melody Voice

You can change a Song’s melody Voice to any other Voice you prefer.

1 Select the Song and play it.

Refer to the section “Playing Songs” on page 20.

2 Select a desired Voice by using the number buttons [0]-

[9], [+], [-].

The selected Voice sounds when you play the keyboard.

If a Song has played through and stopped during this procedure, press

the [START/STOP] button to start playback again.

3 Press and hold the [VOICE] button for longer than a sec-

ond.

“SONG MELODY VOICE” appears in the display for a few seconds,

indicating that the Voice selected in Step

2 has replaced the Song’s

original melody Voice.

Song Volume

This procedure allows you to adjust the balance between Song playback

and the notes you play on the keyboard by setting the volume of the play-

back sound.

1 Press the [SONG] button.

•You cannot change the mel-

ody Voice of a User Song.

NOTE

HnkyTonk

003

001

Hold for longer than a second.

Song settings

42 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual

2 Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until

“SongVol” appears.

3 Set the Song Volume by pressing the number buttons [0]-

[9], [+], [-].

Mute

You can mute Track 1 or Track 2 during Song playback.

•Track 1 can be muted by pressing the [REC TRACK 1] button during

Song playback.

•Track 2 can be muted by pressing the [REC TRACK 2] button during

Song playback.

You can cancel the mute function by pressing the corresponding track but-

tons, [TRACK 1] or [TRACK 2] again during Song playback, or by select-

ing any other Song.

Current Song Volume Song Volume

SongVol

100

• Press the [+] and [-] buttons

simultaneously to instantly

reset the value to its default

setting (100).

NOTE

Lit—track contains

data.

Unlit—track is muted

or contains no data.

Arabic

001

010

Pressing one of the Track but-

tons [TRACK 1] or [TRACK 2]

will mute the corresponding

track during Song playback.

Song settings

PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 43

Practice Makes Perfect

You can repeatedly practice a section you ﬁnd difﬁcult. This function lets

you specify a section of a Song you want to practice—“A” is the start point

and “B” is the end point—for repeat playback.

1 Play the Song and press the [A-B REPEAT] button at the beginning of

the section you want to repeat (the “A” point).

“A-REPEAT” will be displayed.

2 Press the [A-B REPEAT] button a second time at the end of the section

you want to repeat (the “B” point). The speciﬁed A-B section of the

Song will now play repeatedly, letting you practice the section over and

over.

You can stop repeat playback by pressing the [A-B REPEAT] button.

The A-B REPEAT mode will be canceled and normal playback of the

Song will continue.

Repeat playback of this section

• The repeat start and end

points can be speciﬁed in

one-measure increments.

•You can also set the A-B

Repeat function when the

Song is stopped. Simply

use the [REW] and [FF] but-

tons to select the desired

measures, pressing the [A-

B REPEAT] button for each

point, then start playback.

• If you want to set the start

point “A” at the very begin-

ning of the Song press the

[A-B REPEAT] button

before starting playback of

the Song.

NOTE

REPEAT

A-

REPEAT

A-b

• The A-B Repeat function

will be canceled when you

select another Song or

Style mode.

NOTE

REPEAT

oFF

44 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual

Play With a Variety of Effects

Adding Harmony

This feature adds harmony notes as well as tremolo or echo effects to the

Main Voice.

1 Press the [HARMONY] button to turn harmony on.

When you don’t want to add harmony notes, press the [HARMONY

ON/OFF] button again to turn Harmony off.

2 Press and hold the [HARMONY ON/OFF] button for longer than a sec-

ond.

“HarmType” appears in the display for a few seconds, followed by the

Harmony Type.

3 Select a desired Harmony Type by using the number buttons [0]-[9], [+],

[-].

Refer to the Harmony Type list on page 84.

Try playing the keyboard with the harmony function. The effect and

operation of each Harmony Type is different—refer to the section

“How to sound each Harmony Type” on the next page as well as the

Harmony Type List for details.

• When you press the [HAR-

MONY ON/OFF] button to

turn this feature on, the

appropriate Harmony type

for the currently selected

Main Voice is automatically

selected.

NOTE

Appears when harmony is on.

•You can also access the

Harmony Type setting dis-

play by pressing the

[FUNCTION] button sev-

eral times.

• Harmony will be turned off if

the Chord Dictionary func-

tion is used.

NOTE

Trio

Currently selected

Harmony type

Hold for longer

than a second.

Play With a Variety of Effects

PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 45

Adding Reverb

Reverb adds the ambience of a room or concert hall to the sound that you

play on the keyboard.

Press the [REVERB ON/OFF] button to turn Reverb on. Reverb is normally

on. You can check how the selected Reverb Type sounds by playing the key-

board. To turn Reverb off, press the [REVERB ON/OFF] button again.

The ideal type is automatically selected whenever you select a Song or

Style, but you can select any of the available Reverb Types.

1 Press and hold the [REVERB ON/OFF] button for longer than a sec-

ond. “REVERB” appears in the display for a few seconds, followed by

the Reverb Type.

● How to sound each Harmony Type

• The harmony notes can be

added only to the Main

Voice, not to Dual or Split

Voices.

• The keys left of the Split

Point of the keyboard pro-

duce no harmony notes

when the auto accompani-

ment is on (ACMP ON is lit).

NOTE

• Harmony type 01-05

• Harmony type 06-12 (Trill)

• Harmony type 13-19 (Tremolo)

• Harmony type 20-26 (Echo)

You can adjust the Harmony Volume in the Function Settings (page 60).

Press the right-hand keys while play-

ing chords in the auto accompaniment

range of the keyboard when the Auto

Accompaniment is on (page 23).

Hold down two keys.

Keep holding down the keys.

To add Reverb

Appears when

Reverb is on.

Select a Reverb Type

Hall2

Currently selected Reverb Type

Hold for longer

than a second.

Play With a Variety of Effects

46 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual

2 Select the desired Reverb Type by using the num-

ber buttons [0]-[9], [+], [-].

Refer to the Reverb Type list on page 85 for

details.

You can adjust the Reverb depth in the Function

Settings (Reverb Level on page 60).

Adding Chorus

This effect makes the Voice sound richer, warmer and more spacious. The

best-suited Chorus type is automatically selected whenever you select a

Voice; however, you can select any of the available types.

1 Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until the “Chorus”

appears.

“Chorus” appears in the display for a few seconds, followed by the

Chorus Type.

Select a desired Chorus Type by using the number buttons [0]-[9], [+], [-].

Refer to the Chorus Type list on page 85 for details.

You can adjust the Chorus depth independently for the Main, Dual and

Split Voices in the Function Settings (page 60).

Adding Panel Sustain

This function adds a ﬁxed sustain to the keyboard Voices.

1 Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until the “Sustain”

item appears.

2 Press the [+] button to turn the Panel Sustain on.

Panel Sustain will be added to the notes you play on the keyboard

when the Panel Sustain is on. To turn it off, press the [-] button.

•You can also access the

Reverb Type setting display

by pressing the [FUNC-

TION] button several times.

NOTE

Currently selected

Chorus Type

Chorus1

Sustain

oFF

Current setting

• See the section “Connect-

ing a footswitch (SUSTAIN

Jack)” on page 9 for infor-

mation on applying sustain

with the optional footswitch.

NOTE

Sustain

PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 47

Handy Performance Features

Touch Response Sensitivity

Press the [TOUCH ON/OFF] button to turn Touch Response on.

When Touch Response is on, you can control the volume of notes accord-

ing to how hard you play the keys. Touch Response is normally on. Press

the [TOUCH ON/OFF] button again to turn the Touch Response off. When

Touch Response is off, the same volume will be produced no matter how

hard you play the keys.

When Touch Response is on, you can adjust the sensitivity of the keyboard

in response to keyboard dynamics in three steps. Higher values produce

greater (easier) volume variation in response to keyboard dynamics—in

other words, greater sensitivity.

1 Press and hold the [TOUCH ON/OFF] button for longer than a second.

“TouchSns” appears in the display for a few seconds, followed by the

current Touch Sensitivity value.

2 Select a Touch Sensitivity setting between 1 and 3 by using the number

buttons [0]-[9], [+], [-].

Touch Response

Appears when Touch

Response is on.

• The Touch Response func-

tion cannot be used for

some Voices (such as

organ), even if the Touch

Response icon appears in

the display.

NOTE

Setting the Touch Sensitivity

Currently selected Touch Sensitivity

Medium

Hold for longer

than a second.

Handy Performance Features

48 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual

Setting the Split Point

The Split Point setting can be changed as desired.

The initial default Split Point is key number 54 (the F#2 key), but you can

change it to another key. When you change the Split Point, the auto accom-

paniment range also changes.

1 Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until “SplitPnt”

appears.

2 Set the Split Point by using the number buttons [0]-[9], [+], [-].

Transpose

The overall pitch of the instrument can be shifted up or down by a maxi-

mum of 1 octave in semitone increments.

1 Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until the “Transpos”

appears.

2 Use the number buttons [0]-[9], [+], [-] to set the

Transpose value between -12 and +12 as

required.

36 48 60 72 84 96

Split Point—default setting: 54 (F#2)

Currently selected Split Point

Split Point

SplitPnt

054

001

• Press the [+] and [-] buttons

simultaneously to instantly

reset the value to its default

setting (54 or F

2).

NOTE

Current transpose value

Transpos

• The pitch of the Drum and

Oriental Percussin Kits

Voices (Voice numbers 109-

121, 518-523) cannot be

changed.

• Press the [+] and [-] buttons

simultaneously to instantly

reset the value to its default

setting (00).

NOTE

Handy Performance Features

PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 49

Tuning

You can ﬁne tune the pitch of the entire instrument. The overall tuning of

the instrument can be shifted up or down by a maximum of 100 cents in 1-

cent increments (100 cents = 1 semitone).

1 Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until “Tuning”

appears.

2 Use the number buttons [0]-[9], [+] and [-] to set the Tuning value

between -100 and +100 as required.

One Touch Setting

Sometimes selecting the ideal Voice to play with a Song or Style can be

confusing. The One Touch Setting feature automatically selects the most

suitable Voice for you when you select a Style or Song. Simply select Voice

number “000” to activate this feature.

1 Press the [VOICE] button, and then select Voice number “000” by

using the number buttons [0]-[9], [+], [-].

This turns the One Touch Setting feature on. One Touch Setting will be

turned off if you select any other Voice number.

Currently tuning value

Tuning

000

• The pitch of the Drum and

Oriental Percussin Kits

Voices (Voice numbers 109-

121, 518-523) cannot be

changed.

• Press the [+] and [-] buttons

simultaneously to instantly

reset the value to its default

setting (000).

NOTE

Appears when One Touch Setting is on.

SprnoSax

000

Handy Performance Features

50 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual

Changing the tempo of the Song/Style

Songs and Styles can be played at any tempo you desire—fast or slow.

1 Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up the Tempo setting in the dis-

play after selecting a Style/Song.

2 Set the Tempo by using the number buttons [0]-[9], [+], [-].

You can also set the Tempo by simply tapping the [TEMPO/TAP] but-

ton at the required tempo—four times for time signatures in 4, and

three times for time signatures in 3.

You can change the Tempo during Style/Song playback by pressing the

[TEMPO/TAP] button just twice.

Adjusting the Voice Parameters

The volume, octave (the pitch of the instrument can be shifted by up or

down in octaves) and Chorus Send Level can be individually adjusted for

the Main, Dual, and Split Voices.

You can adjust each of the parameters above in the Function settings (page

60).

● Main Voice Parameters (page 61)

• Main Voice Volume

• Main Voice Octave

• Main Voice Chorus Send Level

● Dual Voice Parameters (page 61)

• Dual Voice Volume

• Dual Voice Octave

• Dual Voice Chorus Send Level

● Split Voice Parameters (page 61)

• Split Voice Volume

• Split Voice Octave

• Split Voice Chorus Send Level

Current Tempo value

Tempo

116

• Press the [+] and [-] buttons

simultaneously to instantly

reset the value to the

default tempo of a Style or

Song.

NOTE

PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 51

Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions

Various ways to start and stop Style playback

The following three methods can be used to start Style playback. In all

cases you will need to press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn auto

accompaniment on before actually starting Style playback. Whichever

method you choose, you can press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] before

starting playback. To begin your performance, an introduction will play

automatically, then will automatically switch to the MAIN section when

ﬁnished.

■ Immediate Start

Press the [START/STOP] button to begin rhythm-only playback of the

selected Style.

The bass and chords will begin playing as soon as you play a chord in

the accompaniment range of the keyboard.

■ Chord Start

Press the [SYNC START] button and the beat arrows will begin ﬂash-

ing, indicating that the Sync Start “standby” mode has been engaged.

The bass and chords will begin playing as soon as you play a chord in

the accompaniment range of the keyboard.

■ Tap Start

You can supply a count-in at any tempo you like to start playback. Sim-

ply tap the [TEMPO/TAP] button at any tempo—4 times for time signa-

tures in 4, and 3 times for time signatures in 3—and the selected Style

rhythm will begin playing at the tapped tempo.

The bass and chords will begin playing as soon as you play a chord in

the accompaniment range of the keyboard.

Starting Style playback

Appears when the auto

accompaniment is on

Immediate Start

Sync Start standby

Style playback begins when

you play a chord

GrandPno

001

Accompani-

ment range

Start at the

tapped tempo

Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions

52 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual

The following three methods can be used to stop Style playback.

■ Immediate Stop

Playback will stop as soon as you press the [START/STOP] button.

■ Stop and Enter Sync Start Mode

If you press the [SYNC START] button during Style playback, playback

will stop immediately and the Sync Start standby mode will be engaged

(beat arrows will ﬂash).

■ Play the Ending and Stop

Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button to begin playing an ending sec-

tion. Playback will stop when the ending has played all the way through.

If you press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button a second time (while the

ending is playing), the ending will play in ritardando (the tempo will

gradually get slower).

Stopping Style playback

Immediate Stop

Sync Start standby

GrandPno

001

Stop immediately and

enter the Sync Start

mode

Stop after ending plays

Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions

PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 53

Pattern Variation (Sections)

The instrument features a wide variety of Style “sections” (patterns) that allow you to

vary the arrangement of the accompaniment to match the Song you are playing.

1 Press the [STYLE] button and then select a Style.

2 Turn auto accompaniment on.

Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button.

3 Turn SYNC START on.

Press the [SYNC START] button.

● INTRO section

This is used for the beginning of the Song

When the intro ﬁnishes playing, accompaniment shifts to the main section.

The length of the intro (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style.

● MAIN section

This is used for playing the main part of the Song. It plays a main accompaniment pattern, and repeats

indeﬁnitely until another section’s button is pressed. There are two variations on the basic pattern (A and

B), and the Style playback sound changes harmonically based on the chords you play with your left hand.

● Fill-in section

This is automatically added before changing the section A and B.

● ENDING section

This is used for the ending of the Song. When the ending is ﬁnished, the auto accompaniment stops

automatically. The length of the ending (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style.

Intro Main A/B

Auto ﬁllEnding

Appears when the auto accompani-

ment is on.

Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions

54 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual

4 Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button.

5 Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.

6 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the Intro

of the selected Style starts.

For this example, play a C major chord (as shown below). For informa-

tion on how to enter chords, see “Playing Auto Accompaniment

Chords” on page 56.

7 Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button.

When the ﬁll-in is ﬁnished, it leads smoothly into the selected main

section A/B.

8 Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.

This switches to the ending section.

When the ending is ﬁnished, the auto accompaniment stops automati-

cally. You can have the ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by

pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button again while the ending is

playing back.

MAIN A

The name of the selected section—MAIN A

or MAIN B—will be displayed

INTRO≥A

Accompani-

ment range

FILL A≥B

ENDING

Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions

PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 55

Adjusting the Style Volume

This procedure allows you to adjust the balance between Style playback

and the notes you play on the keyboard by setting the volume of the play-

back sound.

1 Press the [STYLE] button.

2 Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until the

“StyleVol” appears.

3 Set the Style volume by using the number buttons [0]-[9],

[+], [-].

StyleVol

100

Current Style volume setting Style Volume

• Press the [+] and [-] buttons

simultaneously to instantly

reset the value to its default

setting (100).

NOTE

56 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual

Playing Auto Accompaniment Chords

You’ve learned in the section “Play with a Style (Accompaniment)” on page 22 that the

“feel” of the Style changes every time you play a chord on the left-hand side of the key-

board. Here, you’ll learn the types of the chords and how to play them in greater detail.

The examples of chords are given here in the key of C.

There are two basic ways (below) you can play the chords on the left-hand side of the

keyboard, while playing the Style (page 23)

■ Easy Chords

■ Standard Chords

Easy Chords

This method lets you easily play chords in the accompaniment range of the

keyboard using only one, two, or three ﬁngers.

Standard Chords

This method lets you produce accompaniment by playing chords using

normal ﬁngerings in the accompaniment range of the keyboard.

36 48 60 72 84 96

Split Point—default setting: 54 (F#2)

• Root notes and the corre-

sponding keys

NOTE

Accompaniment range

•To play a major chord

Press the root note of

the chord.

•To play a minor chord

Press the root note

together with the near-

est black key to the left

of it.

•To play a seventh chord

Press the root note together

with the nearest white key to

the left of it.

•

To play a minor seventh chord

Press the root note together

with the nearest white and

black keys to the left of it

(three keys altogether).

( )

(9)

( )

(9)

Caug

( )

CmM

( )

(9)

CmM

( )

CmM

(9)

( )

Cdim

(9)

( )

(13)

( )

(b9)

( )

(b13)

Csus

1+2+5

( )

(9)

(#11)

( )

(b5)

( )

(#11)

(#9)

( )

C aug

(

11)

( )

CM aug

( )

C sus

( )

* Notes enclosed in parentheses are optional; the chords will be recognized without them.

Playing Auto Accompaniment Chords

PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 57

● Recognized Standard Chords Chart

* These chords are not shown in the Chord Dictionary function.

Chord Name/[Abbreviation] Normal Voicing Chord (C) Display

Major [M] 1 - 3 - 5 C C

Add ninth [(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - 5 C(9) C(9)

Sixth [6] 1 - (3) - 5 - 6 C6 C6

Sixth ninth [6(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 6 C6(9) C6(9) *

Major seventh [M7]

1 - 3 - (5) - 7 or

1 - (3) - 5 - 7

CM7 CM7

Major seventh ninth [M7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 CM7(9) CM7(9) *

Major seventh add sharp eleventh [M7(#11)]

1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - 7 or

1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - 7

CM7(#11) CM7(#11)*

Flatted ﬁfth [(b5)] 1 - 3 - b5C(b5) Cb5 *

Major seventh ﬂatted ﬁfth [M7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - 7 CM7b5 CM7b5 *

Suspended fourth [sus4] 1 - 4 - 5 Csus4 Csus4

Augmented [aug] 1 - 3 - #5 Caug Caug

Major seventh augmented [M7aug] 1 - (3) - #5 - 7 CM7aug CM7aug *

Minor [m] 1 - b3 - 5 Cm Cm

Minor add ninth [m(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - 5 Cm(9) Cm(9)

Minor sixth [m6] 1 - b3 - 5 - 6 Cm6 Cm6

Minor seventh [m7] 1 - b3 - (5) - b7 Cm7 Cm7

Minor seventh ninth [m7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - b7 Cm7(9) Cm7(9)

Minor seventh add eleventh [m7(11)] 1 - (2) - b3 - 4 - 5 - (b7) Cm7(11) Cm7(11) *

Minor major seventh [mM7] 1 - b3 - (5) - 7 CmM7 CmM7

Minor major seventh ninth [mM7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - 7 CmM7(9) CmM7(9) *

Minor seventh ﬂatted ﬁfth [m7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - b7 Cm7b5 Cm7b5

Minor major seventh ﬂatted ﬁfth [mM7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - 7 CmM7b5 CmM7b5 *

Diminished [dim] 1 - b3 - b5 Cdim Cdim

Diminished seventh [dim7] 1 - b3 - b5 - 6 Cdim7 Cdim7

Seventh [7]

1 - 3 - (5) - b7 or

1 - (3) - 5 - b7

C7 C7

Seventh ﬂatted ninth [7(b9)] 1 - b2 - 3 - (5) - b7 C7(b9) C7(b9)

Seventh add ﬂatted thirteenth [7(b13)] 1 - 3 - 5 - b6 - b7 C7(b13) C7(b13)

Seventh ninth [7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - b7 C7(9) C7(9)

Seventh add sharp eleventh [7(#11)]

1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - b7 or

1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - b7

C7(#11) C7(#11)

Seventh add thirteenth [7(13)] 1 - 3 - (5) - 6 - b7 C7(13) C7(13)

Seventh sharp ninth [7(#9)] 1 - #2 - 3 - (5) - b7 C7(#9) C7(#9)

Seventh ﬂatted ﬁfth [7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - b7C7b5C7b5 *

Seventh augmented [7aug] 1 - 3 - #5 - b7 C7aug C7aug

Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4] 1 - 4 - (5) - b7 C7sus4 C7sus4

One plus two plus ﬁve [1+2+5] 1 - 2 - 5 C1+2+5 C *

• Notes in parentheses can

be omitted.

• Playing two same root keys

in the adjacent octaves pro-

duces accompaniment

based only on the root.

•A perfect ﬁfth (1+5) pro-

duces accompaniment

based only on the root and

ﬁfth which can be used with

both major and minor

chords.

• The chord ﬁngerings listed

are all in “root” position, but

other inversions can be

used—with the following

exceptions: m7, m7

5, 6,

m6, sus4, aug, dim7, 7

6(9), 1+2+5

•Inversion of the 7sus4 and

m7(11) chords are not rec-

ognized if the notes shown

in parentheses are omitted.

• The auto accompaniment

will sometimes not change

when related chords are

played in sequence (e.g.

some minor chords fol-

lowed by the minor sev-

enth).

•Two-note ﬁngerings will pro-

duce a chord based on the

previously played chord.

NOTE

Playing Auto Accompaniment Chords

58 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual

Looking up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary

The Dictionary function is essentially a built-in “chord dictionary” that

shows you the individual notes of chords. It is ideal when you know the

name of a certain chord and want to quickly learn how to play it.

1 Press and hold the [WAITING] button for longer than a second.

“Dict.” will appear in the display.

2 As an example, we’ll learn how to play a GM7 (G major seventh)

chord. Press the “G” key in the root section of the keyboard. (The note

doesn’t sound.) The root note you set is shown in the display.

3 Press the “M7” (major seventh) key in the chord section of the key-

board. (The note doesn’t sound.)

The notes you should play for the speciﬁed chord (root note and chord

type) are shown in the display, both as notation and in the keyboard

diagram.

To call up possible inversions of the chord, press the [+]/[-] buttons.

4 Try playing a chord in the auto accompaniment section of the key-

board, checking the indications in the display.

When you’ve played the chord properly, a bell sound signals your suc-

cess and the chord name in the display ﬂashes.

Dict.

Hold for longer

than a second.

Dict.

001

Keys for root

dictionary

Keys for chord type

dictionary

• Major chords are usually

indicated by the root name

only. For example, the indi-

cation “C” in a score refers

to a “C Major” chord. To

look up the ﬁngering for a

major chord press the root

key and then the M chord

type key.

NOTE

Dict.

001

(9)

mM7

m(9)

m7(9)

m7b5 7(9)

7(b13)

dim7

7aug

7sus4

7(b9)

7(#9)

7(13)

7(#11)

dim

aug

sus4

Individual notes of chord

(keyboard)

Notation of chord

Chord name (root

and type)

Playing Auto Accompaniment Chords

PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 59

■ About chords

Playing two or more notes together simultaneously creates a “chord.”

Playing a note together with two other notes spaced three notes (steps) apart—such as the

notes C, E and G—creates a harmonious sound. Chords like these are called “triads” and

they play an important role in most music.

Taking the chord above as an example, the lowest note of this triad is called the “root note.” This is the central note

sound, and it supports or anchors the rest of the notes chord.

You’ll notice that the middle note of the chord above (E) is the third step in the succession of scale notes—C, D, then E.

There are two types of “thirds” in chords: major thirds and minor thirds.

We’ll also alter the top note of our original chord and make three additional chords, as shown below. (The captions indi-

cate the intervals between each of the notes.)

The basic characteristics of the chord sound are same, no matter if we change the order of the notes from bottom to top,

or if we add other same name notes in different octaves. Beautiful sounding harmonies can be built in this manner, and

emotional music can be created by playing different chords one after the other according to commonly accepted rules.

Harmony determines the nature of chords, and music is created based on harmony.

● Chord names

From the chord name, you can tell at a glance what type of chord it is and which notes

make up the chord. Understanding the basic structure of chords is very useful—once

you’re familiar with this, you’ll be quickly and easily play chords by looking at the

names that appear above the notation.

● Chord types (These chords are among those that can be recognized by the Fingered method.)

3rd

Root

3rd

Minor third—three half steps from the rootMajor third—four half steps from the root

◆ Major chord

aug

dim

Minor 3rd Major 3rd Major 3rd Minor 3rd Major 3rd Major 3rd Minor 3rd Minor 3rd

◆ Minor chord ◆ Augmented chord ◆ Diminished chord

Root note

Chord type

sus4

Suspended 4

Perfect 5

Perfect 4

Flatted 7

Major chord

Minor 7

Flatted 7

Minor chord

Major 7

Major chord

mM7

Minor/major 7

Major 7

Minor chord

(

)

, ﬂatted 5

Flatted 5

chord

(

)

Minor 7

, ﬂatted 5

Flatted 5

7sus4

, suspended 4

Flatted 7

Suspended 4

chordMinor 7

chord

60 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual

Function Settings

The [FUNCTION] button gives you access to a variety of operations related to adjust-

ing or enhancing the sound and making settings for connection to external devices.

Select the item and change the value

There are 47 different items that can be set.

1 Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until

desired item appears.

Each time the [FUNCTION] button is pressed 47 function items are

displayed in sequence. The description and display sample is provided

on the Function Setting List on page 60-61.

2 Set the value by using the number buttons [0]-[9], [+], [-].

For on/off settings or the PC Mode setting, use [+]/[-] buttons.

3 If necessary, hold the [FUNCTION] button for longer than

a second to save your settings to ﬂash memory.

(Refer to “Backup” on page 33)

● Function Setting List

Item Display Range/settings Description

Style Volume StyleVol 000-127 Determines the volume of the Style.

Song Volume

SongVol

000-127 Determines the volume of the Song.

Transpose

TransPos

-12–00–12 Determines the pitch of the instrument by semitone incre-

ments.

Tuning

-100–000–100 Sets the pitch of the instrument’s sound in 1-cent increments.

Pitch Bend Range

PBRange

01-12 Determines the pitch bend range.

Split Point

SplitPnt

000-127

(C-2–G8)

Determines the highest key for the Split Voice and sets the

Split “point”—in other words, the key that separates the Split

(lower) and Main (upper) Voices. The Split Point setting and

Accompaniment Split Point setting are automatically set to the

same value.

Touch Sensitivity

TouchSns

1 (Soft)

2 (Medium)

3 (Hard)

When Touch Response is on, this determines the sensitivity of

the feature.

StyleVol

100

Value Function item

Writing!

Hold for longer

than a second.

Function Settings

PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 61

Accompaniment Tuning

TuneAcc

ON/OFF Determines whether Scale Tuning is applied to the accompa-

niment or not. Use the [+] button to turn it on (apply it to the

accompaniment) and [-] to turn it off.

Oriental Scales

(Tune C - Tune B)

Tune C

Tune B

-64–00–63 Determines the pitch of each note.

Main Voice Volume

M.Volume

000-127 Determines the volume of the Main Voice.

Main Voice Octave

M.Octave

-2–0–2 Determines the octave range for the Main Voice.

Main Voice Chorus

Send Level

M.Chorus

000-127 Determines how much of the Main Voice’s signal is sent to the

Chorus effect.

Dual Voice

D.Voice

001-482 Selects the Dual Voice.

Dual Voice Volume

D.Volume

000-127 Determines the volume of the Dual Voice.

Dual Voice Octave

D.Octave

-2–0–2 Determines the octave range for the Dual Voice.

Dual Voice Chorus Send

Level

D.Chorus

000-127 Determines how much of the Dual Voice’s signal is sent to the

Chorus effect.

Split Voice

S.Voice

001-482 Selects the Split Voice.

Split Voice Volume

S.Volume

000-127 Determines the volume of the Split Voice.

Split Voice Octave

S.Octave

-2–0–2 Determines the octave range for the Split Voice.

Split Voice Chorus Send

Level

S.Chorus

000-127 Determines how much of the Split Voice’s signal is sent to the

Chorus effect.

Reverb Type

Reverb

01-10 Determines the Reverb type, including off (10).

Refer to the Reverb Type list on page 85.

Reverb Level

RevLevel

000-127 Determines how much of the Voice’s signal is sent to the

Reverb effect.

Chorus Type

Chorus

1-5 Determines the Chorus Type, including off (05).

Refer to the Chorus Type list on page 85.

Panel Sustain

Sustain

ON/OFF Determines whether or not Panel Sustain is always applied to

the Main/Dual/Split Voices. Panel Sustain is applied continu-

ously when ON, or not applied when OFF.

Harmony Type

HarmType

01-26 Determines the Harmony Type.

Refer to the Harmony Type list on page 84.

Harmony Volume

HarmVol

000-127 Determines the volume of the Harmony effect when Harmony

type 1-5 is selected.

Style Register

StyleReg

Select and register a style ﬁle from ﬂash ﬁles that are loaded

from computer. Select a style ﬁle by using [+]/[-] button, and

then register it by using [0] button. The selected Style will

automatically be registered as Style number 136.

PC Mode

PC0mode

OFF/PC1/PC2 Optimizes the MIDI settings when you connect to a computer

(page 64).

Local On/Off

Local

ON/OFF Determines whether the instrument’s keyboard controls the

internal tone generator (ON) or not (OFF).

External Clock

ExtClock

ON/OFF Determines whether the instrument synchronizes to the inter-

nal clock (OFF) or an external clock (ON).

Initial Setup Send

InitSend

YES/NO Lets you send the data of the panel settings to a computer.

Use the [+] button to transmit the data.

Time Signature

TimeSig

00-15 Determines the time signature of the Metronome.

Metronome Volume

MetroVol

000-127 Determines the volume of the Metronome.

Lesson Track (R)

R-Part

01-16 Determines the guide track number for your right hand lesson.

The setting is only effective for Songs in SMF format 0 trans-

ferred from a computer. Refer to the section “Using Trans-

ferred Songs for Lessons” on page 67.

Lesson Track (L)

L-Part

01-16 Determines the guide track number for your left hand lesson.

The setting is only effective for Songs in SMF format 0 trans-

ferred from a computer. Refer to the section “Using Trans-

ferred Songs for Lessons” on page 67

Demo Cancel

D-Cancel

ON/OFF Determines whether Demo cancel is enabled or not. When

this is set to ON, the Demo Song will not play, even if the

[DEMO] button is pressed.

Item Display Range/settings Description

62 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual

About MIDI

The instrument features a MIDI terminals that can be connected to other MIDI instru-

ments and devices for expanded musical functionality.

What is MIDI?

MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is a world-standard interface

for communication between electronic musical instruments and music

devices. When MIDI-equipped instruments are connected via a MIDI

cable, it becomes possible to transfer performance and setting data between

them for signiﬁcantly enhanced performance and production potential.

What You Can Do With MIDI

•Transferring performance and setting data between the PSR-A300 and

MIDI-equipped instruments or computers. (page 63)

•Transferring the Song or Style data between the PSR-A300 and comput-

ers. (page 65)

• Connect the PSR-A300 to external equipment only after turning off power for

all devices. Then, turn on the power, ﬁrst to the PSR-A300, then to the con-

nected external equipment.

CAUTION

About MIDI

PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 63

Transferring Performance Data To and From Another Instrument

By connecting the PSR-A300 to other MIDI devices or a computer, the perfor-

mance data of the instrument can be used on those other MIDI devices or com-

puter, and also the performance data from other MIDI devices and computer

can be received and sounded with the PSR-A300.

● When the instrument is connected with another MIDI device, it

transmits/receives performance data.

● When the instrument is connected with a computer, it transmits/

receives performance data.

■ MIDI settings

These settings should be made when transmitting/receiving performance

data to a connected MIDI device or computer.

Local Control determines whether or not notes played on the instrument

are sounded by its internal tone generator system; the internal tone genera-

tor is active when local control is on, and inactive when local control is off.

On ........ This is the normal setting in which notes played on the instru-

ment’s keyboard are sounded by the internal tone generator

system. Data received via the instrument’s MIDI terminal

will also be played by the internal tone generator.

Off ....... With this setting the instrument itself produces no sound

(keyboard performance, Harmony, or Style playback), but the

performance data is transmitted via the MIDI terminal. Data

received via the instrument’s MIDI terminal will also be

played by the internal tone generator.

You can set the Local Control in the Function Settings (page 60).

MIDI device

MIDI IN

MIDI OUT

MIDI IN

PSR-A300

A USB-MIDI interface

(such as the Yamaha UX16)

MIDI IN MIDI OUT

USB

PSR-A300

Local Settings

• If you can’t get any sound

out of the instrument, Local

Control may be the most

likely cause. Playing the

keyboard results in no

sound when Local is set to

OFF.

NOTE

About MIDI

64 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual

These settings determine whether the instrument is synchronized to its own

internal clock (OFF), or to a clock signal from an external device (ON).

On......... The instrument’s time based functions will be synchronized

to the clock from an external device connected to the MIDI

terminal.

Off ........ The instrument uses its own internal clock (default).

You can set the External Clock in the Function Settings (page 60).

The PC settings instantly reconﬁgure all important MIDI settings (as

shown below). The selections are PC1, PC2 and OFF.

● The chart of PC Settings

* Set the PC mode to PC2 when using Digital Music Notebook.

Digital Music Notebook is a major new multimedia platform for music tuition and

performance. Visit the website below for more information on the latest version of

Digital Music Notebook and how to install it.

www.digitalmusicnotebook.com

** Determines whether Song data is transmitted (ON) via MIDI or not (OFF) during

Song playback.

*** Determines whether Style data is transmitted (ON) via MIDI or not (OFF) during

Style playback.

**** Determines whether keyboard performance data of the instrument is transmitted

(ON) or not (OFF).

1 Press and hold the [DEMO] button for longer than a second to call up

the PC Mode.

2 Select PC1, PC2, or OFF by using the [+], [-] buttons.

PC1 PC2* OFF

LOCAL Off Off On

EXTERNAL CLOCK On Off Off

SONG OUT** Off Off On

STYLE OUT*** Off Off On

KEYBOARD OUT**** Off On On

External Clock Settings

• If External Clock is ON and

no clock signal is being

received from an external

device, the Song, Style, and

metronome functions will

not start.

NOTE

PC Mode

• Song Out, Style Out and

Keyboard Out can only be

changed by the PC set-

ting. They cannot be set

independently.

• Copyrighted Songs and

User Songs cannot be used

with Song Out.

NOTE

PC mode

oFF

Hold for longer

than a second.

About MIDI

PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 65

You can also use this instrument as a remote control device for the Digital

Music Notebook application on your computer (via the MIDI connection)

—controlling playback, stop and transport functions from the panel.

● Remote control keys

PSR-A300: To use the remote control functions, simultaneously hold

down the lowest two keys on the keyboard (C1 and C#1) and press the

appropriate key (shown below).

Sends the PSR-A300 panel settings to an external MIDI device.

When recording a PSR-A300 performance to an external sequencer or sim-

ilar equipment, you can use this function to send the current PSR-A300

panel settings so that when the sequence is played back the original panel

settings are automatically restored.

You can set Initial Send in the Function settings (page 60).

Transferring data between the PSR-A300 and a computer

The PSR-A300 includes 35 preset Songs and 135 Styles, but you can load

other Songs and Styles from your computer and use them in the same way

as the preset Songs as long as the loaded Song is SMF format 0* or SFF

(Style File Format).

Loaded Song data will be stored in Song numbers beginning with 041 and

one of the loaded style/s can be registered as the 136th style.

In order to perform the operations described in this section you will need to

use a computer connected to the Internet to download the free Musicsoft

Downloader application from the URL listed below.

* The SMF (Standard MIDI File) format is one of the most common and widely compatible

sequence formats used for storing sequence data. Most commercially available MIDI

sequence data is provided in SMF Format 0.

Remote Control of MIDI Devices

• Remote control of MIDI

devices will function inde-

pendently of the PC2 mode.

NOTE

C#1

C6: Fast forward

B5: Start

A5: Stop

G5: Rewind

F5: Top (move to the beginning of

the song)

E5: Metronome ON/OFF

PSR-A300 Panel Setting Transmission (Initial Send)

About MIDI

66 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual

You can download the “Musicsoft Downloader” application from the fol-

lowing website. Make sure that your computer has an Internet connection.

http://music.yamaha.com/download/

● The minimum computer requirements for Musicsoft Down-

loader operation are as follows:

• OS : Windows 98SE/Me/2000/XP Home Edition/

XP Professional

• CPU : 233 MHz or higher; Intel® Pentium®/Celeron®

processor family (500 MHz or more is recommended)

• Memory : 64 MB or more (256 MB or more is recommended)

• Hard Disk : at least 128 MB of free space (at least 512 MB of free

space is recommended)

• Display : 800 x 600 HighColor (16-bit)

• Other : Microsoft® Internet Explorer®5.5 or higher

After installing the Musicsoft Downloader application on your computer,

connect the PSR-A300 as described below.

A Yamaha UX16 or similar USB-MIDI interface (sold separately) will be

necessary for MIDI connection between the PSR-A300 and a USB-

equipped computer.

Make sure to purchase a Yamaha UX16 or a quality USB-MIDI interface at

a musical instrument store, computer store or electrical appliance store.

If you use the UX16 interface, install the driver supplied with the interface

on your computer.

Installing Musicsoft Downloader

• Visit the Yamaha website for

more information on the lat-

est version of Musicsoft

Downloader (version 5.2.0

or higher) and how to install

it.

NOTE

Connecting a personal computer

A USB-MIDI interface

(such as the Yamaha UX16)

MIDI IN MIDI OUT

USB

PSR-A300

About MIDI

PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 67

You can transmit Song or Style File Format (SFF) ﬁles from

your computer to your PSR-A300’s Flash Memory.

For details about how to transmit the data using the Music-

soft Downloader application, refer to the Online help topic

“Transferring Data Between the Computer and Instrument

(for unprotected data)” of the Musicsoft Downloader.

● Data that can be loaded to the PSR-A300 from

a computer

• Songs : 99 Songs max

(Song numbers 041-)

• Styles : Style number 136

• Data : 373 kilobytes

• Song data Format: SMF Format 0

• Style data Format: SFF

• File : 05PK.USR (user ﬁle)

***.MID (MIDI Song)

***.STY (Style ﬁle)

You can transfer backup data (page 33), including the ﬁve

User Songs stored to the instrument, to a computer as a “user

ﬁle” by using Musicsoft Downloader. For details about how

to transmit Song data using the Musicsoft Downloader appli-

cation, refer to the Online help topic “Transferring Data

Between the Computer and Instrument (for unprotected

data)” in the application.

● Data that can be transferred to a computer

from the PSR-A300

• User ﬁle (05PK.USR: backup data containing ﬁve

User Songs)

• Songs transferred from a computer

• Styles transferred from a computer

● Erasing Transferred Song Data from the PSR-A300 Memory

To erase all Songs or Styles transferred from the computer, use “ﬂash clear” function on page 33.

To erase speciﬁc Songs and Styles transferred from the computer, use the Delete function on Musicsoft

Downloader.

● Using Transferred Songs for Lessons

In order to use Songs (only SMF format 0) transferred from a computer for lessons it is necessary to specify which

channels are to be played back as the right-hand and left-hand parts. Refer to the “Lesson Track (R)” or “Lesson

Track (L)” in the Function Setting List on page 61. The procedure for setting the “guide track” is as follows:

Select a transferred Song you want to use for lessons. Press

the

[FUNCTION] button a number of times until

the “R-Part” or “L-Part” appears in the display, and then use the number buttons [0]-[9], [+], [-] to select the

channel you want to play back as the speciﬁed right- or left-hand part.

We recommend that you select channel 1 for the right-hand part and channel 2 for the left-hand part.

Transferring data from a computer

• The Musicsoft Downloader application may not

be able to access the instrument in the follow-

ing cases:

• During Demo playbaack

• During Style playback

• During Song playback

• During recording

NOTE

• Use the power adaptor when transferring

data. The data can be corrupted if the bat-

teries fail during the transfer.

•Never turn the power off and never plug/

unplug the AC power adaptor during data

transmission. Not only will the data fail to

be transferred and saved, but operation of

the ﬂash memory may become unstable

and its contents may disappear completely

when the power is turned on or off.

CAUTION

• Close the window to exit from the Musicsoft

Downloader and re-enable control of the instru-

ment.

NOTE

Transferring a user ﬁle from the PSR-A300 to a computer

• Preset Song data cannot be transmitted from

the PSR-A300.

• Do not rename the user ﬁle on the computer. If

you do so, it will not be recognized when trans-

ferred to the instrument.

NOTE

• The backup data, including the ﬁve User

Songs is transmitted/received as a single

ﬁle. As a result, all backup data (including

the ﬁve Songs) will be overwritten every

time you transmit or receive. Keep this in

mind when transferring data.

CAUTION

68 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual

Troubleshooting

Problem Possible Cause and Solution

When the instrument is turned on or off, a

popping sound is temporarily produced.

This is normal and indicates that the instrument is receiving electrical

power.

When using a mobile phone, noise is pro-

duced.

Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the instrument may produce

interference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone or use it further

away from the instrument.

There is no sound even when the keyboard is

played or when a Song or Style is being

played back.

Check that nothing is connected to the PHONES/OUTPUT jack on the

rear panel. When a set of headphones is plugged into this jack, no sound

is output.

Check the Local Control on/off. (See page 63.)

Playing keys in the right hand area of the

keyboard does not produce any sound.

When using the Dictionary function (page 58), the keys in the right hand

area are used only for entering the chord root and type.

• The volume is too soft.

• The sound quality is poor.

• The rhythm stops unexpectedly or will not

play.

• The recorded data of the Song, etc. does

not play correctly.

• The LCD display suddenly goes dark, and

all panel settings are reset.

The batteries are low or dead. Replace all six batteries with completely

new ones, or use the optional AC adaptor.

The Style or Song does not play back when

the [START/STOP] button is pressed.

Is External Clock set to ON? Make sure External Clock is set to OFF;

refer to “External Clock Settings” on page 64.

The Style does not sound properly.

Make sure that the Style Volume (page 55) is set to an appropriate level.

Is the Split Point set at an appropriate key for the cords you are playing?

Set the Split Point at an appropriate key (page 48).

Is the “ACMP ON” indicator showing in the display? If it is not showing

press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button so that it does show.

Not all of the voices seem to sound, or the

sound seems to be cut off.

The instrument is polyphonic up to a maximum of 32 notes. If the Dual

voice or Split voice is being used and a style or Song is playing back at

the same time, some notes/sounds may be omitted (or “stolen”) from the

accompaniment or Song.

The footswitch (for sustain) seems to pro-

duce the opposite effect. For example, press-

ing the footswitch cuts off the sound and

releasing it sustains the sounds.

The polarity of the footswitch is reversed. Make sure that the footswitch

plug is properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the

power.

The sound of the voice changes from note to

note.

This is normal. The AWM tone generation method uses multiple record-

ings (samples) of an instrument across the range of the keyboard; thus,

the actual sound of the voice may be slightly different from note to note.

The ACMP ON indicator does not appear

when the [ACMP ON/OFF] button is pressed.

Always press the [STYLE] button ﬁrst when you are going to use any

style-related function.

The harmony doesn’t sound.

The method of sounding the harmony effect (01-26) differs depending on

the selected type. For Types 01-05, turn the Auto Accompaniment on

and play it by pressing a chord in the auto accompaniment section of the

keyboard, then play some keys in the right-hand side to get the harmony

effect. For Types 06-26, turning the Auto Accompaniment on or off has

no effect. However, it is necessary to play two notes simultaneously for

Types 06-12.

The part indications, such as Right, Left and

Both Hands, do not appear—even when

pressing the [R] or [L] buttons for the Lesson.

Make sure that you are not pressing the [R] or [L] buttons while the Song

is playing. If you press one of the part buttons while playing the Song

and before starting the Lesson, these buttons serve to mute the corre-

sponding Song tracks. Stop the Song ﬁrst, then select the desired part

and start the Lesson.

PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 69

Index

A-B REPEAT button ................................................. 43

ACMP ON/OFF button .............................................. 23

DEMO button ............................................................. 21

DUAL ON/OFF button .............................................. 13

FF button .................................................................... 21

FUNCTION button .............................................. 35, 60

HARMONY ON/OFF button .................................... 44

INTRO/ENDING/rit. Button ..................................... 53

L button ...................................................................... 38

LISTEN & LEARN button ........................................ 38

MAIN/AUTO FILL button ........................................ 53

MASTER VOLUME control ................................. 9, 34

METRONOME ON/OFF button ............................... 18

number buttons 0-9, +/YES, -/NO ............................. 35

ORIENTAL SCALE buttons ..................................... 29

PAUSE button ............................................................ 21

PITCH BEND wheel .................................................. 32

PORTABLE GRAND button .................................... 15

R button ...................................................................... 38

REC button ................................................................. 25

REC TRACK 1 button ............................................... 27

REC TRACK 2 button ............................................... 27

REVERB ON/OFF button ......................................... 45

REW button ............................................................... 21

SONG button ....................................................... 20, 35

SOUND EFFECT KIT button ................................... 17

SPLIT ON/OFF button .............................................. 14

STANDBY/ON switch .......................................... 9, 34

START/STOP button ................................................. 34

STYLE button ...................................................... 22, 35

SYNC START button ................................................ 23

TEMPO/TAP button .................................................. 50

TIMING button .......................................................... 39

TOUCH ON/OFF button ........................................... 47

VOICE button ...................................................... 12, 35

WAITING button ....................................................... 40

DC IN 12V jack ........................................................... 8

MIDI IN/OUT terminal .............................................. 62

PHONES/OUTPUT jack .............................................. 9

SUSTAIN jack ............................................................. 9

AB Repeat .................................................................. 43

AC Power Adaptor ....................................................... 8

Accompaniment Tuning ............................................. 31

ACMP ON/OFF ......................................................... 23

Auto Accompaniment ................................................ 23

Auto accompaniment range ...................................23-24

Backup ........................................................................ 33

Backup Clear .............................................................. 33

Battery .......................................................................... 8

Beat Display ............................................................... 36

Cancel ......................................................................... 28

Chord ......................................................... 24, 56-57, 59

Chord Dictionary ........................................................ 58

Chord Display ...................................................... 36, 57

Chorus ........................................................................ 46

Chorus Send Level (Dual) .......................................... 61

Chorus Send Level (Main) ......................................... 61

Chorus Send Level (Split) .......................................... 61

Chorus Type List ........................................................ 85

Computer ...............................................................63-67

Delete (Song) ............................................................. 28

Demo .......................................................................... 21

Display ....................................................................... 36

Drum Kit .................................................................... 15

Drum Kit List ............................................................. 78

Dual ............................................................................ 13

Ending .................................................................. 52, 54

External Clock ...................................................... 61, 64

FF ............................................................................... 21

Flash Clear ................................................................. 33

Flash Memory ............................................................ 67

Footswitch (Sustain jack) ............................................. 9

Function Setting List .............................................60-61

Grade .......................................................................... 39

Harmony ................................................................44-45

Harmony Type List .................................................... 84

Harmony Volume ....................................................... 61

Panel Controls and Terminals Alphabetical Order

Index

70 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual

Initial Send ................................................................. 61

Initialization ............................................................... 33

Intro ...................................................................... 51, 54

Keyboard Display ...................................................... 36

Lesson ................................................................... 37-40

Lesson track R/L for transferred songs ................ 61, 67

Local .................................................................... 61, 63

Main/Auto fill ....................................................... 53-54

Master Volume Control ......................................... 9, 34

Measure ...................................................................... 36

Melody Voice ............................................................. 41

Metronome ............................................................ 18-19

Metronome Volume ................................................... 19

MIDI .......................................................................... 62

Music Rest ................................................................... 6

Musicsoft Downloader .......................................... 65-66

Mute ........................................................................... 42

NO .............................................................................. 28

Notation ...................................................................... 36

Octave (Dual) ............................................................. 61

Octave (Main) ............................................................ 61

Octave (Split) ............................................................. 61

One Touch Setting ..................................................... 49

Option ........................................................................ 91

Oriental Percussion Kit .............................................. 15

Oriental Percussion Kit List ....................................... 78

Oriental Scales ........................................................... 29

Panel Sustain .............................................................. 46

Part ............................................................................. 38

Pause .......................................................................... 21

PC setting ................................................................... 64

Pitch Bend range ........................................................ 32

Press and Hold for a while ......................................... 34

Recording .............................................................. 25-27

Remote Control .......................................................... 65

Reverb ........................................................................ 45

Reverb Level .............................................................. 61

Reverb Type List ........................................................ 85

Rew ............................................................................ 21

Rhythm ....................................................................... 22

Root ...................................................................... 56, 58

Save data to computer ................................................ 67

Scale Setting ..........................................................29-31

SFF ....................................................................... 22, 67

SMF Format 0 ............................................................ 65

Song ............................................................................ 20

Song List .................................................................... 21

Song Volume .............................................................. 41

Split ............................................................................ 14

Split Point ............................................................. 14, 48

Start ............................................................................ 34

Stop ............................................................................ 34

Style ............................................................22-23, 51-54

Style File .............................................................. 22, 67

Style List .................................................................... 83

Style Register ............................................................. 61

Style Volume .............................................................. 55

Supplied Accessories ............................................. 6, 91

Synchro Start ........................................................ 23, 51

Tempo ........................................................................ 50

Time Signature ........................................................... 19

Touch Response ......................................................... 47

Touch sensitivity ........................................................ 47

Track .............................................................. 26, 36, 42

Track Rec ..............................................................26-27

Transfer ................................................................ 63, 67

Transpose ................................................................... 48

Tuning ........................................................................ 49

Turn Auto accompaniment on or off .......................... 23

User File ..................................................................... 67

User Song ..............................................................25-26

Voice .....................................................................12-14

Voice List ................................................................... 71

XGlite ........................................................................... 6

YES ............................................................................ 28

PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi 71

Voice List / Voice-Liste / Liste des voix

■ Maximum Polyphony • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

The instrument has 32-note maximum polyphony. This means that

it can play a maximum of up to 32 notes at once, regardless of

what functions are used. Auto accompaniment uses a number of

the available notes, so when auto accompaniment is used the total

number of available notes for playing on the keyboard is corre-

spondingly reduced. The same applies to the Split Voice and Song

functions. If the maximum polyphony is exceeded, earlier played

notes will be cut off and the most recent notes have priority (last

note priority).

■ Maximale Polyphonie • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Das Instrument verfügt über eine maximale Polyphonie von 32

Noten. Dies bedeutet, daß das Instrument unabhängig von den akti-

vierten Funktionen maximal 32 Noten gleichzeitig spielen kann.

Eine bestimmte Anzahl der verfügbaren Noten wird von der auto-

matischen Begleitung belegt; bei deren Einsatz verringert sich somit

die Anzahl der für das Spiel auf der Klaviatur verfügbaren Noten

entsprechend. Das Gleiche gilt für Split Voices und Song-Funktion.

Wenn die maximale Polyphonie überschritten wird, werden die am

frühesten gespielten Noten ausgeschaltet und die zuletzt gespielten

Noten haben Vorrang (Last Note Priority).

■ Polyphonie maximale • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Le PSR-A300 dispose d’une polyphonie maximale de 32 notes.

Cela signiﬁe que l’instrument peut reproduire un nombre maximal

de 32 voix à la fois, indépendamment des fonctions utilisées.

L’accompagnement automatique fait appel à un certain nombre de

notes disponibles. Il s’ensuit que lorsque l’accompagnement auto-

matique est utilisé, le nombre total de notes disponibles pour l’inter-

prétation au clavier est réduit en conséquence. Cela s’applique aussi

aux fonctions Split Voice (Voix partagées) et Song (Morceau). Lors-

que la polyphonie maximale est dépassée, les notes jouées en pre-

mier ne produisent aucun son ; seules les notes interprétées en

dernier sont audibles (priorité à la dernière note).

• The Voice List includes MIDI program

change numbers for each voice. Use these

program change numbers when playing the

instrument via MIDI from an external device.

•Program Numbers 001 to 128 directly relate

to MIDI Program Change Numbers 000 to

127. That is, Program Numbers and Program

Change Numbers differ by a value of 1.

Remember to take this into consideration.

• Some voices may sound continuously or

have a long decay after the notes have been

released while the sustain pedal (footswitch)

is held.

NOTE

•In der Voice-Liste sind für jede Voice MIDI-

Programmwechselnummern enthalten. Ver-

wenden Sie diese Programmwechselnum-

mern, wenn Sie das Instrument über MIDI

von einem externen Gerät aus ansteuern.

•Die Programmnummern 001 bis 128 hängen

direkt mit den MIDI-Programmwechsel-Num-

mern 000 bis 127 zusammen. Das bedeutet:

Programmnummern und Programmwechsel-

Nummern unterscheiden sich mit einem

Wert von 1. Denken Sie bei diesen Überle-

gungen daran.

• Solange der Sustain-Fußschalter gedrückt

ist, ertönen einige Voices nach dem Loslas-

sen der Taste eventuell kontinuierlich oder

mit einer langen Abklingzeit (Decay).

HINWEIS

• La liste des voix comporte des numéros de

changement de programme MIDI pour cha-

que voix. Utilisez ces derniers pour com-

mander le PSR-A300 à partir d’un

périphérique MIDI.

• Les numéros de programme 001 à 128 cor-

respondent aux numéros de changement de

programme MIDI 000 à 127. Cela signiﬁe

que les numéros de programme et les numé-

ros de changement de programme sont

décalés de 1. N’oubliez pas de tenir compte

de cet écart.

• Certaines voix peuvent avoir une sonorité

prolongée ou un long déclin après le relâ-

chement des touches, et ceci pendant la

durée de maintien de la pédale de sustain

(sélecteur au pied).

NOTE

205

Voice List / Voice-Liste / Liste des voix

72 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi

● Panel Voice List / Verzeichnis der Bedienfeld-

Voices / Liste des voix de panneau

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1 - 128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0 - 127)

LSB

(0 - 127)

PIANO

001 0 112 1 Grand Piano

002 0 112 2 Bright Piano

003 0 112 4 Honky-tonk Piano

004 0 112 3 MIDI Grand Piano

005 0 113 3 CP 80

006 0 112 7 Harpsichord

E.PIANO

007 0 114 5 Galaxy Electric Piano

008 0 112 5 Funky Electric Piano

009 0 112 6 DX Modern Electric Piano

010 0 113 6 Hyper Tines

011 0 114 6 Venus Electric Piano

012 0 112 8 Clavi

ORGAN

013 0 112 17 Jazz Organ 1

014 0 113 17 Jazz Organ 2

015 0 112 18 Click Organ

016 0 116 17 Bright Organ

017 0 112 19 Rock Organ

018 0 114 19 Purple Organ

019 0 118 17 16'+2' Organ

020 0 119 17 16'+4' Organ

021 0 114 17 Theater Organ

022 0 112 20 Church Organ

023 0 113 20 Chapel Organ

024 0 112 21 Reed Organ

ACCORDION

025 0 113 22 Traditional Accordion

026 0 112 22 Musette Accordion

027 0 113 24 Bandoneon

028 0 112 23 Harmonica

GUITAR

029 0 112 25 Classical Guitar

030 0 112 26 Folk Guitar

031 0 113 26 12Strings Guitar

032 0 112 27 Jazz Guitar

033 0 113 27 Octave Guitar

034 0 112 28 Clean Guitar

035 0 117 28 60’s Clean Guitar

036 0 112 29 Muted Guitar

037 0 112 30 Overdriven Guitar

038 0 112 31 Distortion Guitar

BASS

039 0 112 33 Acoustic Bass

040 0 112 34 Finger Bass

041 0 112 35 Pick Bass

042 0 112 36 Fretless Bass

043 0 112 37 Slap Bass

044 0 112 39 Synth Bass

045 0 113 39 Hi-Q Bass

046 0 113 40 Dance Bass

STRINGS

047 0 112 49 String Ensemble

048 0 112 50 Chamber Strings

049 0 112 51 Synth Strings

050 0 113 50 Slow Strings

051 0 112 45 Tremolo Strings

052 0 112 46 Pizzicato Strings

053 0 112 41 Violin

054 0 112 43 Cello

055 0 112 44 Contrabass

056 0 112 106 Banjo

057 0 112 47 Harp

058 0 112 56 Orchestra Hit

CHOIR

059 0 112 53 Choir

060 0 113 53 Vocal Ensemble

061 0 112 54 Vox Humana

062 0 112 55 Air Choir

SAXOPHONE

063 0 112 67 Tenor Sax

064 0 112 66 Alto Sax

065 0 112 65 Soprano Sax

066 0 112 68 Baritone Sax

067 0 114 67 Breathy Tenor Sax

068 0 112 69 Oboe

069 0 112 72 Clarinet

070 0 112 70 English Horn

071 0 112 71 Bassoon

TRUMPET

072 0 112 57 Trumpet

073 0 112 60 Muted Trumpet

074 0 112 58 Trombone

075 0 113 58 Trombone Section

076 0 112 61 French Horn

077 0 112 59 Tuba

BRASS

078 0 112 62 Brass Section

079 0 113 62 Big Band Brass

080 0 119 62 Mellow Horns

081 0 112 63 Synth Brass

082 0 113 63 80’s Brass

083 0 114 63 Techno Brass

FLUTE

084 0 112 74 Flute

085 0 112 73 Piccolo

086 0 112 76 Pan Flute

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1 - 128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0 - 127)

LSB

(0 - 127)

206

Voice List / Voice-Liste / Liste des voix

PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi 73

● XGlite Voice/XGlite Optional Voice* List /

Liste der XGlite-Voices/optionale XGlite-Voices* /

Voix XGlite/liste des voix* XGlite en option

087 0 112 75 Recorder

088 0 112 80 Ocarina

SYNTH LEAD

089 0 112 81 Square Lead

090 0 112 82 Sawtooth Lead

091 0 112 86 Voice Lead

092 0 112 99 Star Dust

093 0 112 101 Brightness

094 0 115 82 Analogon

095 0 119 82 Fargo

SYNTH PAD

096 0 112 89 Fantasia

097 0 113 101 Bell Pad

098 0 112 92 Xenon Pad

099 0 112 95 Equinox

100 0 113 90 Dark Moon

PERCUSSION

101 0 112 12 Vibraphone

102 0 112 13 Marimba

103 0 112 14 Xylophone

104 0 112 115 Steel Drums

105 0 112 9 Celesta

106 0 112 11 Music Box

107 0 112 15 Tubular Bells

108 0 112 48 Timpani

DRUM KITS

109 127 0 1 Standard Kit 1

110 127 0 2 Standard Kit 2

111 127 0 9 Room Kit

112 127 0 17 Rock Kit

113 127 0 25 Electronic Kit

114 127 0 26 Analog Kit

115 127 0 28 Dance Kit

116 127 0 33 Jazz Kit

117 127 0 41 Brush Kit

118 127 0 49 Symphony Kit

119 126 0 1 SFX Kit 1

120 126 0 2 SFX Kit 2

121 126 0 113 Sound Effect Kit

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1 - 128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0 - 127)

LSB

(0 - 127)

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1 - 128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0 - 127)

LSB

(0 - 127)

PIANO

122 0 0 1 Grand Piano

123 0 1 1 Grand Piano KSP

124 0 40 1 Piano Strings

125 0 41 1 Dream

126 0 0 2 Bright Piano

127 0 1 2 Bright Piano KSP

128 0 0 3 Electric Grand Piano

129 0 1 3 Electric Grand Piano KSP

130 0 32 3 Detuned CP80

131 0 0 4 Honky-tonk Piano

132 0 1 4 Honky-tonk Piano KSP

133 0 0 5 Electric Piano 1

134 0 1 5 Electric Piano 1 KSP

135 0 32 5 Chorus Electric Piano 1

136 0 0 6 Electric Piano 2

137 0 1 6 Electric Piano 2 KSP

*138 0 32 6 Chorus Electric Piano 2

139 0 41 6 DX + Analog Electric Piano

140 0 0 7 Harpsichord

141 0 1 7 Harpsichord KSP

142 0 35 7 Harpsichord 3

143 0 0 8 Clavi

144 0 1 8 Clavi KSP

CHROMATIC

145 0 0 9 Celesta

146 0 0 10 Glockenspiel

147 0 0 11 Music Box

148 0 64 11 Orgel

149 0 0 12 Vibraphone

150 0 1 12 Vibraphone KSP

151 0 0 13 Marimba

152 0 1 13 Marimba KSP

153 0 64 13 Sine Marimba

154 0 97 13 Balimba

155 0 98 13 Log Drums

156 0 0 14 Xylophone

157 0 0 15 Tubular Bells

158 0 96 15 Church Bells

159 0 97 15 Carillon

160 0 0 16 Dulcimer

161 0 35 16 Dulcimer 2

162 0 96 16 Cimbalom

163 0 97 16 Santur

207

Voice List / Voice-Liste / Liste des voix

74 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi

ORGAN

164 0 0 17 Drawbar Organ

165 0 32 17 Detuned Drawbar Organ

166 0 33 17 60’s Drawbar Organ 1

167 0 34 17 60’s Drawbar Organ 2

168 0 35 17 70’s Drawbar Organ 1

169 0 37 17 60’s Drawbar Organ 3

170 0 40 17 16+2'2/3

171 0 64 17 Organ Bass

172 0 65 17 70’s Drawbar Organ 2

173 0 66 17 Cheezy Organ

174 0 67 17 Drawbar Organ 3

175 0 0 18 Percussive Organ

176 0 24 18 70’s Percussive Organ

177 0 32 18 Detuned Percussive Organ

178 0 33 18 Light Organ

179 0 37 18 Percussive Organ 2

180 0 0 19 Rock Organ

181 0 64 19 Rotary Organ

182 0 65 19 Slow Rotary

183 0 66 19 Fast Rotary

184 0 0 20 Church Organ

185 0 32 20 Church Organ 3

186 0 35 20 Church Organ 2

187 0 40 20 Notre Dame

188 0 64 20 Organ Flute

189 0 65 20 Tremolo Organ Flute

190 0 0 21 Reed Organ

191 0 40 21 Puff Organ

192 0 0 22 Accordion

193 0 0 23 Harmonica

194 0 32 23 Harmonica 2

195 0 0 24 Tango Accordion

196 0 64 24 Tango Accordion 2

GUITAR

197 0 0 25 Nylon Guitar

198 0 43 25 Velocity Guitar Harmonics

199 0 96 25 Ukulele

200 0 0 26 Steel Guitar

201 0 35 26 12-string Guitar

202 0 40 26 Nylon & Steel Guitar

203 0 41 26 Steel Guitar with Body Sound

204 0 96 26 Mandolin

205 0 0 27 Jazz Guitar

206 0 32 27 Jazz Amp

207 0 0 28 Clean Guitar

208 0 32 28 Chorus Guitar

209 0 0 29 Muted Guitar

210 0 40 29 Funk Guitar 1

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1 - 128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0 - 127)

LSB

(0 - 127)

211 0 41 29 Muted Steel Guitar

212 0 45 29 Jazz Man

213 0 0 30 Overdriven Guitar

214 0 43 30 Guitar Pinch

215 0 0 31 Distortion Guitar

216 0 40 31 Feedback Guitar

217 0 41 31 Feedback Guitar 2

218 0 0 32 Guitar Harmonics

219 0 65 32 Guitar Feedback

220 0 66 32 Guitar Harmonics 2

BASS

221 0 0 33 Acoustic Bass

222 0 40 33 Jazz Rhythm

223 0 45 33 Velocity Crossfade Upright Bass

224 0 0 34 Finger Bass

225 0 18 34 Finger Dark

226 0 40 34 Bass & Distorted Electric Guitar

227 0 43 34 Finger Slap Bass

228 0 45 34 Finger Bass 2

229 0 65 34 Modulated Bass

230 0 0 35 Pick Bass

231 0 28 35 Muted Pick Bass

232 0 0 36 Fretless Bass

233 0 32 36 Fretless Bass 2

234 0 33 36 Fretless Bass 3

235 0 34 36 Fretless Bass 4

236 0 0 37 Slap Bass 1

237 0 32 37 Punch Thumb Bass

238 0 0 38 Slap Bass 2

239 0 43 38 Velocity Switch Slap

240 0 0 39 Synth Bass 1

241 0 40 39 Techno Synth Bass

242 0 0 40 Synth Bass 2

243 0 6 40 Mellow Synth Bass

244 0 12 40 Sequenced Bass

245 0 18 40 Click Synth Bass

246 0 19 40 Synth Bass 2 Dark

*247 0 40 40 Modular Synth Bass

248 0 41 40 DX Bass

STRINGS

249 0 0 41 Violin

250 0 8 41 Slow Violin

251 0 0 42 Viola

252 0 0 43 Cello

253 0 0 44 Contrabass

254 0 0 45 Tremolo Strings

255 0 8 45 Slow Tremolo Strings

256 0 40 45 Suspense Strings

257 0 0 46 Pizzicato Strings

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1 - 128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0 - 127)

LSB

(0 - 127)

208

Voice List / Voice-Liste / Liste des voix

PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi 75

258 0 0 47 Orchestral Harp

259 0 40 47 Yang Chin

260 0 0 48 Timpani

ENSEMBLE

261 0 0 49 Strings 1

262 0 3 49 Stereo Strings

263 0 8 49 Slow Strings

264 0 35 49 60’s Strings

265 0 40 49 Orchestra

266 0 41 49 Orchestra 2

267 0 42 49 Tremolo Orchestra

268 0 45 49 Velocity Strings

269 0 0 50 Strings 2

270 0 3 50 Stereo Slow Strings

271 0 8 50 Legato Strings

272 0 40 50 Warm Strings

273 0 41 50 Kingdom

274 0 0 51 Synth Strings 1

275 0 0 52 Synth Strings 2

276 0 0 53 Choir Aahs

277 0 3 53 Stereo Choir

278 0 32 53 Mellow Choir

279 0 40 53 Choir Strings

280 0 0 54 Voice Oohs

281 0 0 55 Synth Voice

282 0 40 55 Synth Voice 2

283 0 41 55 Choral

284 0 64 55 Analog Voice

285 0 0 56 Orchestra Hit

286 0 35 56 Orchestra Hit 2

287 0 64 56 Impact

BRASS

288 0 0 57 Trumpet

289 0 32 57 Warm Trumpet

290 0 0 58 Trombone

291 0 18 58 Trombone 2

292 0 0 59 Tuba

293 0 0 60 Muted Trumpet

294 0 0 61 French Horn

295 0 6 61 French Horn Solo

296 0 32 61 French Horn 2

297 0 37 61 Horn Orchestra

298 0 0 62 Brass Section

299 0 35 62 Trumpet & Trombone Section

300 0 0 63 Synth Brass 1

301 0 20 63 Resonant Synth Brass

302 0 0 64 Synth Brass 2

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1 - 128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0 - 127)

LSB

(0 - 127)

303 0 18 64 Soft Brass

304 0 41 64 Choir Brass

REED

305 0 0 65 Soprano Sax

306 0 0 66 Alto Sax

307 0 40 66 Sax Section

308 0 0 67 Tenor Sax

309 0 40 67 Breathy Tenor Sax

310 0 0 68 Baritone Sax

311 0 0 69 Oboe

312 0 0 70 English Horn

313 0 0 71 Bassoon

314 0 0 72 Clarinet

PIPE

315 0 0 73 Piccolo

316 0 0 74 Flute

317 0 0 75 Recorder

318 0 0 76 Pan Flute

319 0 0 77 Blown Bottle

320 0 0 78 Shakuhachi

321 0 0 79 Whistle

322 0 0 80 Ocarina

SYNTH LEAD

323 0 0 81 Square Lead

324 0 6 81 Square Lead 2

325 0 8 81 LM Square

326 0 18 81 Hollow

327 0 19 81 Shroud

328 0 64 81 Mellow

329 0 65 81 Solo Sine

330 0 66 81 Sine Lead

331 0 0 82 Sawtooth Lead

332 0 6 82 Sawtooth Lead 2

333 0 8 82 Thick Sawtooth

334 0 18 82 Dynamic Sawtooth

335 0 19 82 Digital Sawtooth

336 0 20 82 Big Lead

337 0 96 82 Sequenced Analog

338 0 0 83 Calliope Lead

339 0 65 83 Pure Pad

340 0 0 84 Chiff Lead

341 0 0 85 Charang Lead

342 0 64 85 Distorted Lead

343 0 0 86 Voice Lead

344 0 0 87 Fifths Lead

345 0 35 87 Big Five

346 0 0 88 Bass & Lead

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1 - 128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0 - 127)

LSB

(0 - 127)

209

Voice List / Voice-Liste / Liste des voix

76 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi

347 0 16 88 Big & Low

348 0 64 88 Fat & Perky

349 0 65 88 Soft Whirl

SYNTH PAD

350 0 0 89 New Age Pad

351 0 64 89 Fantasy

352 0 0 90 Warm Pad

353 0 0 91 Poly Synth Pad

354 0 0 92 Choir Pad

355 0 66 92 Itopia

356 0 0 93 Bowed Pad

357 0 0 94 Metallic Pad

358 0 0 95 Halo Pad

359 0 0 96 Sweep Pad

SYNTH EFFECTS

360 0 0 97 Rain

361 0 65 97 African Wind

362 0 66 97 Carib

363 0 0 98 Sound Track

364 0 27 98 Prologue

365 0 0 99 Crystal

366 0 12 99 Synth Drum Comp

367 0 14 99 Popcorn

368 0 18 99 Tiny Bells

369 0 35 99 Round Glockenspiel

370 0 40 99 Glockenspiel Chimes

371 0 41 99 Clear Bells

372 0 42 99 Chorus Bells

373 0 65 99 Soft Crystal

374 0 70 99 Air Bells

375 0 71 99 Bell Harp

376 0 72 99 Gamelimba

377 0 0 100 Atmosphere

378 0 18 100 Warm Atmosphere

379 0 19 100 Hollow Release

380 0 40 100 Nylon Electric Piano

381 0 64 100 Nylon Harp

382 0 65 100 Harp Vox

383 0 66 100 Atmosphere Pad

384 0 0 101 Brightness

385 0 0 102 Goblins

386 0 64 102 Goblins Synth

387 0 65 102 Creeper

388 0 67 102 Ritual

389 0 68 102 To Heaven

390 0 70 102 Night

391 0 71 102 Glisten

392 0 96 102 Bell Choir

393 0 0 103 Echoes

394 0 0 104 Sci-Fi

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1 - 128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0 - 127)

LSB

(0 - 127)

WORLD

395 0 0 105 Sitar

396 0 32 105 Detuned Sitar

397 0 35 105 Sitar 2

398 0 97 105 Tamboura

399 0 0 106 Banjo

400 0 28 106 Muted Banjo

401 0 96 106 Rabab

402 0 97 106 Gopichant

403 0 98 106 Oud

404 0 0 107 Shamisen

405 0 0 108 Koto

406 0 96 108 Taisho-kin

407 0 97 108 Kanoon

408 0 0 109 Kalimba

409 0 0 110 Bagpipe

410 0 0 111 Fiddle

411 0 0 112 Shanai

PERCUSSIVE

412 0 0 113 Tinkle Bell

413 0 96 113 Bonang

414 0 97 113 Altair

415 0 98 113 Gamelan Gongs

416 0 99 113 Stereo Gamelan Gongs

417 0 100 113 Rama Cymbal

418 0 0 114 Agogo

419 0 0 115 Steel Drums

420 0 97 115 Glass Percussion

421 0 98 115 Thai Bells

422 0 0 116 Woodblock

423 0 96 116 Castanets

424 0 0 117 Taiko Drum

425 0 96 117 Gran Cassa

426 0 0 118 Melodic Tom

427 0 64 118 Melodic Tom 2

428 0 65 118 Real Tom

429 0 66 118 Rock Tom

430 0 0 119 Synth Drum

431 0 64 119 Analog Tom

432 0 65 119 Electronic Percussion

433 0 0 120 Reverse Cymbal

SOUND EFFECTS

434 0 0 121 Fret Noise

435 0 0 122 Breath Noise

436 0 0 123 Seashore

437 0 0 124 Bird Tweet

438 0 0 125 Telephone Ring

439 0 0 126 Helicopter

440 0 0 127 Applause

441 0 0 128 Gunshot

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1 - 128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0 - 127)

LSB

(0 - 127)

210

Voice List / Voice-Liste / Liste des voix

PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi 77

The voice number with an asterisk (*) is XGlite optional voice.

Voice-Nummern mit einem Stern (*) sind optionale XGlite-Voices.

Le numéro de voix porteur d’un astérisque (*) est une voix XGlite en

option.

● Oriental Voice List / Liste der orientalischen

Voices / Liste des voix orientales

442 64 0 1 Cutting Noise

443 64 0 2 Cutting Noise 2

444 64 0 4 String Slap

445 64 0 17 Flute Key Click

446 64 0 33 Shower

447 64 0 34 Thunder

448 64 0 35 Wind

449 64 0 36 Stream

450 64 0 37 Bubble

451 64 0 38 Feed

452 64 0 49 Dog

453 64 0 50 Horse

454 64 0 51 Bird Tweet 2

455 64 0 56 Maou

456 64 0 65 Phone Call

457 64 0 66 Door Squeak

458 64 0 67 Door Slam

459 64 0 68 Scratch Cut

460 64 0 69 Scratch Split

461 64 0 70 Wind Chime

462 64 0 71 Telephone Ring 2

463 64 0 81 Car Engine Ignition

464 64 0 82 Car Tires Squeal

465 64 0 83 Car Passing

466 64 0 84 Car Crash

467 64 0 85 Siren

468 64 0 86 Train

469 64 0 87 Jet Plane

470 64 0 88 Starship

471 64 0 89 Burst

472 64 0 90 Roller Coaster

473 64 0 91 Submarine

474 64 0 97 Laugh

475 64 0 98 Scream

476 64 0 99 Punch

477 64 0 100 Heartbeat

478 64 0 101 Footsteps

479 64 0 113 Machine Gun

480 64 0 114 Laser Gun

481 64 0 115 Explosion

482 64 0 116 Firework

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1 - 128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0 - 127)

LSB

(0 - 127)

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1 - 128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0 - 127)

LSB

(0 - 127)

ORIENTAL

483 0 113 106 Oud

484 0 114 78 Nay

485 0 113 78 Kawala

486 0 113 108 Kanoun

487 0 121 26 Saz

488 0 115 106 Oud Tremolo

489 0 114 112 Surnay

490 0 120 26 Bouzouki

491 0 113 16 Santoor

492 0 115 41 Rababa

493 0 119 26 Bouzouk

494 0 116 78 Nay Takasim

495 0 114 108 Kanoun Oct.

496 0 116 106 Baglamas

497 0 117 106 Awtar

498 0 122 112 Sorna

499 0 114 106 Tar

500 0 114 16 Santuri

501 0 114 41 Kamanche

502 0 118 106 Awtar Tremolo

503 0 117 112 Gerba

504 0 121 112 Gerba Chorus

505 0 112 112 Dosaleh

506 0 115 112 Mijwez

507 0 116 112 Mizmar

508 0 119 112 Mizmar Oct.

509 0 120 112 Al Badou

510 0 118 112 Argoul

511 0 116 22 Accordion

512 0 117 49 Watariyat 1

513 0 119 49 Watariyat 2

514 0 113 46 Pizzicato

515 0 121 82 Solo 1

516 0 124 82 Solo 2

517 0 122 62 Brass

ORIENTAL PERCUSSION

518 126 0 37 Arabic Kit

519 126 0 38 Khaligi Kit

520 126 0 39 Irani Kit

521 126 0 65 Arabic Mix Kit

522 126 0 66 Khaligi Mix Kit

523 126 0 67 Irani Mix Kit

211

78 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi

Drum Kit & Oriental Perussion Kit List / Drum-Kits und orientalische Percussion-

•“ ” indicates that the drum sound is the same as “Standard Kit 1”.

• Each percussion voice uses one note.

• The MIDI Note # and Note are actually one octave lower than key-

board Note # and Note. For example, in “109: Standard Kit 1”, the “Seq

Click H” (Note# 36/Note C1) corresponds to (Note# 24/Note C0).

•Key Off: Keys marked “O” stop sounding the instant they are released.

•Voices with the same Alternate Note Number (*1 … 4) cannot be

played simultaneously. (They are designed to be played alternately

with each other.)

•

„ “ bedeutet, dass der Schlagzeugklang gleich „Standard Kit 1“ ist.

• Jede Perkussionsnote belegt eine Note.

•Die MIDI-Note # und Note sind in Wirklichkeit eine Octave tiefer als

hier aufgeführt. Beispiel: In „109: Standard Kit 1“ entspricht die „Seq

Click H“ (Note# 36/Note C1) der Note (Note# 24/Note C0).

•Key Off: Mit „O“ bezeichnete Tasten hören sofort auf zu klingen,

sobald sie losgelassen werden.

•Stimmen mit derselben Alternate Note Number (*1 … 4) können nicht

gleichzeitig gespielt werden. (Diese Stimmen sind dazu gedacht,

wechselweise gespielt zu werden.)

Voice No.

109 110 111 112 113

MSB(0-127) / LSB(0-127) / PC(1-128)

127/0/1 127/0/2 127/0/9 127/0/17 127/0/25

Keyboard MIDI

Key

off

Alternate

assign

Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2 Room Kit Rock Kit Electronic Kit

Note# Note Note# Note

25 C# 013C# -1 3 Surdo Mute

26 D 0 14 D -1 3 Surdo Open

27 D# 015D# -1 Hi Q

28 E 0 16 E -1 Whip Slap

29 F 0 17 F -1 4 Scratch Push

30 F# 018F# -1 4 Scratch Pull

31 G 0 19 G -1 Finger Snap

32 G# 020G# -1 Click Noise

33 A 0 21 A -1 Metronome Click

34 A# 022A# -1 Metronome Bell

35 B 0 23 B -1 Seq Click L

36 C 1 24 C 0 Seq Click H

37 C# 125C# 0Brush Tap

38 D 1 26 D 0 O Brush Swirl

39 D# 127D# 0Brush Slap

40 E 1 28 E 0 O Brush Tap Swirl Reverse Cymbal

41 F 1 29 F 0 O Snare Roll

42 F# 130F# 0 Castanet Hi Q 2

43 G 1 31 G 0 Snare H Soft Snare H Soft 2 SD Rock H Snare L

44 G# 132G# 0Sticks

45 A 1 33 A 0 Bass Drum Soft Bass Drum H

46 A# 134A# 0 Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot 2

47 B 1 35 B 0 Bass Drum Hard Bass Drum H BD Rock

48 C 2 36 C 1 Bass Drum Bass Drum 2 BD Rock BD Gate

49 C# 237C# 1Side Stick

50 D 2 38 D 1 Snare M Snare M 2 SD Room L SD Rock L SD Rock L

51 D# 239D# 1 Hand Clap

52 E 2 40 E 1 Snare H Hard Snare H Hard 2 SD Room H SD Rock Rim SD Rock H

53 F 2 41 F 1 Floor Tom L Room Tom 1 Rock Tom 1 E Tom 1

54 F# 242F# 11Hi-Hat Closed

55 G 2 43 G 1 Floor Tom H Room Tom 2 Rock Tom 2 E Tom 2

56 G# 244G# 11Hi-Hat Pedal

57 A 2 45 A 1 Low Tom Room Tom 3 Rock Tom 3 E Tom 3

58 A# 246A# 11Hi-Hat Open

59 B 2 47 B 1 Mid Tom L Room Tom 4 Rock Tom 4 E Tom 4

60 C 3 48 C 2 Mid Tom H Room Tom 5 Rock Tom 5 E Tom 5

61 C# 349C# 2Crash Cymbal 1

62 D 3 50 D 2 High Tom Room Tom 6 Rock Tom 6 E Tom 6

63 D# 351D# 2Ride Cymbal 1

64 E 3 52 E 2 Chinese Cymbal

65 F 3 53 F 2 Ride Cymbal Cup

66 F# 354F# 2 Tambourine

67 G 3 55 G 2 Splash Cymbal

68 G# 356G# 2 Cowbell

69 A 3 57 A 2 Crash Cymbal 2

70 A# 358A# 2Vibraslap

71 B 3 59 B 2 Ride Cymbal 2

72 C 4 60 C 3 Bongo H

73 C# 461C# 3 Bongo L

74 D 4 62 D 3 Conga H Mute

75 D# 463D# 3 Conga H Open

76 E 4 64 E 3 Conga L

77 F 4 65 F 3 Timbale H

78 F# 466F# 3Timbale L

79 G 4 67 G 3 Agogo H

80 G# 468G# 3 Agogo L

81 A 4 69 A 3 Cabasa

82 A# 470A# 3 Maracas

83 B 4 71 B 3 O Samba Whistle H

84 C 5 72 C 4 O Samba Whistle L

85 C# 573C# 4 Guiro Short

86 D 5 74 D 4 O Guiro Long

87 D# 575D# 4Claves

88 E 5 76 E 4 Wood Block H

89 F 5 77 F 4 Wood Block L

90 F# 578F# 4 Cuica Mute Scratch Push

91 G 5 79 G 4 Cuica Open Scratch Pull

92 G# 580G# 42Triangle Mute

93 A 5 81 A 4 2 Triangle Open

94 A# 582A# 4 Shaker

95 B 5 83 B 4 Jingle Bell

96 C 6 84 C 5 Bell Tree

97 C# 685C# 5

98 D 6 86 D 5

99 D# 687D# 5

100 E 6 88 E 5

101 F 6 89 F 5

102 F# 690F# 5

103 G 6 91 G 5

F#1

G#1

A#1

D#1

C#1

F#2

G#2

A#2

D#2

C#2

F#3

G#3

A#3

D#3

C#3

F#4

G#4

A#4

D#4

C#4

F#5

G#5

A#5

D#5

C#5

212

PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi 79

•« » indique que les sonorités de percussion sont identiques à

celles de « Standard Kit 1 ».

• Chaque voix de percussion utilise une note unique.

• Le numéro de note MIDI (Note #) et la note MIDI se situent en réalité à

une octave inférieure à celle qui est indiquée dans la liste. Par exem-

ple, dans « 109 : Standard Kit 1 », « Seq Click H » (Note# 36/Note C1)

correspond à (Note# 24/Note C0).

•Key Off : pour les touches signalées par « O », l’émission de sons

s’arrête instantanément aussitôt que les touches sont relâchées.

• Les voix portant un même numéro de note alternative (*1 … 4) ne

peuvent pas être jouées simultanément. (Elles sont en effet conçues

pour être interprétées en alternance).

Voice No.

109 114 115 116 117

MSB(0-127) / LSB(0-127) / PC(1-128)

127/0/1 127/0/26 127/0/28 127/0/33 127/0/41

Keyboard MIDI

Key

off

Alternate

assign

Standard Kit 1 Analog Kit Dance Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit

Note# Note Note# Note

25 C# 013C# -1 3 Surdo Mute

26 D 0 14 D -1 3 Surdo Open

27 D# 015D# -1 Hi Q

28 E 0 16 E -1 Whip Slap

29 F 0 17 F -1 4 Scratch Push

30 F# 018F# -1 4 Scratch Pull

31 G 0 19 G -1 Finger Snap

32 G# 020G# -1 Click Noise

33 A 0 21 A -1 Metronome Click

34 A# 022A# -1 Metronome Bell

35 B 0 23 B -1 Seq Click L

36 C 1 24 C 0 Seq Click H

37 C# 125C# 0Brush Tap

38 D 1 26 D 0 O Brush Swirl

39 D# 127D# 0Brush Slap

40 E 1 28 E 0 O Brush Tap Swirl Reverse Cymbal Reverse Cymbal

41 F 1 29 F 0 O Snare Roll

42 F# 130F# 0 Castanet Hi Q 2 Hi Q 2

43 G 1 31 G 0 Snare H Soft SD Rock H AnSD Snappy SD Jazz H Light Brush Slap L

44 G# 132G# 0Sticks

45 A 1 33 A 0 Bass Drum Soft Bass Drum H AnBD Dance-1

46 A# 134A# 0 Open Rim Shot AnSD OpenRim

47 B 1 35 B 0 Bass Drum Hard BD Analog L AnBD Dance-2

48 C 2 36 C 1 Bass Drum BD Analog H AnBD Dance-3 BD Jazz BD Jazz

49 C# 237C# 1Side Stick Analog Side Stick Analog Side Stick

50 D 2 38 D 1 Snare M Analog Snare 1 AnSD Q SD Jazz L Brush Slap

51 D# 239D# 1 Hand Clap

52 E 2 40 E 1 Snare H Hard Analog Snare 2 AnSD Ana+Acoustic SD Jazz M Brush Tap

53 F 2 41 F 1 Floor Tom L Analog Tom 1 Analog Tom 1 Jazz Tom 1 Brush Tom 1

54 F# 242F# 11Hi-Hat Closed Analog HH Closed 1 Analog HH Closed 3

55 G 2 43 G 1 Floor Tom H Analog Tom 2 Analog Tom 2 Jazz Tom 2 Brush Tom 2

56 G# 244G# 11Hi-Hat Pedal Analog HH Closed 2 Analog HH Closed 4

57 A 2 45 A 1 Low Tom Analog Tom 3 Analog Tom 3 Jazz Tom 3 Brush Tom 3

58 A# 246A# 11Hi-Hat Open Analog HH Open Analog HH Open 2

59 B 2 47 B 1 Mid Tom L Analog Tom 4 Analog Tom 4 Jazz Tom 4 Brush Tom 4

60 C 3 48 C 2 Mid Tom H Analog Tom 5 Analog Tom 5 Jazz Tom 5 Brush Tom 5

61 C# 349C# 2Crash Cymbal 1 Analog Cymbal Analog Cymbal

62 D 3 50 D 2 High Tom Analog Tom 6 Analog Tom 6 Jazz Tom 6 Brush Tom 6

63 D# 351D# 2Ride Cymbal 1

64 E 3 52 E 2 Chinese Cymbal

65 F 3 53 F 2 Ride Cymbal Cup

66 F# 354F# 2 Tambourine

67 G 3 55 G 2 Splash Cymbal

68 G# 356G# 2 Cowbell Analog Cowbell Analog Cowbell

69 A 3 57 A 2 Crash Cymbal 2

70 A# 358A# 2Vibraslap

71 B 3 59 B 2 Ride Cymbal 2

72 C 4 60 C 3 Bongo H

73 C# 461C# 3 Bongo L

74 D 4 62 D 3 Conga H Mute Analog Conga H Analog Conga H

75 D# 463D# 3 Conga H Open Analog Conga M Analog Conga M

76 E 4 64 E 3 Conga L Analog Conga L Analog Conga L

77 F 4 65 F 3 Timbale H

78 F# 466F# 3Timbale L

79 G 4 67 G 3 Agogo H

80 G# 468G# 3 Agogo L

81 A 4 69 A 3 Cabasa

82 A# 470A# 3 Maracas Analog Maracas Analog Maracas

83 B 4 71 B 3 O Samba Whistle H

84 C 5 72 C 4 O Samba Whistle L

85 C# 573C# 4 Guiro Short

86 D 5 74 D 4 O Guiro Long

87 D# 575D# 4Claves Analog Claves Analog Claves

88 E 5 76 E 4 Wood Block H

89 F 5 77 F 4 Wood Block L

90 F# 578F# 4 Cuica Mute Scratch Push Scratch Push

91 G 5 79 G 4 Cuica Open Scratch Pull Scratch Pull

92 G# 580G# 42Triangle Mute

93 A 5 81 A 4 2 Triangle Open

94 A# 582A# 4 Shaker

95 B 5 83 B 4 Jingle Bell

96 C 6 84 C 5 Bell Tree

97 C# 685C# 5

98 D 6 86 D 5

99 D# 687D# 5

100 E 6 88 E 5

101 F 6 89 F 5

102 F# 690F# 5

103 G 6 91 G 5

F#1

G#1

A#1

D#1

C#1

F#2

G#2

A#2

D#2

C#2

F#3

G#3

A#3

D#3

C#3

F#4

G#4

A#4

D#4

C#4

F#5

G#5

A#5

D#5

C#5

213

Kits-Liste / Liste des kits de batterie et des kits de percussions orientales

Drum Kit & Oriental Perussion Kit List / Drum-Kits und orientalische Percussion-Kits-Liste /

Liste des kits de batterie et des kits de percussions orientales

80 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi

Voice No.

109 118 119 120 121

MSB(0-127) / LSB(0-127) / PC(1-128)

127/0/1 127/0/49 126/0/1 126/0/2 126/0/113

Keyboard MIDI

Key

off

Alternate

assign

Standard Kit 1 Symphony Kit SFX Kit 1

SFX Kit 2 Sound Effect Kit

Note# Note Note# Note

25 C# 013C# -1 3 Surdo Mute

26 D 0 14 D -1 3 Surdo Open

27 D# 015D# -1 Hi Q

28 E 0 16 E -1 Whip Slap

29 F 0 17 F -1 4 Scratch Push

30 F# 018F# -1 4 Scratch Pull

31 G 0 19 G -1 Finger Snap

32 G# 020G# -1 Click Noise

33 A 0 21 A -1 Metronome Click

34 A# 022A# -1 Metronome Bell

35 B 0 23 B -1 Seq Click L

36 C 1 24 C 0 Seq Click H

Drum Loop

37 C# 125C# 0Brush Tap

38 D 1 26 D 0 O Brush Swirl

39 D# 127D# 0Brush Slap

40 E 1 28 E 0 O Brush Tap Swirl

41 F 1 29 F 0 O Snare Roll

42 F# 130F# 0 Castanet

43 G 1 31 G 0 Snare H Soft

44 G# 132G# 0Sticks

45 A 1 33 A 0 Bass Drum Soft Bass Drum L

46 A# 134A# 0 Open Rim Shot

47 B 1 35 B 0 Bass Drum Hard Gran Cassa

48 C 2 36 C 1 Bass Drum Gran Cassa Mute Cutting Noise Phone Call Heartbeat

49 C# 237C# 1Side Stick Cutting Noise 2 Door Squeak Footsteps

50 D 2 38 D 1 Snare M Marching Sn M Door Slam Door Squeak

51 D# 239D# 1 Hand Clap String Slap Scratch Cut Door Slam

52 E 2 40 E 1 Snare H Hard Marching Sn H Scratch Applause

53 F 2 41 F 1 Floor Tom L Jazz Tom 1 Wind Chime Camera

54 F# 242F# 11Hi-Hat Closed Telephone Ring 2 Horn

55 G 2 43 G 1 Floor Tom H Jazz Tom 2 Hiccup

56 G# 244G# 11Hi-Hat Pedal Cuckoo Clock

57 A 2 45 A 1 Low Tom Jazz Tom 3 Stream

58 A# 246A# 11Hi-Hat Open Frog

59 B 2 47 B 1 Mid Tom L Jazz Tom 4 Rooster

60 C 3 48 C 2 Mid Tom H Jazz Tom 5 Dog

61 C# 349C# 2Crash Cymbal 1 Hand Cym. L Cat

62 D 3 50 D 2 High Tom Jazz Tom 6 Owl

63 D# 351D# 2Ride Cymbal 1 Hand Cym.Short L Horse Gallop

64 E 3 52 E 2 Chinese Cymbal Flute Key Click Car Engine Ignition Horse Neigh

65 F 3 53 F 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Car Tires Squeal Cow

66 F# 354F# 2 Tambourine Car Passing Lion

67 G 3 55 G 2 Splash Cymbal Car Crash Scratch

68 G# 356G# 2 Cowbell Siren Yo!

69 A 3 57 A 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Hand Cym. H Train Go!

70 A# 358A# 2Vibraslap Jet Plane Get up!

71 B 3 59 B 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Hand Cym.Short H Starship Whoow!

72 C 4 60 C 3 Bongo H

Burst

Huuaah!

73 C# 461C# 3 Bongo L

Roller Coaster

74 D 4 62 D 3 Conga H Mute Submarine

75 D# 463D# 3 Conga H Open

76 E 4 64 E 3 Conga L

77 F 4 65 F 3 Timbale H

78 F# 466F# 3Timbale L

79 G 4 67 G 3 Agogo H

80 G# 468G# 3 Agogo L Shower Laugh

81 A 4 69 A 3 Cabasa Thunder Scream

82 A# 470A# 3 Maracas

Wind Punch

83 B 4 71 B 3 O Samba Whistle H

Stream Heartbeat

84 C 5 72 C 4 O Samba Whistle L Bubble Footsteps

Uh!+Hit

85 C# 573C# 4 Guiro Short Feed

86 D 5 74 D 4 O Guiro Long

87 D# 575D# 4Claves

88 E 5 76 E 4 Wood Block H

89 F 5 77 F 4 Wood Block L

90 F# 578F# 4 Cuica Mute

91 G 5 79 G 4 Cuica Open

92 G# 580G# 42Triangle Mute

93 A 5 81 A 4 2 Triangle Open

94 A# 582A# 4 Shaker

95 B 5 83 B 4 Jingle Bell

96 C 6 84 C 5 Bell Tree Dog Machine Gun

97 C# 685C# 5 Horse Laser Gun

98 D 6 86 D 5 Bird Tweet 2 Explosion

99 D# 687D# 5 Firework

100 E 6 88 E 5

101 F 6 89 F 5

102 F# 690F# 5

103 G 6 91 G 5 Maou

F#1

G#1

A#1

D#1

C#1

F#2

G#2

A#2

D#2

C#2

F#3

G#3

A#3

D#3

C#3

F#4

G#4

A#4

D#4

C#4

F#5

G#5

A#5

D#5

C#5

214

Drum Kit & Oriental Perussion Kit List / Drum-Kits und orientalische Percussion-Kits-Liste /

Liste des kits de batterie et des kits de percussions orientales

PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi 81

Voice No.

109 518 519 520

MSB(0-127) / LSB(0-127) / PC(1-128)

127/0/1 126/0/37 126/0/38 126/0/39

Keyboard MIDI

Key

off

Alternate

assign

Standard Kit 1 Arabic Kit Khaligi Kit Irani Kit

Note# Note Note# Note

25 C# 013C# -1 3 Surdo Mute Zarb Back mf Khaligi Bongo Low Dom

26 D 0 14 D -1 3 Surdo Open Zarb Tom f Khaligi Bongo Low Tak

27 D# 015D# -1 Hi Q Zarb Eshareh Khaligi Bongo High Sak

28 E 0 16 E -1 Whip Slap Zarb Whipping Khaligi Bongo High Dom

29 F 0 17 F -1 4 Scratch Push Tombak Tom f Tabel Lewa High Sak

30 F# 018F# -1 4 Scratch Pull Neghareh Tom f Khaligi Bongo Snap

31 G 0 19 G -1 Finger Snap Tombak Back f Tabel Lewa High Dom

32 G# 020G# -1 Click Noise Neghareh Back f Lewa Cymbal 2

33 A 0 21 A -1 Metronome Click Tombak Snap f Tabel Lewa Big Dom

34 A# 022A# -1 Metronome Bell Neghareh Pelang f Lewa Cymbal 1

35 B 0 23 B -1 Seq Click L Tombak Trill Tabel Lewa Big Tak

36 C 1 24 C 0 Seq Click H Khaligi Clap 1 Tablah Big Dom 1

37 C# 125C# 0Brush Tap Zalgouta Open Tablah Big Tak 1

38 D 1 26 D 0 O Brush Swirl Khaligi Clap 2 Tablah Big Sak 1

39 D# 127D# 0Brush Slap Zalgouta Close Tablah Big Dom 2

40 E 1 28 E 0 O Brush Tap Swirl Arabic Hand Clap Tablah Big Tak 2

41 F 1 29 F 0 O Snare Roll Tabel Tak 1 Tablah Big Sak 2

42 F# 130F# 0 Castanet Sagat 1 Tablah Small Snap 2

43 G 1 31 G 0 Snare H Soft Tabel Dom Tablah Small Dom

44 G# 132G# 0Sticks Sagat 2 Tablah Small Snap

45 A 1 33 A 0 Bass Drum Soft Tabel Tak 2 Tablah Small Tik

46 A# 134A# 0 Open Rim Shot Sagat 3 Tablah Small Sak

47 B 1 35 B 0 Bass Drum Hard Riq Tik 3 Manjoor

48 C 2 36 C 1 Bass Drum Riq Tik 2 Twaisat 1 Daf Tom

49 C# 237C# 1Side Stick Riq Tik Hard 1 Twaisat 4 Open Daf Chain Up

50 D 2 38 D 1 Snare M Riq Tik 1 Twaisat 5 Open Daf Back

51 D# 239D# 1 Hand Clap Riq Tik Hard 2 Twaisat 2 Daf Chain Down

52 E 2 40 E 1 Snare H Hard Riq Tik Hard 3 Tar Low Dom 1 Daf Chap

53 F 2 41 F 1 Floor Tom L Riq Tish Tar Low Sak 1 Daf Full Roll

54 F# 242F# 11Hi-Hat Closed Riq Snouj 2 Tar Segal Dom Daf Chain Roll

55 G 2 43 G 1 Floor Tom H Riq Roll Tar Low Dom 2 Daf Whipping Roll

56 G# 244G# 11Hi-Hat Pedal Riq Snouj Tar Segal Tak Clap

57 A 2 45 A 1 Low Tom Riq Sak Tar Low Dom 2 Finger Snap 1

58 A# 246A# 11Hi-Hat Open Riq Snouj 3 Tar Segal Sak Neghareh Roll

59 B 2 47 B 1 Mid Tom L Riq Snouj 4 Arabic Hand Clap Neghareh Tom

60 C 3 48 C 2 Mid Tom H Riq Tak 1 Tar High Dom 1 Neghareh Snap (Pelang)

61 C# 349C# 2Crash Cymbal 1 Riq Brass 1 Tar High Sak 1 Neghareh Chap

62 D 3 50 D 2 High Tom Riq Tak 2 Tar High Dom 2 Neghareh Eshareh

63 D# 351D# 2Ride Cymbal 1 Riq Brass 2 Tar High Sak 2 Neghareh Back

64 E 3 52 E 2 Chinese Cymbal Riq Dom Khaligi Clap 1 Kurdish Dohol Low

65 F 3 53 F 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Katem Tak Doff Khaligi Clap 2 Kurdish Dohol High

66 F# 354F# 2 Tambourine Katem Dom Merwas Solo 1 Dom Kurdish Dohol Low Buzz

67 G 3 55 G 2 Splash Cymbal Katem Sak 1 Merwas Solo 2 Dom Lurish Dohol Low

68 G# 356G# 2 Cowbell Katem Tak 1 Merwas Solo 1 Sak Lurish Dohol Low Buzz

69 A 3 57 A 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Katem Sak 2 Merwas Solo 2 Sak Lurish Dohol High

70 A# 358A# 2Vibraslap Katem Tak 2 Merwas Solo 1 Tak Tombak Full Roll

71 B 3 59 B 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Daholla Sak 2 Merwas Solo 2 Tak Tombak Timpani Roll

72 C 4 60 C 3 Bongo H Daholla Sak 1 Tar Barashim Group Dom Tombak Tom

73 C# 461C# 3 Bongo L Daholla Tak 1 Tar Barashim Group Sak Tombak Eshareh Right

74 D 4 62 D 3 Conga H Mute Daholla Dom Tar Barashim Group Tak Tombak Back

75 D# 463D# 3 Conga H Open Daholla Tak 2 Tar Barashim Solo Sak Tombak Eshareh Left

76 E 4 64 E 3 Conga L Tablah Prok Tar Barashim Solo Dom Tombak Snap

77 F 4 65 F 3 Timbale H Tablah dom 2 Tar Barashim Solo Tak Zarb Tom

78 F# 466F# 3Timbale L Tabla Roll of Edge Yahla Dom 1 Zarb Whipping

79 G 4 67 G 3 Agogo H Tablah Tak Finger 4 Yahla Tak 1 Zarb Back

80 G# 468G# 3 Agogo L Tablah Tak Trill 1 Yahla Dom 2 Zarb Eshareh

81 A 4 69 A 3 Cabasa Tablah Tak Finger 3 Yahla Tak 2 Zarb Chap

82 A# 470A# 3 Maracas Tablah Tak Trill 2 Nagara High Zarb Full Roll

83 B 4 71 B 3 O Samba Whistle H Tablah Tak Finger 2 Nagara Low Zarb Snap

84 C 5 72 C 4 O Samba Whistle L Tablah Tak Finger 1 Zeer Low Dom 1 Zarb Whipping Roll

85 C# 573C# 4 Guiro Short Tablah Tik 2 Zeer Low Roll Dayereh Roll

86 D 5 74 D 4 O Guiro Long Tablah Tik 4 Zeer Low Dom 2 Dayereh Tom

87 D# 575D# 4Claves Tablah Tik 3 Zeer High Roll Dayereh Eshareh

88 E 5 76 E 4 Wood Block H Tablah Tik 1 Zeer Low Dom 2 Dayereh Back

89 F 5 77 F 4 Wood Block L Tablah Tak 3 Zeer High Dom 1 Dayereh Snap

90 F# 578F# 4 Cuica Mute Tablah Tak 1 Tabel Low Dom Dayereh Edge Roll

91 G 5 79 G 4 Cuica Open Tablah Tak 4 Zeer High Dom 2

92 G# 580G# 42Triangle Mute Tablah Tak 2 Tabel Low Tak

93 A 5 81 A 4 2 Triangle Open Tablah Sak 2 Tabel High Dom

94 A# 582A# 4 Shaker Tablah Tremolo Tabel High Sak

95 B 5 83 B 4 Jingle Bell Tablah Sak 1 Tabel High Tak

96 C 6 84 C 5 Bell Tree Tablah Dom 1 Tabel Low Sak

97 C# 685C# 5

98 D 6 86 D 5

99 D# 687D# 5

100 E 6 88 E 5

101 F 6 89 F 5

102 F# 690F# 5

103 G 6 91 G 5

F#1

G#1

A#1

D#1

C#1

F#2

G#2

A#2

D#2

C#2

F#3

G#3

A#3

D#3

C#3

F#4

G#4

A#4

D#4

C#4

F#5

G#5

A#5

D#5

C#5

215

Drum Kit & Oriental Perussion Kit List / Drum-Kits und orientalische Percussion-Kits-Liste /

Liste des kits de batterie et des kits de percussions orientales

82 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi

Voice No.

109 521 522 523

MSB(0-127) / LSB(0-127) / PC(1-128)

127/0/1 126/0/65 126/0/66 126/0/67

Keyboard MIDI

Key

off

Alternate

assign

Standard Kit 1 Arabic Mix Kit Khaligi Mix Kit Irani Mix Kit

Note# Note Note# Note

25 C# 013C# -1 3 Surdo Mute Conga Analog H Zalgouta Open Bongo H

26 D 0 14 D -1 3 Surdo Open Conga Analog M Bell Tree Bongo L

27 D# 015D# -1 Hi Q Conga Analog L Zalgouta Close Conga H Open

28 E 0 16 E -1 Whip Slap Vibraslap Timbale H Conga L

29 F 0 17 F -1 4 Scratch Push Kick Techno L Timbale L Floor Tom L

30 F# 018F# -1 4 Scratch Pull Side Stick Arabic Mix Conga H Mute Hi-Hat Closed

31 G 0 19 G -1 Finger Snap Snare Techno Bongo H Floor Tom H

32 G# 020G# -1 Click Noise Guiro Long Conga H Open Hi-Hat Pedal

33 A 0 21 A -1 Metronome Click Kick Techno Q Bongo L Low Tom

34 A# 022A# -1 Metronome Bell Open Rim Shot Conga L Hi-Hat Open

35 B 0 23 B -1 Seq Click L Kick Shaker Ride Cymbal 1

36 C 1 24 C 0 Seq Click H Kick Arabic Mix Tablah Dom 1 Kick

37 C# 125C# 0Brush Tap Snare Tight Tablah Tak Finger 3 Side Stick

38 D 1 26 D 0 O Brush Swirl Snare Arabic Mix Tablah Tik 3 Snare

39 D# 127D# 0Brush Slap Hand Clap Tablah Tak Finger 4 Crash Cymbal 1

40 E 1 28 E 0 O Brush Tap Swirl Snare Tablah Tik 4 Snare Tight

41 F 1 29 F 0 O Snare Roll Tom Electro 1 Tablah Tik 1 Khaligi Tablah Big Dom 1

42 F# 130F# 0 Castanet Hi-Hat Closed Arabic Mix Tablah Tremolo Khaligi Tablah Big Sak 1

43 G 1 31 G 0 Snare H Soft Tom Electro 2 Cowbell Khaligi Tablah Big Tak 1

44 G# 132G# 0Sticks Hi-Hat Closed 3 Hand Clap Arabic Doholla Sak 1

45 A 1 33 A 0 Bass Drum Soft Tom Electro 3 Tambourine Arabic Doholla Tom

46 A# 134A# 0 Open Rim Shot Hi-Hat Open Arabic Mix Snare Tight Arabic Doholla Tak 2

47 B 1 35 B 0 Bass Drum Hard Tom Electro 4 Kick Analog Short Arabic Doholla Tak 1

48 C 2 36 C 1 Bass Drum Tom Electro 5 Kick Daf Tom

49 C# 237C# 1Side Stick Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Daf Chain Up

50 D 2 38 D 1 Snare M Tom Electro 6 Snare Daf Back

51 D# 239D# 1 Hand Clap Hi-Hat Open 3 Crash Cymbal 2 Daf Chain Down

52 E 2 40 E 1 Snare H Hard Reverse Cymbal Side Stick Daf Chap

53 F 2 41 F 1 Floor Tom L Timbale L Floor Tom L Daf Full Roll

54 F# 242F# 11Hi-Hat Closed Conga H Open Hi-Hat Closed Daf Chain Roll

55 G 2 43 G 1 Floor Tom H Timbale H Floor Tom H Daf Whipping Roll

56 G# 244G# 11Hi-Hat Pedal Conga H Mute Hi-Hat Pedal Clap

57 A 2 45 A 1 Low Tom Tambourine Low Tom Finger Snap 1

58 A# 246A# 11Hi-Hat Open Conga L Hi-Hat Open Neghareh Roll

59 B 2 47 B 1 Mid Tom L Cowbell Mid Tom L Neghareh Tom

60 C 3 48 C 2 Mid Tom H Claves Mid Tom H Neghareh Snap (Pelang)

61 C# 349C# 2Crash Cymbal 1 Bongo H Finger Snap 1 Neghareh Chap

62 D 3 50 D 2 High Tom Wood Block H Chinese Cymbal Neghareh Eshareh

63 D# 351D# 2Ride Cymbal 1 Bongo L Finger Snap 2 Neghareh Back

64 E 3 52 E 2 Chinese Cymbal Wood Block L Riq Brass 2 Kurdish Dohol Low

65 F 3 53 F 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Iranian Kurdish Dohol Low f Riq Brass 1 Kurdish Dohol High

66 F# 354F# 2 Tambourine Cabasa Riq Tish Kurdish Dohol Low Buzz

67 G 3 55 G 2 Splash Cymbal Iranian Kurdish Dohol High f Riq Snouj 1 Lurish Dohol Low

68 G# 356G# 2 Cowbell Shaker Riq Roll Lurish Dohol Low Buzz

69 A 3 57 A 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Snap 1 Riq Snouj 2 Lurish Dohol High

70 A# 358A# 2Vibraslap Maracas RIQ Sak 1 Tombak Full Roll

71 B 3 59 B 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Snap 2 Riq Dom Tombak Timpani Roll

72 C 4 60 C 3 Bongo H Khaligi Twaisat 3 Riq Snouj 3 Tombak Tom

73 C# 461C# 3 Bongo L Khaligi Twaisat 1 Tombak Back Tombak Eshareh Right

74 D 4 62 D 3 Conga H Mute Khaligi Twaisat 2 Tombak Tom Tombak Back

75 D# 463D# 3 Conga H Open Khaligi Twaisat 5 Open Tombak Snap Tombak Eshareh Left

76 E 4 64 E 3 Conga L Khaligi Twaisat 4 Open Tombak Eshareh Right Tombak Snap

77 F 4 65 F 3 Timbale H Khaligi Tablah Small Dom Claves Zarb Tom

78 F# 466F# 3Timbale L Khaligi Tar Barashim Group Dom Daf Chap Zarb Whipping

79 G 4 67 G 3 Agogo H Khaligi Tablah Small Snap Daf Tom Zarb Back

80 G# 468G# 3 Agogo L Khaligi Tar Barashim Group Sak Daf Full Roll Zarb Eshareh

81 A 4 69 A 3 Cabasa Khaligi Tablah Small Sak Triangle Mute Zarb Chap

82 A# 470A# 3 Maracas Khaligi Tar Barashim Group Tak Daf Back Zarb Full Roll

83 B 4 71 B 3 O Samba Whistle H Khaligi Tablah Small Tik Triangle Open Zarb Snap

84 C 5 72 C 4 O Samba Whistle L Khaligi Tablah Big Dom 1 Neghareh Tom Zarb Whipping Roll

85 C# 573C# 4 Guiro Short Khaligi Tar Segal Dom Neghareh Back Dayereh Roll

86 D 5 74 D 4 O Guiro Long Khaligi Tablah Big Tak 1 Neghareh Roll Dayereh Tom

87 D# 575D# 4Claves Khaligi Tar Segal Tak Neghareh Snap (Pelang) Dayereh Eshareh

88 E 5 76 E 4 Wood Block H Khaligi Tablah Big Sak 1 Wood Block H Dayereh Back

89 F 5 77 F 4 Wood Block L Tablah Dom 1 Wood Block L Dayereh Snap

90 F# 578F# 4 Cuica Mute Tablah Tak 1 Zarb Back Dayereh Edge Roll

91 G 5 79 G 4 Cuica Open Tablah Tremolo Zarb Tom Twaisat 4 Open

92 G# 580G# 42Triangle Mute Tablah Tak 2 Zarb Eshareh Twaisat 2

93 A 5 81 A 4 2 Triangle Open Tablah Tik 1 Zarb Whipping Twaisat 5 Open

94 A# 582A# 4 Shaker Tablah Sak 1 Zarb Chap Twaisat 1

95 B 5 83 B 4 Jingle Bell Tablah Tik 3 Hi-Hat Closed Analog Timbale H

96 C 6 84 C 5 Bell Tree Tablah Tik 2 Hi-Hat Open Analog Timbale L

97 C# 685C# 5

98 D 6 86 D 5

99 D# 687D# 5

100 E 6 88 E 5

101 F 6 89 F 5

102 F# 690F# 5

103 G 6 91 G 5

F#1

G#1

A#1

D#1

C#1

F#2

G#2

A#2

D#2

C#2

F#3

G#3

A#3

D#3

C#3

F#4

G#4

A#4

D#4

C#4

F#5

G#5

A#5

D#5

C#5

216

PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi 83

Style List / Style-Liste / Liste des styles

Style

No.

Style Name

8 Beat

1 8BeatModern

2 60’s8Beat

3 8Beat

4 60’sRock

5 RockShuffle

6 8BeatRock

16 Beat

7 16Beat

8 PopShuffle

9 GuitarPop

Ballad

10 PianoBallad

11 LoveSong

12 6/8ModernEP

13 PopBallad

14 16BeatBallad

Dance

15 EuroTrance

16 SwingHouse

17 Clubdance

18 TechnoParty

Disco

19 70’sDisco

20 LatinDisco

Swing & Jazz

21 BigBandFast

22 BigBandBallad

23 JazzClub

24 Swing

25 Five/Four

R & B

26 Soul

27 6/8Soul

28 Rock&Roll

29 ComboBoogie

Latin

30 BrazilianSamba

31 BossaNova

32 PopBossa

33 Tijuana

34 DiscoLatin

35 Mambo

36 Salsa

37 Beguine

38 GuitarRumba

39 RumbaFlamenca

40 Reggae

Ballroom

41 VienneseWaltz

42 EnglishWaltz

43 Foxtrot

44 Tango

45 Samba

46 ChaChaCha

47 Rumba

48 Jive

March & Waltz

49 March

50 6/8March

51 SwingWaltz

52 JazzWaltz

Arabic

53 Saeidy1

54 Saeidy2

55 Maksoum

56 Karachi

57 Laff

58 Baladi

59 Ayoub

60 MaksoumSarih

61 Katakoufti

62 Soudasi

63 Ibrahimi

64 Zaffah

65 Hajaa

66 Khaligi

67 Arabic Rumba

68 WehdaKabira

69 WehdaSaghira

70 Wehda

71 SaeidyDance

72 LaffDance

73 KarachiDance

74 Jerk

75 MasmoudiKabir

76 Samai

Khaligi

77 KhaligiRhumba

78 Shakshaka

79 Khebaiti

80 Emarati

81 Muruba

82 Bastah

83 Dazzah

84 Sharah

85 Seeroos

86 AlBudoor

87 Wadea

88 Samri

Style

No.

Style Name

89 Mathoalath

90 Ashori

91 Liwa

92 Tanborah

93 Sout

94 Adani

95 Maghrebi

96 Ray1

97 Ray2

98 Ray3

99 Khammari

Iranian

100 BandariDance

101 Tehrani 1

102 Azari 1

103 Kurdish 1

104 Gilaki

105 Afghani

106 Tehrani 2

107 Lezgi

108 Reng

109 Avaaz

110 Asouri

111 RengTraditional

112 RengOrch

113 Bandari

114 Azari 2

115 Kurdish 2

116 Kurdish 3

Greek

117 Zeibekikos

118 Tsifteteli

119 Syrtorumba

120 Hasapiko

121 Hasaposerviko

122 Kalamatianos

123 Tsamikos

124 Karsilamas

125 5/8 Greek

Turkish

126 2/4OyunHavasi

127 ArapOryantal

128 Ciftetelli

129 Vahde

130 Azeri-Kafkas

131 5/8OyunHavasi

132 7/8OyunHavasi

133 Misket

134 9/8Standart

135 Halay

Style

No.

Style Name

217

84 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi

Effect Type List / Effekttypliste /

● Harmony Types / Harmony-Typen / Types d’effets Harmony

No. Harmony Type Description

Duet

If you want to sound one of the harmony types 01-05, play keys to the right side of the Split

Point while playing chords in the left side of the keyboard after turning Auto Accompani-

ment on. One, two or three notes of harmony are automatically added to the note you

play. When playing back a Song that includes chord data, harmony is applied whichever

keys are played.

Wenn Sie möchten, dass einer der Harmonietypen 01-05 erklingt, schlagen Sie bitte nach

Aktivierung der Begleitautomatik Tasten rechts vom Splitpunkt an, während Sie auf der lin-

ken Tastaturseite Akkorde spielen. Der von Ihnen gespielten Note werden automatisch

eine, zwei oder drei Harmonienoten hinzugefügt. Bei der Wiedergabe von Songs mit

Akkorddaten wird der Harmonieeffekt angewendet, gleichgültig, welche Tasten angeschla-

gen werden.

Si vous voulez entendre un des types d’harmonie 01-05, jouez des notes à droite du point

de partage tout en jouant des accords dans la partie gauche du clavier après avoir activé

l’accompagnement automatique. Une, deux ou trois notes d’harmonie sont automatique-

ment ajoutées à la note que vous jouez. Lors de la reproduction d’un morceau contenant

des données d’accord, l’harmonie est appliquée quelles que soient les notes jouées.

Trio02

Block03

Country04

Octave05

06 Trill 1/4 note

If you keep holding down two different notes, the notes alternate (in a trill) con-

tinuously.

Wenn Sie zwei verschiedene Noten gedrückt halten, werden die Noten fortlau-

fend abwechselnd gespielt (als Triller).

Si vous maintenez deux notes différentes enfoncées, les notes alternent en

continu (dans une trille).

07 Trill 1/6 note

08 Trill 1/8 note

09 Trill 1/12 note

10 Trill 1/16 note

11 Trill 1/24 note

12 Trill 1/32 note

13 Tremolo 1/4 note

If you keep holding down a single note, the note is repeated continuously.

(The repeat speed differs depending on the selected type.)

Wenn Sie eine einzelne Note gedrückt halten, wird die Note fortlaufend wie-

derholt.

(Die Wiederholungsgeschwindigkeit hängt vom ausgewählten Typ ab.)

Si vous maintenez une note unique enfoncée, celle-ci est répétée en continu.

(La vitesse de répétition varie en fonction du type sélectionné.)

14 Tremolo 1/6 note

15 Tremolo 1/8 note

16 Tremolo 1/12 note

17 Tremolo 1/16 note

18 Tremolo 1/24 note

19 Tremolo 1/32 note

20 Echo 1/4 note

If you keep holding down a note, echo is applied to the note played.

(The echo speed differs depending on the selected type.)

Wenn Sie eine Note gedrückt halten, wird auf die gespielte Note die Echofunk-

tion angewendet.

(Die Echogeschwindigkeit hängt vom ausgewählten Typ ab.)

Si vous maintenez une note enfoncée, un écho est appliqué à la note jouée.

(La vitesse de l’écho varie en fonction du type sélectionné.)

21 Echo 1/6 note

22 Echo 1/8 note

23 Echo 1/12 note

24 Echo 1/16 note

25 Echo 1/24 note

26 Echo 1/32 note

218

PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi 85

● Reverb Types / Reverb-Typen / Types d’effets Reverb

● Chorus Types / Chorus-Typen / Types d’effets Chorus

No. Reverb Type Description

01-03 Hall 1-3

Concert hall reverb.

Nachhall in einem Konzertsaal.

Réverbération d’une salle de concert.

04-05 Room 1-2

Small room reverb.

Nachhall in einem kleineren Raum.

Réverbération d’une petite salle.

06-07 Stage 1-2

Reverb for solo instruments.

Halleffekte für Soloinstrumente.

Réverbération pour instruments solo.

08-09 Plate 1-2

Simulated steel plate reverb.

Simulation des Halls in einer Stahlplatte.

Simulation de la réverbération d’une plaque d’acier.

10 Off

No effect.

Kein Halleffekt.

Pas d’effet.

No. Chorus Type Description

1-2 Chorus 1-2

Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing.

Herkömmlicher Chorus-Effekt mit vollem und warmem Klang.

Programme de choeur classique avec un effet de choeur riche et chaud.

3-4 Flanger 1-2

This produces a rich, animated wavering effect in the sound.

Hiermit wird eine volltönende und lebhafte Tonhöhenschwankung erzeugt.

Vous obtenez un effet d’ondulation riche et animé dans le son.

5 Off

No effect.

Kein Effekt.

Pas d’effet.

219

Liste des types d’effets

86 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi

MIDI Implementation Chart / MIDI-Implementierungstabelle /

YAMAHA [ PORTATONE ] Date:15-Nov-2004

Model PSR-A300 MIDI Implementation Chart Version:1.0

Transmitted Recognized Remarks

Function...

Basic Default 1 - 16 1 - 16

Channel Changed x x

Default 3 3

Mode Messages x x

Altered ************** x

Note 0 - 127 0 - 127

Number : True voice ************** 0 - 127

Velocity Note ON o 9nH,v=1-127 o 9nH,v=1-127

Note OFF x x

After Key's x x

Touch Ch's x x

Pitch Bend o o

0,32 o o Bank Select

1x *1 o Modulation wheel

6o o Data Entry(MSB)

38 o x Data Entry(LSB)

7,10 o o

Control 11 x *1 o Expression

64 o o Sustain

Change 71,73,74 x *1 o

2 li

220

PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi 87

Feuille d’implémentation MIDI

*1 Refer to #2 on pages 88, 89.

Mode 1 : OMNI ON , POLY Mode 2 : OMNI ON ,MONO o : Yes

Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 4 : OMNI OFF,MONO x : No

Prog o 0 - 127 o 0 - 127

Change : True # **************

System Exclusive o o

: Song Pos. x x

Common : Song Sel. x x

: Tune x x

System : Clock o o

Real Time: Commands o o

Aux :All Sound OFF x o(120,126,127)

:Reset All Cntrls x o(121)

:Local ON/OFF x o(122)

:All Notes OFF x o(123-125)

Mes- :Active Sense o o

sages:Reset x x

72 o o Release Time

84 x *1 o Portamento Cntrl

91,93 o o Effect 1,3 Depth

96,97 x o RPN Inc,Dec

100,101 o o RPN LSB,MSB

221

88 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi

NOTE:

1 By default (factory settings) the instrument ordinarily

functions as a 16-channel multi-timbral tone generator,

and incoming data does not affect the panel voices or

panel settings. However, the MIDI messages listed

below do affect the panel voices, auto accompaniment,

and songs.

• MIDI Master Tuning

• System exclusive messages for changing the

Reverb Type and Chorus Type.

2 Messages for these control change numbers cannot be

transmitted from the instrument itself. However, they

may be transmitted when playing the accompaniment,

song or using the Harmony effect.

3 Exclusive

<GM System ON> F0H, 7EH, 7FH, 09H, 01H, F7H

• This message automatically restores all default set-

tings for the instrument, with the exception of MIDI

Master Tuning.

<MIDI Master Volume> F0H, 7FH, 7FH, 04H, 01H, ll,

mm, F7H

• This message allows the volume of all channels to

be changed simultaneously (Universal System

Exclusive).

• The values of “mm” is used for MIDI Master Volume.

(Values for “ll” are ignored.)

<MIDI Master Tuning> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 27H, 30H, 00H,

00H, mm, ll, cc, F7H

• This message simultaneously changes the tuning

value of all channels.

• The values of “mm” and “ll” are used for MIDI Master

Tuning.

• The default value of “mm” and “ll” are 08H and 00H,

respectively. Any values can be used for “n” and “cc.”

<Reverb Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 00H,

mmH, llH, F7H

• mm : Reverb Type MSB

• ll : Reverb Type LSB

Refer to the Effect Map (page 90) for details.

<Chorus Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 20H,

mmH, llH, F7H

• mm : Chorus Type MSB

• ll : Chorus Type LSB

Refer to the Effect Map (page 90) for details.

4 When the accompaniment is started, an FAH message

is transmitted. When accompaniment is stopped, an

FCH message is transmitted.When the clock is set to

External, both FAH (accompaniment start) and FCH

(accompaniment stop) are recognized.

5 Local ON/OFF

<Local ON> Bn, 7A, 7F

<Local OFF> Bn, 7A, 00

Value for “n” is ignored.

HINWEIS:

1 Im Standardbetrieb (Werkseinstellungen) funktioniert

das Instrument gewöhnlich als multi-timbraler 16-

Kanal-Klangerzeuger, und eingehende Daten haben

keinen Einﬂuß auf die Bedienfeld-Voices und die Bedi-

enfeld-Einstellungen. Die im folgenden aufgeführten

Befehle verändern jedoch dieBedienfeld-Voices, die

automatische Begleitung und die Songs.

• MIDI Master Tuning

• Systemexklusive Meldungen zum Umschalten von

Halltyp (Reverb Type) und Chorus-Typ.

2 Befehle für diese Controller-Nummern können nicht

vom Instrument selbst gesendet werden. Sie können

jedoch gesendet werden, wenn die Begleitung gespielt

oder der Harmony-Effekt verwendet wird.

3 Exclusive

<GM System ON> F0H, 7EH, 7FH, 09H, 01H, F7H

• Durch diese Meldung werden automatisch alle

Werksvorgaben des Instruments, mit Ausnahme

des „MIDI Master Tuning“ (der Gesamtstimmung),

wieder hergestellt.

<MIDI Master Volume> F0H, 7FH, 7FH, 04H, 01H, ll,

mm, F7H

• Mit diesem Befehl kann die Lautstärke aller Kanäle

gleichzeitig geändert werden (Universal System

Exclusive).

• Die Werte für „mm“ werden für MIDI Master Volume

verwendet. (Werte für „ll“ werden ignoriert.)

<MIDI Master Tuning> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 27H, 30H, 00H,

00H, mm, ll, cc, F7H

• Durch diesen Befehl wird der Stimmungswert für

alle Kanäle gleichzeitig geändert.

• Die Werte von „mm“ und „ll“ werden für MIDI Master

Tuning verwendet.

• Der Standardwert beträgt für „mm“ 08H und für „ll“

00H. Für „n“ und „cc“ können beliebige Werte ver-

wendet werden.

<Reverb Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 00H,

mmH, llH, F7H

• mm : Reverb Type MSB

• ll : Reverb Type LSB

Weitere Einzelheiten hierzu ﬁnden Sie in der Effekt-

Zuordnungstabelle (Seite 90).

<Chorus Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 20H,

mmH, llH, F7H

• mm : Chorus Type MSB

• ll : Chorus Type LSB

Weitere Einzelheiten hierzu ﬁnden Sie in der Effekt-

Zuordnungstabelle (Seite 90).

4 Beim Starten der Begleitung wird eine FAH-Meldung

gesendet. Wenn die Begleitung gestoppt wird, wird die

Meldung FCH ausgegeben. Wenn die Clock auf

„External“ eingestellt ist, werden sowohl FAH

(Begleitung Start) als auch FCH (Begleitung Stop)

erkannt.

5 Local ON/OFF

<Local ON> Bn, 7A, 7F

<Local OFF> Bn, 7A, 00

Der Wert für „n“ wird ignoriert.

MIDI Data Format / MIDI-Datenformat /

222

PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi 89

NOTE:

1 Le PSR-A300 fonctionne par défaut (réglages d’usine)

comme un générateur de son multi timbre à 16 canaux.

De ce fait, la réception de données n’affecte ni les voix

de panneau ni les réglages de panneau. Cependant,

les messages MIDI ﬁgurant dans la liste ci-dessous

affectent les voix de panneau, l’accompagnement

automatique et les morceaux.

• MIDI Master Tuning

• Messages exclusifs au système permettant de

modiﬁer les réglages Reverb Type et Chorus Type.

2 Les messages relatifs à ces numéros de changement

de commande ne peuvent pas être transmis depuis le

PSR-A300. Il est toutefois possible de les émettre

pendant la reproduction de l’accompagnement ou

l’exécution d’un morceau, et à l’aide de l’effet Harmony.

3 Messages exclusifs au système

<GM System ON> F0H, 7EH, 7FH, 09H, 01H, F7H

• Ce message rétablit automatiquement tous les

réglages par défaut de l’instrument, à l’exception de

la commande MIDI Master Tuning.

<MIDI Master Volume> F0H, 7FH, 7FH, 04H, 01H, ll,

mm, F7H

• Ce message autorise la modiﬁcation simultanée du

volume de tous les canaux (Universal System

Exclusive).

• Les valeurs « mm » sont utilisées pour MIDI Master

Volume. (Les valeurs « ll » sont ignorées).

<MIDI Master Tuning> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 27H, 30H, 00H,

00H, mm, ll, cc, F7H

• Ce message modiﬁe simultanément la valeur de

l’accord de tous les canaux.

• Les valeurs « mm » et « ll » sont utilisées pour MIDI

Master Tuning.

• Les valeurs par défaut de « mm » et « ll » sont res-

pectivement 08H et 00H. N’importe quelle valeur

peut être utilisée pour « n » et « cc ».

<Reverb Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 00H,

mmH, llH, F7H

• mm : Reverb Type MSB

• ll : Reverb Type LSB

Reportez-vous à la liste des effets (page 90) pour les

détails.

<Chorus Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 20H,

mmH, llH, F7H

• mm : Chorus Type MSB

• ll : Chorus Type LSB

Reportez-vous à la liste des effets (page 90) pour les

détails.

4 Lors du lancement de l’accompagnement, un message

FAH est envoyé. A l’arrêt de l’accompagnement, c’est

un message FCH qui est transmis. Lorsque l’horloge

est réglée sur External, les messages FAH (début de

l’accompagnement) et FCH (arrêt de

l’accompagnement) sont reconnus.

5 Local ON/OFF

<Local ON> Bn, 7A, 7F

<Local OFF> Bn, 7A, 00

La valeur « n » est ignorée.

223

Format des données MIDI

MIDI Data Format / MIDI-Datenformat / Format des données MIDI

90 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi

■ Effect map / Effekt-Zuordnung / Liste des effets • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

* When a Type LSB value is received that corresponds to

no effect type, a value corresponding to the effect type

(coming the closest to the speciﬁed value) is automati-

cally set.

* The numbers in parentheses in front of the Effect Type

names correspond to the number indicated in the dis-

play.

*Wenn ein Type-LSB-Wert empfangen wird, der keinem

Effekttyp zugewiesen ist, wird automatisch ein passen-

der Wert eingestellt, der dem empfangenen Wert am

nächsten kommt.

* Die Nummern in Klammern vor den Effekttyp-Bezeich-

nungen entsprechen der im Display erscheinenden

Nummern.

* Lorsque la valeur Type LSB reçue ne correspond à

aucun type d’effet, une valeur correspondant à un type

d’effet (la plus proche possible de la valeur spéciﬁée) est

automatiquement sélectionnée.

* Les chiffres entre parenthèses qui précèdent les noms

des types d’effet correspondent aux numéros apparais-

sant sur l’afﬁcheur.

● REVERB

● CHORUS

TYPE

MSB

TYPE LSB

01 2 8 1617 18 19 20

0 No Effect

1 (01)Hall1 (02)Hall2 (03)Hall3

2 Room (04)Room1 (05)Room2

3 Stage (06)Stage1 (07)Stage2

4 Plate (08)Plate1 (09)Plate2

5...127 No Effect

TYPE

MSB

TYPE LSB

01 2 8 1617 18 19 20

0...63 No Effect

64 Thru

65 Chorus (2)Chorus2

66 Celeste (1)Chorus1

67 Flanger (3)Flanger1 (4)Flanger2

68...127 No Effect

224

PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi 91

Speciﬁcations / Technische Daten / Spéciﬁcations

Keyboards

• 61 standard-size keys (C1-C6), with Touch Response

Display

• LCD display (backlit)

Setup

•STANDBY/ON

• MASTER VOLUME: MIN-MAX

Panel Controls

• [L]/[REC TRACK 2], [R]/[REC TRACK 1], [LISTEN & LEARN],

[TIMING], [WAITING], [A-B REPEAT]/[ACMP ON/OFF],

[REW]/[INTRO/ENDING/rit.], [FF]/[[MAIN/AUTO FILL],

[TEMPO/TAP], [REC], [PAUSE]/[SYNC START], [START/STOP],

[SONG], [STYLE], [VOICE], [FUNCTION], [PORTABLE

GRAND], [SOUND EFFECT KIT], [REVERB ON/OFF], [DEMO],

[METRONOME ON/OFF], [SPLIT ON/OFF], [DUAL ON/OFF],

[HARMONY ON/OFF], [TOUCH ON/OFF],

number buttons [0]-[9], [+/ YES], [-/ NO],

[ORIENTAL SCALE SETTING] C-B, [MEMORY],

[PITCH BEND]

Voice

• 108 panel voices + 12 drum kits + 1 sound effect kit +

359 XGlite voices + 2 XGlite optional voices +

35 Oriental Voices + 6 Oriental Percussion Kits

•Polyphony: 32

•DUAL

• SPLIT

Style

• 135 preset Styles

•1 ﬂash Style

• Style Control:

ACMP ON/OFF, SYNC START, START/STOP,

INTRO/ENDING/rit., MAIN/AUTO FILL

• Fingering: Multi ﬁngering

• Style Volume

Education Feature

• Chord Dictionary

• Lesson 1-3

Function

• Style Volume, Song Volume, Transpose, Tuning, Pitch Bend

Range, Split Point, Touch Sensitivity, Accompaniment Tuning,

Oriental Scales, Main voice (Volume, Octave, Chorus Send

Level), Dual voice (Voice, Volume, Octave, Chorus Send Level),

Split voice (Voice, Volume, Octave, Chorus Send Level),

Reverb Type, Reverb level, Chorus Type, Panel Sustain,

Harmony Type, Harmony Volume, Style Registration,

PC mode (PC1/PC2/Off), Local On/Off, External Clock,

Initial Setup Send, Time Signature, Metronome Volume,

Lesson Track (R), Lesson Track (L), Demo Cancel

Effects

•Reverb: 9 types

• Chorus: 4 types

• Harmony: 26 types

Song

• 35 Preset Songs + 5 User Songs + Flash Memory

• Song Clear

• Song Volume

Recording

• Song

User Song: 5 Songs

Recording Tracks: 1, 2

Oriental Scale

• Setting : C-B

• Memory : 1-4

Pitch Bend Wheel

• Range: ±1 octave

MIDI

• Local On/Off

• Initial Setup Send

• External Clock

• PC mode

Auxiliary jacks

• PHONES/OUTPUT, DC IN 12V, MIDI IN/OUT, SUSTAIN

Ampliﬁer

• 2.5W + 2.5W

Speakers

• 12cm x 2

Power Consumption

• 10W (When using PA-3C power adaptor)

Power Supply

• Adaptor: Yamaha PA-3B/3C AC power adaptor

• Batteries: Six “AA” size, LR6 or equivalent batteries

Dimensions (W x D x H)

• 945 x 370 x 128 mm

(37-1/4" x 14-5/8" x 5-1/16")

Weight

• 5.1kg (11 lbs. 4 oz.) (not including batteries)

Supplied Accessories

• Music Rest

• Owner’s Manual

* Speciﬁcations and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for

information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to

change or modify products or speciﬁcations at any time without

prior notice. Since speciﬁcations, equipment or options may not

be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha

dealer.

* Die technischen Daten und Beschreibungen in dieser Bedienung-

sanleitung dienen nur der Information. Yamaha Corp. behält sich

das Recht vor, Produkte oder deren technische Daten jederzeit

ohne vorherige Ankündigung zu verändern oder zu modiﬁzieren.

Da die technischen Daten, das Gerät selbst oder Sonderzubehör

nicht in jedem Land gleich sind, setzen Sie sich im Zweifel bitte

mit Ihrem Yamaha-Händler in Verbindung.

* Les caractéristiques techniques et les descriptions du mode

d’emploi ne sont données que pour information. Yamaha Corp. se

réserve le droit de changer ou modiﬁer les produits et leurs

caractéristiques techniques à tout moment sans aucun avis. Du

fait que les caractéristiques techniques, les équipements et les

options peuvent différer d’un pays à l’autre, adressez-vous au

distributeur Yamaha le plus proche.

Optional Accessories

•AC Power Adaptor: PA-3B/PA-3C

• USB-MIDI Interface: UX16

•Footswitch: FC4/FC5

•Keyboard Stand: L-2C/L-2L

• Headphones: HPE-150

225

226

Limited Warranty

90 DAYS LABOR 1 YEAR PARTS

Yamaha Corporation of America, hereafter referred to as Yamaha, warrants to the original consumer of a product included in the categories listed

below, that the product will be free of defects in materials and/or workmanship for the periods indicated. This warranty is applicable to all models

included in the following series of products:

PSR SERIES OF PORTATONE ELECTRONIC KEYBOARDS

If during the ﬁrst 90 days that immediately follows the purchase date, your new Yamaha product covered by this warranty is found to have a defect in

material and/or workmanship, Yamaha and/or its authorized representative will repair such defect without charge for parts or labor.

If parts should be required after this 90 day period but within the one year period that immediately follows the purchase date, Ya maha will, subject to

the terms of this warranty, supply these parts without charge. However, charges for labor, and/or any miscellaneous expenses incurred are the

consumers responsibility. Yamaha reserves the right to utilize reconditioned parts in repairing these products and/or to use reconditioned units as

warranty replacements.

THIS WARRANTY IS THE ONLY EXPRESS WARRANTY WHICH YAMAHA MAKES IN CONNECTION WITH THESE PRODUCTS.

ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY APPLICABLE TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING THE WARRANTY OF MERCHANT ABILITY IS

LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY. YAMAHA EXCLUDES AND SHALL NOT BE LIABLE IN ANY

EVENT FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.

Some states do not allow limitations that relate to implied warranties and/or the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages. Therefore, these

limitations and exclusions may not apply to you.

This warranty gives you speciﬁc legal rights. You may also have other rights which vary from state to state.

CONSUMERS RESPONSIBILITIES

If warranty service should be required, it is necessary that the consumer assume certain responsibilities:

1. Contact the Customer Service Department of the retailer selling the product, or any retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the product for

assistance. You may also contact Yamaha directly at the address provided below.

2. Deliver the unit to be serviced under warranty to: the retailer selling the product, an authorized service center, or to Yamaha with an explanation

of the problem. Please be prepared to provide proof purchase date (sales receipt, credit card copy, etc.) when requesting service and/or parts under

warranty.

3. Shipping and/or insurance costs are the consumers responsibility.* Units shipped for service should be packed securely.

*Repaired units will be returned PREPAID if warranty service is required within the ﬁrst 90 days.

IMPORTANT: Do NOT ship anything to ANY location without prior authorization. A Return Authorization (RA) will be issued that has a

tracking number assigned that will expedite the servicing of your unit and provide a tracking system if needed.

4. Your owners manual contains important safety and operating instructions. It is your responsibility to be aware of the contents of this manual and

to follow all safety precautions.

EXCLUSIONS

This warranty does not apply to units whose trade name, trademark, and/or ID numbers have been altered, defaced, exchanged removed, or to

failures and/or damages that may occur as a result of:

1. Neglect, abuse, abnormal strain, modiﬁcation or exposure to extremes in temperature or humidity.

2. Improper repair or maintenance by any person who is not a service representative of a retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the product, an

authorized service center, or an authorized service representative of Yamaha.

3. This warranty is applicable only to units sold by retailers authorized by Yamaha to sell these products in the U.S.A., the District of Columbia, and

Puerto Rico. This warranty is not applicable in other possessions or territories of the U.S.A. or in any other country.

Please record the model and serial number of the product you have purchased in the spaces provided below.

Model___________________________ Serial #________________________________ Sales Slip #________________________________

Purchased from____________________________________________________________ Date______________________________________

(Retailer)

YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA

Electronic Service Division

6600 Orangethorpe Avenue

Buena Park, CA 90620

KEEP THIS DOCUMENT FOR YOUR RECORDS. DO NOT MAIL!

For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha

representative or the authorized distributor listed below.

Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou

au distributeur le plus proche de vous ﬁgurant dans la liste suivante.

Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten

Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen

Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.

Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana

o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.

CANADA

Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.

135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,

M1S 3R1, Canada

Tel: 416-298-1311

U.S.A.

Yamaha Corporation of America

6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,

U.S.A.

Tel: 714-522-9011

MEXICO

Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V.

Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149,

Col. Guadalupe del Moral

C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México

Tel: 55-5804-0600

BRAZIL

Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda.

Av. Reboucas 2636-Pinheiros CEP: 05402-400

Sao Paulo-SP. Brasil

Tel: 011-3085-1377

ARGENTINA

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.

Sucursal de Argentina

Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053,

Buenos Aires, Argentina

Tel: 1-4371-7021

PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN

AMERICAN COUNTRIES/

CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.

Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,

Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,

Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá

Tel: +507-269-5311

THE UNITED KINGDOM

Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd.

Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,

MK7 8BL, England

Tel: 01908-366700

IRELAND

Danfay Ltd.

61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin

Tel: 01-2859177

GERMANY

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,

Branch Switzerland

Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland

Tel: 01-383 3990

AUSTRIA

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,

Branch Austria

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: 01-60203900

POLAND

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH

Sp.z. o.o. Oddzial w Polsce

ul. 17 Stycznia 56, PL-02-146 Warszawa, Poland

Tel: 022-868-07-57

THE NETHERLANDS

Yamaha Music Central Europe,

Branch Nederland

Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands

Tel: 0347-358 040

BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,

Branch Belgium

Rue de Geneve (Genevastraat) 10, 1140 - Brussels,

Belgium

Tel: 02-726 6032

FRANCE

Yamaha Musique France

BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France

Tel: 01-64-61-4000

ITALY

Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.

Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy

Tel: 02-935-771

SPAIN/PORTUGAL

Yamaha-Hazen Música, S.A.

Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230

Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain

Tel: 91-639-8888

GREECE

Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House

147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece

Tel: 01-228 2160

SWEDEN

Yamaha Scandinavia AB

J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1

Box 30053

S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden

Tel: 031 89 34 00

DENMARK

YS Copenhagen Liaison Ofﬁce

Generatorvej 6A

DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark

Tel: 44 92 49 00

FINLAND

F-Musiikki Oy

Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260,

SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland

Tel: 09 618511

NORWAY

Norsk ﬁlial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB

Grini Næringspark 1

N-1345 Østerås, Norway

Tel: 67 16 77 70

ICELAND

Skifan HF

Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120

IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland

Tel: 525 5000

OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: +49-4101-3030

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2312

TURKEY/CYPRUS

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

OTHER COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Gulf FZE

LB21-128 Jebel Ali Freezone

P. O.Box 17328, Dubai, U.A.E.

Tel: +971-4-881-5868

THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA

Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd.

25/F., United Plaza, 1468 Nanjing Road (West),

Jingan, Shanghai, China

Tel: 021-6247-2211

HONG KONG

Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.

11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,

Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong

Tel: 2737-7688

INDONESIA

PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)

PT. Nusantik

Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot

Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia

Tel: 21-520-2577

KOREA

Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.

Tong-Yang Securities Bldg. 16F 23-8 Yoido-dong,

Youngdungpo-ku, Seoul, Korea

Tel: 02-3770-0660

MALAYSIA

Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.

Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,

Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia

Tel: 3-78030900

PHILIPPINES

Yupangco Music Corporation

339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,

Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines

Tel: 819-7551

SINGAPORE

Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.

#03-11 A-Z Building

140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015

Tel: 747-4374

TAIWA N

Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.

3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei.

Taiwan 104, R.O.C.

Tel: 02-2511-8688

THAILAND

Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.

891/1 Siam Motors Building, 15-16 ﬂoor

Rama 1 road, Wangmai, Pathumwan

Bangkok 10330, Thailand

Tel: 02-215-2626

OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2317

AUSTRALIA

Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.

Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,

Victoria 3006, Australia

Tel: 3-9693-5111

NEW ZEALAND

Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd.

146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa,

Auckland, New Zealand

Tel: 9-634-0099

COUNTRIES AND TRUST

TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2312

NORTH AMERICA

CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA

EUROPE

AFRICA

MIDDLE EAST

ASIA

OCEANIA

HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-3273

[PK] 35

U.R.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation

???PO???.?-01

WE15380 Printed in China

Yamaha PK CLUB (Portable Keyboard Home Page, English Only)

http://www.yamahaPKclub.com/

Yamaha Manual Library

http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/

Documenttranscriptie

Owner’s Manual Bedienungsanleitung Mode d’emploi EN DE FR SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply (adapter). DO NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other than one described in the manual, on the name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha. This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of these may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being charged is a rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for the battery being charged. This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory product. When installing batteries, do not mix batteries with new, or with batteries of a different type. Batteries MUST be installed correctly. Mismatches or incorrect installation may result in overheating and battery case rupture. SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by the laws in your area. Note: Check with any retailer of household type batteries in your area for battery disposal information. The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units. This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for long periods of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist. IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before damage occurs. NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service. Warning: Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable to assist you, please contact Yamaha directly. NAME PLATE LOCATION: The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase. Model ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following: Serial No. Purchase Date Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement. PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL 92-BP (bottom) 2 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/ uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (class B) OBSERVERA! Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) så länge som den ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har stängts av. ADVARSEL: Netspæendingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt, sålæenge netledningen siddr i en stikkontakt, som er t endt — også selvom der or slukket på apparatets afbryder. VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko laitetta verkosta. (standby) Entsorgung leerer Batterien (nur innerhalb Deutschlands) Leisten Sie einen Beitrag zum Umweltschutz. Verbrauchte Batterien oder Akkumulatoren dürfen nicht in den Hausmüll. Sie können bei einer Sammelstelle für Altbatterien bzw. Sondermüll abgegeben werden. Informieren Sie sich bei Ihrer Kommune. (battery) 1 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 3 PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING * Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference. WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/AC power adaptor Water warning • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument. • Use the specified adaptor (PA-3B, PA-3C or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or overheating. • Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it. • Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings. • Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. Fire warning • Do not place the AC adaptor cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it. Do not open • Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall over and cause a fire. If you notice any abnormality • If the AC adaptor cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the adaptor plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: • Do not attempt to recharge batteries that are not intended to be charged. Power supply/AC power adaptor • When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. • When the batteries run out, or if the instrument is not to be used for a long time, remove the batteries from the instrument to prevent possible leakage of the battery fluid. • Unplug the AC power adaptor when not using the instrument, or during electrical storms. • Keep batteries away from children. • If the batteries do leak, avoid contact with the leaked fluid. If the battery fluid should come in contact with your eyes, mouth, or skin, wash immediately with water and consult a doctor. Battery fluid is corrosive and may possibly cause loss of sight or chemical burns. • Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multipleconnector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet. Battery Location • Always make sure all batteries are inserted in conformity with the +/- polarity markings. Failure to do so might result in overheating, fire, or battery fluid leakage. • Always replace all batteries at the same time. Do not use new batteries together with old ones. Also, do not mix battery types, such as alkaline batteries with manganese batteries, or batteries from different makers, or different types of batteries from the same maker, since this can cause overheating, fire, or battery fluid leakage. • Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise. • Do not dispose of batteries in fire. • Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. (4)-9 4 • Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components. 1/2 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 2 • Before moving the instrument, remove all connected adaptor and other cables. • Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching the stand or rack, use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the internal components or result in the instrument falling over. • Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard. Connections • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. • Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. • Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. Saving data Maintenance • When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths. Handling caution • Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument. Saving and backing up your data • The panel settings and some other types of data will be lost if the power is turned off before they are saved. Be sure to save data you want to keep to the internal Flash Memory (page 33) before turning off the power. Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation. Save the important data to your computer. For information on sending the data, see page 67. Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use. When using a power adaptor, even when the power is off, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet. Make sure to discard used batteries according to local regulations. • The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. ● COPYRIGHT NOTICE This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, style files, MIDI files, WAVE data, musical scores and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES. ● Trademarks • Windows is the registered trademark of Microsoft ® Corporation. • All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders. (4)-9 2/2 3 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 5 Congratulations and thank you for purchasing the Yamaha PSR-A300 PORTATONE! Please read this owner’s manual carefully before using the instrument in order to take full advantage of its various features. Make sure to keep this manual in a safe and handy place even after you finish reading, and refer to it often when you need to better understand an operation or function. Panel logos GM System Level 1 “GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which ensures that any GM-compatible music data can be accurately played by any GM-compatible tone generator, regardless of manufacturer. The GM mark is affixed to all software and hardware products that support GM System Level. XGlite As its name implies, “XGlite” is a simplified version of Yamaha’s high-quality XG tone generation format. Naturally, you can play back any XG song data using an XGlite tone generator. However, keep in mind that some songs may play back differently compared to the original data, due to the reduced set of control parameters and effects. Stereo Sampled Piano The instrument has a special Portable Grand Piano Voice—created by state-of-the-art stereo sampling technology and using Yamaha’s sophisticated AWM (Advanced Wave memory) tone generation system. Yamaha Education Suite 5 The instrument features the new Yamaha Education Suite—a set of learning tools that utilize the latest technology to make studying and practicing music more fun and fulfilling than ever before! Touch Response The exceptionally natural Touch Response feature, with a convenient front panel on/off switch, gives you maximum expressive level control over the voices. Supplied Accessories The PSR-A300 package includes the following items. Please check that you have them all. • Music rest • Owner’s manual (this book) ● Music rest Insert the music rest into the slots as shown. 6 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 4 Contents Panel logos ................................................................ 6 Supplied Accessories................................................. 6 Setting Up 8 Power Requirements ................................................. 8 Connecting headphones (PHONES/OUTPUT Jack) . 9 Connecting a footswitch (SUSTAIN Jack) ................. 9 Using the MIDI Terminals .......................................... 9 Turn on the power...................................................... 9 Panel Controls and Terminals 10 Front Panel .............................................................. 10 Rear Panel ............................................................... 10 Step 1 12 Try playing a variety of instrument Voices ............... 12 Playing Two Voices Simultaneously—Dual ............. 13 Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands—Split ............................................... 14 Playing the Grand Piano Voice ................................ 15 Drum kits & Oriental Percussion kits........................ 15 Step 2 Fun Sounds 17 Step 3 Play With The Metronome 18 Start the metronome ................................................ 18 Step 4 Playing Songs 20 Select and Listen to a Specific Song ....................... 20 Step 5 Play with a Style 22 Selecting a rhythm of a Style ................................... 22 Playing with a Style.................................................. 23 Record your own performance 25 Recording Your Performance .................................. 25 Recording to a specified track.................................. 26 Deleting User Songs ................................................ 28 Step 7 Using Oriental Scales 29 Setting an Oriental Scale—Scale Setting ................ 29 Registering the Scale settings ................................. 30 Recall the Scale settings.......................................... 31 Set the Accompaniment Tuning on.......................... 31 Step 8 Play with the Pitch Bend Wheel 32 Adding pitch variations with the Pitch Bend Wheel.. 32 Adjust the pitch bend range ..................................... 32 Backup and Initialization Song Lesson 37 Lesson 1 (Listen & Learn) ....................................... 37 Lesson 2 (Timing).................................................... 39 Lesson 3 (Waiting) .................................................. 40 Song settings 41 Changing the Melody Voice .................................... 41 Song Volume ........................................................... 41 Mute ........................................................................ 42 Practice Makes Perfect ........................................... 43 33 Backup ..................................................................... 33 Initialization .............................................................. 33 Handy Performance Features 47 Touch Response Sensitivity .................................... 47 Setting the Split Point .............................................. 48 Transpose ............................................................... 48 Tuning ..................................................................... 49 One Touch Setting .................................................. 49 Changing the tempo of the Song/Style.................... 50 Adjusting the Voice Parameters .............................. 50 Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions 51 Various ways to start and stop Style playback ........ 51 Pattern Variation (Sections) .................................... 53 Adjusting the Style Volume ..................................... 55 Playing Auto Accompaniment Chords 56 Easy Chords ............................................................ 56 Standard Chords ..................................................... 56 Looking up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary ...... 58 60 Select the item and change the value ..................... 60 About MIDI 62 What is MIDI? .......................................................... 62 What You Can Do With MIDI................................... 62 Transferring Performance Data To and From Another Instrument..................................... 63 Transferring data between the PSR-A300 and a computer.................................................... 65 Troubleshooting ...........................................................68 Index ..............................................................................69 Voice List.......................................................................71 Maximum Polyphony ............................................... 71 Drum Kit & Oriental Percussion Kit List.....................78 Style List........................................................................83 Effect Type List .............................................................84 MIDI Implementation Chart ..........................................86 MIDI Data Format ..........................................................88 Effect map ............................................................... 90 Specifications ...............................................................91 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 5 44 Adding Harmony...................................................... 44 Adding Reverb......................................................... 45 Adding Chorus......................................................... 46 Adding Panel Sustain .............................................. 46 Function Settings Step 6 34 Basic Operation ....................................................... 34 Display..................................................................... 36 Play With a Variety of Effects — Quick Guide — Changing the Voices Basic Operation and Displays 7 Setting Up Be sure to do the following operations BEFORE turning on the power. Power Requirements Although the instrument will run either from an optional AC adaptor or batteries, Yamaha recommends use of an AC adaptor whenever possible. An AC adaptor is more environmentally friendly than batteries and does not deplete resources. ■ Using an AC Power Adaptor q Make sure that the power of the instrument is off (the backlit display is off). WARNING • Use ONLY a Yamaha PA-3B or PA-3C AC Power Adaptor (or other adaptor specifically recommended by Yamaha) to power your instrument from the AC mains. The use of other adaptors may result in irreparable damage to both the adaptor and the instrument. w Connect the AC adaptor (PA-3B, PA-3C or other adaptor specifically recommended by Yamaha) to the power supply jack. e Plug the AC adaptor into an AC outlet. CAUTION • Unplug the AC Power Adaptor when not using the instrument, or during electrical storms. w e PA-3B or PA-3C AC outlet ■ Using Batteries q Open the battery compartment cover located on the instrument’s bottom panel. w Insert the six new alkaline batteries, being careful to follow the polarity markings on the side of the compartment. e Replace the compartment cover, making sure that it locks firmly in place. CAUTION • Never connect or disconnect the AC power adaptor when the batteries are installed in the instrument and the power is on. Doing so will turn the power off, possibly resulting in loss of the data being transferred and the data currently in the transfer destination during transferring or recording a data. 8 For battery operation the instrument requires six 1.5V “AA” size, LR6 or equivalent batteries. (Alkaline batteries are recommended.) When battery power becomes too low for proper operation, the volume may be reduced, the sound may be distorted, and other problems may occur. When this happens, make sure to replace all batteries, following the precautions listed below. If necessary, also make sure to save all important User data (see page 33), since custom panel settings are lost when the batteries are removed. CAUTION • Use alkaline batteries for this instrument. Other types of batteries (including rechargeable batteries) may have sudden drops of power when battery power becomes low, possibly resulting in loss of data in the flash memory. • Make sure to install the batteries with the proper orientation, maintaining the correct polarity (as shown). Incorrect battery installation may result in heat, fire and/or leaking of corrosive chemicals. • When the batteries run down, replace them with a complete set of six new batteries. NEVER mix old and new batteries. Do not use different kinds of batteries (e.g. alkaline and manganese) at the same time. • If the instrument is not to be in use for a long time, remove the batteries from it, in order to prevent possible fluid leakage from the battery. • Please use the power adaptor when transferring data to flash memory. Batteries (including rechargeable types) can be drained rapidly by this type of operation. If the batteries do become drained during a data transfer, both the data being transferred and the data currently in the transfer destination will be lost. PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 6 Setting Up Make all necessary connections BEFORE turning the power on. Using the MIDI Terminals Connecting headphones (PHONES/OUTPUT Jack) The PSR-A300 speakers are automatically shut off when a plug is inserted into this jack. The PHONES/ OUTPUT jack also functions as an external output. You can connect the PHONES/OUTPUT jack to a keyboard amplifier, stereo system, mixer, tape recorder, or other line-level audio device to send the instrument’s output signal to that device. MIDI instrument The instrument also features MIDI terminals, allowing you to interface the instrument with other MIDI instruments or computers. (For more information, see page 62.) NOTE WARNING • Avoid listening with the headphones at high volume for long periods of time; doing so may not only result in ear fatigue, it may be damaging to your hearing. • MIDI cables (sold separately) must be used for connecting to MIDI devices. They can be bought at music stores, etc. Turn on the power CAUTION • To prevent damage to the speakers, set the volume of the external devices at the minimum setting and turn power off the devices before connecting them. Failure to observe these precautions may result in electric shock or equipment damage. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all devices at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. Turn down the volume by turning the [MASTER VOLUME] control to the left and press the [STANDBY/ON] switch to turn on the power. Pressing the switch again turns the power off. Connecting a footswitch (SUSTAIN Jack) Backup data in the flash memory (page 33) is loaded to the instrument when the power is turned on. If no backup data exists on flash memory, all instrument settings are restored to the initial factory defaults when the power is turned on. The sustain function lets you produce a natural sustain as you play by pressing an optional footswitch. Plug the Yamaha FC4 or FC5 footswitch into this jack and use it to switch sustain on and off. NOTE • Make sure that the footswitch plug is properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the power. • Do not press the footswitch while turning the power on. Doing this changes the recognized polarity of the footswitch, resulting in reversed footswitch operation. CAUTION • When using a power adaptor, even when the power is off, a small amount of electricity is still being consumed by the instrument. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure to unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet, and/or remove the batteries from the instrument. CAUTION • Never attempt to turn the power off when a “Writing!” message is shown in the display. Doing so can damage the flash memory and result in a loss of data. 7 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 9 Panel Controls and Terminals ■ Front Panel q [STANDBY/ON] switch ....................................page 9, 34 w [MASTER VOLUME] control ......................... pages 9, 34 When the lesson mode e LESSON PART [L] button .............................................................page 38 [R] button.............................................................page 38 When the recording mode e [REC TRACK 2] button........................................page 27 [REC TRACK 1] button........................................page 27 r [LISTEN & LEARN] button..................................page 38 t [TIMING] button...................................................page 39 y [WAITING] button ................................................page 40 u [FUNCTION] button..................................... pages 60, 35 i [SONG] button............................................. pages 20, 35 o [STYLE] button............................................ pages 22, 35 !0 [VOICE] button ............................................ pages 12, 35 !1 Number buttons [0]-[9], [+/YES], [-/NO].............page 35 !2 [DEMO] button.....................................................page 21 !3 [METRONOME ON/OFF] button .........................page 18 When the Song mode !4 [A-B REPEAT] button..........................................page 43 !5 [REW] button .......................................................page 21 !6 [FF] button ...........................................................page 21 !9 [PAUSE] button....................................................page 21 ■ Front Panel Style List (page 83) q e w !4 !5 !6 !7 !8 Song List (page 21) When the Style mode !4 [ACMP ON/OFF] button ......................................page 23 !5 [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button................................page 53 !6 [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button...................................page 53 !9 [SYNC START] button.........................................page 23 !7 [TEMPO/TAP] button...........................................page 50 !8 [REC] button........................................................page 25 @0 [START/STOP] button .........................................page 34 @1 [PORTABLE GRAND] button..............................page 15 @2 [SOUND EFFECT KIT] button.............................page 17 @3 [REVERB ON/OFF] button..................................page 45 @4 [SPLIT ON/OFF] button.......................................page 14 @5 [DUAL ON/OFF] button .......................................page 13 @6 [HARMONY ON/OFF] button ..............................page 44 @7 [TOUCH ON/OFF] button ....................................page 47 @8 [PITCH BEND] wheel...........................................page 32 @9 [ORIENTAL SCALE] buttons ..............................page 29 ■ Rear Panel #0 MIDI IN/OUT terminals ........................................page 62 #1 SUSTAIN jack.........................................................page 9 #2 PHONES/OUTPUT jack .........................................page 9 #3 DC IN 12V jack.......................................................page 8 10 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 8 Panel Controls and Terminals Display (page 36) Voice List (page 72) !2 t 001 GrandPno 001 y !9 !1 u r i o !3 !0 @1 @0 001 @2 @3 @4 @5 @6 @7 GrandPno 001 @9 @8 ■ Rear Panel #0 #1 #2 #3 9 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 11 Step — Quick Guide — 1 Changing the Voices Try playing a variety of instrument Voices In addition to the piano Voice, a wide variety of other instrument Voices can be selected and played, including guitar, trumpet and flute. The Voice selected here becomes the Main Voice. 1 Press the [VOICE] button. The Voice number and name are displayed. Voice number 001 Voice name GrandPno 001 2 Select a Voice. Select the desired Voice by using the number buttons [0]-[9], [+], [-]. Refer to the Voice List on page 72. 084 3 Appears when the Voice mode. Flute The Voice shown here becomes the Main Voice for the instrument. Play the keyboard. Try selecting and playing different Voices. PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 10 12 Playing Two Voices Simultaneously—Dual Quick Guide You can select a second Voice which will play in addition to the Main Voice selected on the previous page. This second Voice is known as the Dual Voice. Two Voices sound at the same time Step 1 Changing the Voices Play the Dual Voice Press the [DUAL ON/OFF] button to turn the Dual function on. When Dual is on, you can play a Dual Voice in a layer with the Main Voice. To turn the Dual Voice off and play only the Main Voice, press the [DUAL ON/OFF] button again. Appears when Dual is on. 084 Flute 001 Selecting a Dual Voice The best-suited Dual Voice is automatically selected whenever you turn Dual on, but you can select any of the available Dual Voices. 1 Press and hold the [DUAL ON/OFF] button for longer than a second. “D. Voice” appears in the display for a few seconds, then the Dual Voice will appear. Currently selected Dual Voice 102 Marimba NOTE • You can also access the Dual Voice setting display by pressing the [FUNCTION] button several times, then selecting Dual Voice. 001 2 Hold for longer than a second. Select a Dual Voice. Select the desired Dual Voice by using the number buttons [0][9], [+], [-]. Refer to the Voice List on page 72. 11 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 13 Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands—Split In the Split mode you can play different Voices to the left and right of the keyboard “Split Point.” The main and Dual Voices can be played to the right of the Split Point, while the Voice played to the left of the Split Point is known as the “Split Voice” Split Point Main Voice and Dual Voice Split Voice Play the Split Voice Press the [SPLIT ON/OFF] button to turn the Split function on. When Split is on you can play a Split Voice to the left of the Split Point. When you don’t want to play a Split Voice, press the [SPLIT ON/ OFF] button to turn Split off. Appears when Split is on. 059 Choir NOTE 001 • The Split Point setting can be changed as required (page 48). Select a Split Voice You can select a different Split Voice by following the procedure outlined below. 1 Press and hold the [SPLIT ON/OFF] button for longer than a second. “S. Voice” appears in the display for a few seconds, then the Split Voice will appear. The currently selected Split Voice 040 FngrBass NOTE • You can also access the Split Voice setting display by pressing the [FUNCTION] button several times, then selecting the Split Voice. 001 Hold for longer than a second. 2 Select the desired Split Voice by using the number buttons [0][9], [+], [-]. Refer to the Voice List on page 72. PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 12 14 Select a Split Voice Playing the Grand Piano Voice Quick Guide When you simply want to play a piano Voice, all you have to do is press one convenient button. Press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button. Step 1 Changing the Voices The Voice “Grand Piano 001” will automatically be selected as the Main Voice. Drum kits & Oriental Percussion kits Drum kits and oriental percussion kits are collections of drum and percussion instruments. When drum kits and oriental percussion kits (Voice number 109-121 or 518-523) are selected, you can play different percussion sounds directly from the keyboard. 1 Press the [VOICE] button. 2 Select the desired kit. Select one of the Voice numbers from 109-121 or 518-523 by using the number buttons [0]-[9], [+], [-]. Example: 109 Standard Kit 1 109 Std.Kit1 13 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 15 3 Try out each key. You’ll hear bongo drums, congas, maracas, and more—a comprehensive variety of drum and percussion sounds. Details on the instruments and key assignments of each kit can be found in the Drum Kit & Oriental Percussion Kit List on page 78. ● Drum Kit List 109 Standard Kit 1 116 Jazz Kit 110 Standard Kit 2 117 Brush Kit 111 Room Kit 118 Symphony Kit 112 Rock Kit 119 SFX Kit 1 113 Electronic Kit 120 SFX Kit 2 114 Analog Kit 121 Sound Effect Kit 115 Dance Kit ● Oriental Percussion Kit List Arabic Kit 521 Arabic Mix Kit 519 Khaligi Kit 522 Khaligi Mix Kit 520 Irani Kit 523 Irani Mix Kit PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 14 16 518 Step 2 — Quick Guide — Fun Sounds Quick Guide This instrument also includes a wide range of unique sound effects. Try out each key and enjoy the sounds! As you try out the various keys you’ll hear the sound of a dog barking, running water, a creaking door and many other unique effects. Step 2 Fun Sounds Press the [SOUND EFFECT KIT] button. Try out each key and enjoy the sounds. Don’t forget the black keys! You’ll be able to play various sound effects from the keyboard: barking, braying, yelling, and much more. Details on the instruments and key assignments of each sound effect kit can be found in the Drum Kit & Oriental Percussion Kit List on page 78. After trying out these sounds, press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button to reset the instrument Voice to the default setting of Voice “001 Grand Piano.” 15 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 17 Step — Quick Guide — 3 Play With The Metronome Start the metronome The instrument includes a metronome with adjustable tempo and time signature. Play and set the tempo that is most comfortable for you. Starting the metronome Turn the metronome on and start it by pressing the [METRONOME ON/ OFF] button. To stop the metronome, press the [METRONOME ON/OFF] button again. 001 GrandPno 1 1 Displays the current beat. Setting the metronome tempo 1 Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to display the tempo. Tempo value 090 2 Set the metronome tempo by using the number buttons [0]-[9], [+], [-]. The tempo can be adjusted between 32-280. PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 16 18 Tempo Setting the Metronome Time Signature 1 Quick Guide A chime will sound on the first beat of each measure, while a metronome click will sound on all others. You can also set the time signature to “00,” in which case the chime will not sound and the click sound will be heard on all beats. Press and hold the [METRONOME ON/OFF] button for longer than a second The time signature appears in the display. 04 Step 3 Play With The Metronome Time signature TimeSig Hold for longer than a second. 2 Set the time signature by using the number buttons [0]-[9], [+], [-]. The metronome can be set for time signatures of 0 to 15 beats. NOTE • The time signature cannot be changed for Songs and Styles, because each has a fixed time signature. Setting the Metronome Volume 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until “MetroVol” appears. 100 MetroVol Metronome Volume 2 Set the metronome volume by using the number buttons [0]-[9], [+], [-]. 17 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 19 Step — Quick Guide — 4 Playing Songs Select and Listen to a Specific Song This instrument has 35 built-in Songs. Listening to a Song 1 Press the [SONG] button. The Song number and name are displayed. Song number 001 Song name Appears when the Song mode is active. Arabic 001 2 3 Refer to the Song List on next page. 001-035 Built in Songs (see next page) 036-040 User Songs (Songs you record yourself). 041- Songs transferred from a computer on page 67 Press the [START/STOP] button. NOTE • You can play Songs recorded from the instrument or transferred from a computer. The procedure for playing these Songs is the same as that of the built-in Songs. The Song will begin playing. You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [START/ STOP] button. PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 18 20 Select the desired Song by using the number buttons [0]-[9], [+], [-]. Quick Guide ● Other Operations [REW] button ........... Fast-reverses the Song if pressed during playback (no sound is heard during fast reverse). Decreases the measure number if pressed while playback is stopped. [FF] button................ Fast-forwards the Song if pressed during playback. Increases the measure number if pressed while playback is stopped. Step 4 Playing Songs [PAUSE] button ........ Temporarily stops playback. Press this button a second time to resume playback from the point at which it was stopped. ● Using the [DEMO] button Press the [DEMO] button to play Songs 001, 002, 003, 004, 005 in sequence, and playback will continue repeatedly starting again from the first Song 001. You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [DEMO] or [START/ STOP] button. ● Song List No. Song Name DEMO 001* Arabic Demo 002* Khaligi Demo 003* Irani Demo 004* Greek Demo 005* Turkish Demo CLASSICAL MELODIES 006* Waltz (The Sleeping Beauty) (P. I. Tchaikovsky) 007* Air (Orchestral Suite) (J. S. Bach) 008* Minuetto/Boccherini (L. Boccherini) 009* Pizzicato Polka (J. Strauss II) 010* Romanze/Beethoven (L. v. Beethoven) 011* 012* 013* 014* 015* Sicilienne/Fauré (G. Fauré) Méditation (Thaïs) (J. Massenet) Grand March (Aida) (G. Verdi) Swan Lake (P. I. Tchaikovsky) Le Cygne (Le Carnaval des Animaux) (C. Saint-Saëns) PIANO SOLO 016 Für Elise (L. v. Beethoven) 017 Valse op.64-1 “Petit Chien” (F. Chopin) No. Song Name 018 Andante grazioso (Sonate K.331) (W. A. Mozart) 019 24 Preludes op.28-7 (F. Chopin) 020 Fröhlicher Landmann (Album für die Jugend) (R. Schumann) 021 Träumerei (Kinderszenen) (R. Schumann) 022 Thema (Impromptus D.935-3) (F. Schubert) 023 La Chevaleresque (J. F. Burgmüller) 024 Menuett BWV. Anh.116 (J. S. Bach) 025 Invention Nr.1 (J. S. Bach) 026 Londonderry Air (Traditional) 027 Twinkle Twinkle Little Star (Traditional) 028 Loch Lomond (Traditional) 029 Home Sweet Home (H. R. Bishop) 030 Nocturne op.9-2 (F. Chopin) 031 Etude op.10-3 “Chanson de L’adieu” (F. Chopin) 032 Menuett BWV. Anh.114 (J. S. Bach) 033 Piano Concerto No.21 2nd mov. (W. A. Mozart) 034 Romanze (Serenade K.525) (W. A. Mozart) 035 Ode to Joy (L. v. Beethoven) PIANO ENSEMBLE • Songs with an asterisk mark (*) are ones which do not have a left part. Therefore, the lesson is applicable only for the right hand. • Some of the classic and/or traditional songs have been edited for length or for ease in learning, and may not be exactly the same as the original. 19 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 21 Step — Quick Guide — 5 Play with a Style Selecting a rhythm of a Style The Style feature provides built-in backing and rhythm parts in 135 different musical styles, covering a wide variety of musical categories, including rock, blues, techno and much more. You can also load commercially available Style Files to the instrument. To do this load the Style files from computer, and then register a style data to Style number 136. (Refer to the information on transferring data on page 67 and registering Styles on page 61.) Here’s how to play a rhythm of a Style. The rhythm sound consists of percussion instruments. ● STYLE FILE The Style File Format “SFF” is Yamaha’s original style file format which uses a unique conversion system to provide high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord types. 1 Press the [STYLE] button. The Style number and name are displayed. Style number 001 Style name 8BtModrn 001 2 Select a Style. Select the desired Style by using the number buttons [0]-[9], [+], [-]. Refer to the Style List on page 83. 016 3 Swing H Press the [START/STOP] button. The Style rhythm will start. You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [START/ STOP] button. PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 20 22 Appears when the Style mode is active. Playing with a Style Press the [STYLE] button and then select a Style. Turn auto accompaniment on. Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button. Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button again to turn the auto accompaniment off. 001 Step 5 Play with a Style 1 2 Quick Guide On the previous page, you’ve learned how to select your favorite rhythm of a Style. Here, you’ll learn how to expand on that rhythm with bass and chord backing, and use all of it as your accompaniment as you play. 8BtModrn 001 Appears when auto accompaniment is on ● When auto accompaniment is on ... NOTE The keys to the left of the Split Point (54; F#2) will play only chords. This is known as the “Auto Accompaniment range.” • You can change the Split Point. Refer to “Setting the Split Point” on page 48. Split Point (54; F#2) Auto Accompaniment range 3 Turn SYNC START on. Press the [SYNC START] button. 001 8BtModrn 001 Flashes when Sync Start is on. When the Sync Start standby mode is engaged, Style playback will begin as soon as you play a chord in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. You can turn off Sync Start standby mode by pressing the [SYNC START] button. 21 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 23 4 The Style will begin playing as soon as you play a chord in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. Not sure how to play chords? No problem! This instrument is capable of playing chords even if you only play one key. Try playing one, two or three keys (any notes will do) in the auto accompaniment range of the keyboard. Different keys will produce different results. Refer to page 56 for detailed instructions for playing chords. Split Point Auto Accompaniment range 5 Try playing other chords with your left hand and play a melody with your right hand. Split Point Auto Accompaniment range 6 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 22 24 You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button. Step — Quick Guide — 6 Recording Your Performance 1 Step 6 Record your own performance You can record up to five of your own performances as User Songs (User 1-5: Song numbers 036040). Think of each User Song as a kind of basket or drawer for storing your recording. Remember that you can also record a Style (containing chord changes) along with your own performance. Press the [REC] button. NOTE Flashes rEC • A total of approximately 10,000 notes or 5,500 chord changes can be recorded to the five User Songs. User 1 001 NOTE • Accompaniment cannot be turned on or off once the [REC] button is pressed. The lowest-numbered unrecorded User Song (Song numbers 036-040) available for recording is displayed. If you want to select the Song you will be recording, select the desired Song number by using the [+] and [-] buttons. After you’ve selected the desired User Song for recording, you can select a Style to be recorded as well. To do this, press the [STYLE] button and select the Style number while the ACMP indication is on. You can turn off the Record mode by pressing the [REC] button again ( and stop flashing). 2 Start recording. When you play the keyboard, recording will begin. CAUTION Split Point By playing keys to the left of the Split Point when the Auto Accompaniment is set to on, the Style starts sounding and is recorded with your performance. When Auto Accompaniment is set to off, only your keyboard performance is recorded. • If all User Songs (Song numbers 036-040) contain recorded data, Song 036 will automatically be selected. In this case, you will record over and erase any previous data in Song 036, so be careful that you won’t be erasing any material you want to keep! 23 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual Quick Guide Record your own performance 25 3 Stop recording. CAUTION Pressing the [START/STOP] button stops recording and writes the data to the User Song. (A “Writing!” message is shown.) To playback the newly recorded performance, press the [START/ STOP] button. ●In order to record with the Style, turn the Auto Accompaniment to on (see Steps 1-2 on page 23), and then record according to the instructions. (The “ACMP ON” lights.) ● In order to record only your performance, turn the Auto Accompaniment to off and record according to the normal steps. • Never attempt to turn the power off when a “Writing!” message is shown in the display. Doing so can damage the flash memory and result in a loss of data. CAUTION • Keep in mind that any kind of power failure during recording—such as the power being turned off, the AC adaptor being plugged/unplugged or the batteries running down— will result in data loss. NOTE (The “ACMP ON” is unlit.) • Use the Musicsoft Downloader to backup the User Songs to a computer (page 66). Recording to a specified track The User Songs are organized into two tracks: Track 1 and Track 2. You can specify the track you want to record to. About track recording If you start recording by specifying a track, the track will be overwritten (existing data in the track is deleted and replaced with the new recording). User Song Data that can be recorded to Track 2 Style playback* (including chord changes) or your own keyboard performance Data that can be recorded to Track 1 Your own keyboard performance only • You cannot record the metronome click, or the Transpose and Tuning settings. Recording to the specified track Only your keyboard performance can be recorded to Track 1. Either a Style or your performance can be recorded to Track 2, resulting in a User Song like that depicted below. User Song Track 2 • The settings and buttons below cannot be changed, or if changed, the new settings cannot be recorded if entered during the recording process. ACMP ON/OFF, split point, reverb type, chorus type, harmony type, [FUNCTION] button, [PORTABLE GRAND] button, [SOUND EFFECT KIT] button. User Song Track 1 Track 2 Track 1 Your own keyboard Your own keyboard Your own keyboard performance performance performance PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 24 26 • Record following the steps in the previous page, and your performance will be recorded to Track 1 and the Style (if you are playing one) will be recorded to Track 2. NOTE * When playing the Style Style NOTE Turn ACMP (auto accompaniment) on or off, depending on what you want to record. NOTE If you want to record Style playback, turn ACMP on. If you want to record only your own keyboard performance, turn ACMP off. 2 • Keep in mind that both Tracks 1 and 2 will be overwritten with new data if you record without specifying the tracks. Specify the track you want to record. Specify the track 2 when you want to record the Style. When you want to record your own keyboard performance, you can specify either track. ● Recording to Track 1 Press the [REC] button and [REC TRACK 1] button simultaneously. rEC • The both “L” and “R” flashes, this indicates that you have specified Track 1 when the Auto Accompaniment is on. If you want to record your own performance, press the [TRACK 2] button to stop the “L” flashing. If you want to record a Style, press the [REC] button to cancel the recording, and repeat the procedure from the beginning. User 1 001 Flashes when track 1 is selected for recording. Press simultaneously ● Recording to Track 2 Press the [REC] button and [REC TRACK 2] button simultaneously. rEC Flashes when track 2 is selected for recording. User 1 001 Press simultaneously 3 Lights when recorded data exists. Turns off when there is no recorded data, or when Mute is set to on (page 42) to turn off playback of the track. Press the [+], [-] buttons to select the User Song you want to record. rEC User 3 If you want to record Style playback to Track 2, press the [STYLE] button and select the desired Style. 4 Start recording Perform steps 2 and 3 on pages 25-26. By playing keys to the left of the Split Point when the Auto Accompaniment is set to on, the Style starts sounding and is recorded. Only your performance is recorded by playing the keyboard (any key is OK) when the Auto Accompaniment is set to off. NOTE • You can record a new track while listening to a previously recorded track (the track indication will appear). You can also mute recorded tracks (the track will disappear) while recording a new track by pressing the desired track button. 25 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 27 Step 6 Record your own performance 1 Quick Guide Specifying track recording Deleting User Songs Deleting an entire User Song NOTE • You cannot delete a specific track from a User Song. 1 Press the [SONG] button and select the User Song you want to delete by using the number buttons [0]-[9], [+], [-]. 036 2 User 1 Press and hold the [REC] button for longer than a second. The Song Delete display appears. YEs ClrUser1 Hold for longer than a second. You can cancel the delete operation by pressing the [-/NO] button. 3 Press the [+/YES] button. A confirmation message will appear on the display. YEs Sure? You can cancel the delete operation by pressing the [-/NO] button. 4 Press the [+/YES] button to delete the Song. “Writing!” message will appear while the track is being deleted. Writing! PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 26 28 Step 7 Using Oriental Scales Quick Guide The Oriental Scales feature lets you simply and easily raise or lower the pitches of specific notes and create your own scales. You can change the scale settings at any time-even when you are playing. Up to four scale settings can be stored for instant recall, whenever you need them. Step 7 Using Oriental Scales Setting an Oriental Scale—Scale Setting The ORIENTAL SCALE [SETTING] buttons, located at the top left side of the panel, simulate a one-octave keyboard (C through B). Pressing each button turns the Scale Setting feature of the specific note on/off. The Scale Setting feature affects all the notes having the same note name in all octave registers. When this is set to on (the indicator above the selected button is lit), you can play the keyboard in the Oriental scale. The default scale setting (tuning) for each note is -50 cents. You can also adjust the scale tuning by 1 cent as follows. NOTE • The Scale Setting function is always turned off, whenever the power switch is turned on. • Scale tunings are not effective for song playback, Split Voices or keyboard percussion. Adjusting the Scale Tuning 1 Call up the Scale Tuning function by pressing and holding the desired “note” button (C-B) in the Scale Tuning section for longer than a second. NOTE Current cent value 00 Tune D • You can also access the Scale Setting display by pressing the [FUNCTION] button several times. Hold for longer than a second. 2 Adjust the Scale Tuning. Use the [+]/[-] or number buttons to adjust the desired tuning. The range is from “-64” to “63” cents (one cent is one hundredth of a semitone). 27 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 29 ● Using the [+] and [-] buttons: Press the [+] or [-] button, repeatedly if necessary, until the desired pitch value appears in the display. Or press and hold the [+] or [-] button, until the desired pitch value appears in the display. NOTE • Press the [-] and [+] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the value to its default setting (0 cents). ● Negative values: You can also enter negative values directly, by simultaneously holding down the [-] button and using the number buttons. 3 Adjust other notes as desired. To do this, simply repeat steps 1-2 above. Registering the Scale settings Scale settings and on/off settings are memorized by the Scale Memory function. 1 2 Set the scale tuning of each note. While holding the ORIENTAL SCALE [MEMORY] button, press one of the [MEMORY 1-4] buttons. The indicator of the selected button will light to indicate that the data has been stored. CAUTION • Never attempt to turn the power off when a “Writing!” message is shown in the display. Doing so can damage the flash memory and result in a loss of data. NOTE • The Scale Memory data is retained in memory even when the power is turned off. PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 28 30 Recall the Scale settings Quick Guide The scale settings stored to a SCALE MEMORY button can be recalled at any time simply by pressing the appropriate button. Step 7 Using Oriental Scales Scale Memory can be turned off by pressing the currently lit [MEMORY 1-4] button. The indicator goes out and the PSR-A300 returns to the regular scale setting. Set the Accompaniment Tuning on You can select whether Scale Tuning is applied to accompaniment or not. Press the [FUNCTION] button, repeatedly if necessary, until “TuneAcc” appears on the display, then turn it on or off by using the [+]/[-] buttons. oFF TuneAcc Current setting 29 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 31 Step 8 Play with the Pitch Bend Wheel Adding pitch variations with the Pitch Bend Wheel The [PITCH BEND] wheel can be used to add smooth pitch variations to notes you play on the keyboard. Roll the wheel upward to raise the pitch, or downward to lower the pitch. When you release the wheel it will automatically return to center position and the keyboard pitch will return to normal. Adjust the pitch bend range The range of the pitch bend wheel can be adjusted in semitone increments. When the pitch bend range is set to “2,” for example, rolling the wheel all the way up will produce a maximum pitch rise of 2 semitones (one whole tone), and rolling it all the way down will produce a maximum pitch drop of the same amount (2 semitones or one whole tone). With the highest possible pitch bend range setting of “12,” the pitch bend range becomes +/-1 octave. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until “PBRange” appears. Currently Pitch Bend range 12 2 PBRange Use the number buttons [0]-[9], [+], [-] to set the Pitch Bend range as required. PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 30 32 Pitch Bend range Backup and Initialization Backup Some internal parameters will revert to their default values if not saved before the power is turned off. In order to backup these parameters press and hold the [FUNCTION] button for longer than a second. Hold for longer than a second. ● Parameters that are saved in backup: • User Songs* • Loaded Styles* • Touch Response on/off setting • Scale Memory • The following Function settings: Tuning, Scale Tune, Accompaniment Tuning ON/OFF, Pitch Bend Range, Split Point, Touch Sensitivity, Style Volume, Song Volume, Metronome Volume, Demo Cancel, Panel Sustain * The User Songs and loaded Styles are automatically backed up when recording is completed, ensuring that the data is not deleted even when you fail to backup. Initialization This function erases all backup data in the instrument’s flash memory and restores the initial default settings. The following initialization procedures are provided. Backup Clear To clear data backed up to the internal flash memory (described above), turn the power on by pressing the [STANDBY/ON] switch while holding the highest white key on the keyboard. The backed up data will be erased and the default values restored. CAUTION • When you execute the Backup Clear operation, backup parameters will be cleared. You can save the backup parameters (containing the five User Songs) by using Musicsoft Downloader to transfer them to a computer. Refer to the section “Transferring a user file from the PSR-A300 to a computer” on page 67. Flash Clear To clear Song data and Style data that has been transferred to the internal flash memory from a computer, simultaneously hold down the highest white key and the three highest black keys on the keyboard and turn the power on by pressing the [STANDBY/ON] switch. CAUTION • When you execute the Flash Clear operation, Song data you have purchased and downloaded will also be cleared. Make sure to save your important data by transferring to a computer using Musicsoft Downloader (page 67). 31 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 33 Basic Operation and Displays Basic Operation Turning the power on Turn down the volume by turning the [MASTER VOLUME] control to the left and press the [STANDBY/ON] switch to turn on the power. Press the [STANDBY/ON] switch again to turn the power OFF. Adjusting the volume Turn the [MASTER VOLUME] dial. Rotate clockwise to increase the volume. Rotate counterclockwise to lower the volume. 001 GrandPno 001 About the [START/STOP] button Press the [START/STOP] button after pressing the [SONG] or [STYLE] button to start playback of the selected Song or Style (rhythm). The “Press & Hold” symbol that appears next to some buttons indicates that the button can be pressed and held for longer than a second to call up a related or different function. PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 32 34 The “Press & Hold” Symbol Basic Operation and Displays Press a button to select a basic function Press the [SONG] button to select a Song. Press the [STYLE] button to select a Style. When you select a basic function, the name and number of the currently selected Song, Style and Voice is shown. From this display, you can select the desired Song, Style or Voice. Press the [VOICE] button to select a Voice. Set the number or value ● Number buttons [0]-[9] The number buttons can be used to directly enter a Song, Style or Voice number or parameter value. For numbers that start with one or two zeroes, the first zeroes can be omitted Example: Selecting Voice 002, Bright Piano. 002 BritePno Press number buttons [0], [0], [2]. Function Settings (page 60) The [FUNCTION] button contains 47 settings. Each time you press the [FUNCTION] button, the setting item is selected in sequence, and the value of the selected item can be changed in the display. ● [+], [-] buttons Press the [+] button briefly to increase the value by 1, or press the [-] button briefly to decrease the value by 1. Press and hold either button to continuously increase or decrease the value in the corresponding direction. Press briefly to decrease. Press briefly to increase. 33 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 35 Basic Operation and Displays Display The Main display shows all of the current basic settings for Song, Style and Voice. It also includes a range of indicators that show the on/off status for various functions. Song/recording track display Notation Displays the melody and chord notes of a Song when the Song lesson function is in use, or the notes of chords you specify when the Dictionary function is in use. At other times the notes you play on the keyboard are displayed. Information related to the Song/recording tracks is shown here. (See pages 25 and 42.) Lit: Track contains data Unlit: Track is muted or contains no data Flashing: Track is selected as recording track Measure Indicates the current measure during playback of a Song. NOTE • Any notes occurring below or above the staff are indicated by “8va” in the notation. • For a few specific chords, not all notes may be shown in the notation section of the display. This is due to space limitations in the display. 001 003 Beat Display Indicates the beat of the current Style or Song with flashing arrows. GrandPno 003 Chord Display Indicates the name of the chord currently being played back, or the name of the chord being played on the keyboard. ACMP ON Appears when the auto accompaniment is on. Keyboard Display Indicates notes currently being played. Indicates the melody and chord notes of a Song when the Song lesson function is in use. Also indicates the notes of a chord—either when playing a chord or when using the Dictionary function. HARMONY Appears when the Harmony function is on (page 44). SPLIT Appears when the Split function is on (page 14). REVERB Appears when Reverb is on (page 45). TOUCH RESPONSE Appears when Touch Response is on (page 47). PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 34 36 DUAL Appears when the Dual function is on (page 13). Song Lesson Yamaha Education Suite 5 You can select any Song you like and use it for a left-hand, right-hand, or both-hands lesson. Song Lesson lets you learn how to play Songs in three easy steps. Songs that can be used with the Lesson feature include Songs transferred from a computer to flash memory (SMF Format 0 only; see page 65). The procedure for transferring songs are described on page 67. ■ Lesson Flow Select a Song for your lesson. Select the part you want to practice. Select the practice method. Start the Lesson! ■ The practice methods: Lesson 1 (Listen & Learn) ........ Listen and learn the melody or rhythm of a selected Song. Lesson 2 (Timing) ...................... Learn to play the notes at the correct timing along with the Song. Lesson 3 (Waiting) ..................... Learn to play the correct notes. Lesson 1 (Listen & Learn) There’s no need to play the keyboard in Lesson 1. The model melody/chords (in other words, the musical material you should learn) of the part you selected will sound. Listen to it carefully and learn it well. 1 NOTE • User Songs cannot be used for the lesson. NOTE Select the desired Song for your lesson. Press the [SONG] button, and then select a Song (referring to the Song list on page 21) by using the number buttons [0]-[9], [+] and [-]. If you want to practice a Song you’ve transferred from a computer, select one of the Songs beginning from Song number 041. 023 • You cannot select the part during Song playback before Lesson 1 starts. If a Song is currently being played back, stop the Song first, then continue from Step 2. Chevaler 001 The instrument includes 35 built in Songs. Some Songs (as shown below) are intended for use as right-hand lessons, and cannot be used for left-hand or both-hands lessons. ● Songs for right-hand lesson Song numbers: 001-015 35 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 37 Song Lesson 2 Select the part you want to practice. Press the [R] button for a right-hand lesson, [L] button for a left-hand lesson, or press both the [R] and [L] buttons simultaneously for a bothhands lesson. The selected part is displayed. Left-hand lesson Right-hand lesson Left Right Both-hands lesson BothHand A “No LPart” message is shown in the display if you select the left part in one of the Songs 001-015, which do not have left part data. These Songs cannot be used for left-hand or both-hands lessons. NOTE • For songs transferred from a computer, the “No LPart” indication does not appear, even when there is no left hand part in the song. No LPart 3 Start Lesson 1. Press the [LISTEN & LEARN] button to start Lesson 1. The melody of the part you selected in Step 2 will sound. Listen to it carefully and learn it well. r1 LISTEN 011 The notation and key positions of the model melody are shown in the display. 4 • When the melody Voice of the Song is changed, the key position shown in the display may be shifted (in octave units), depending on the Voice selected (page 41). • You can select Lessons 1-3 by pressing the [LISTEN & LEARN], [TIMING] and [WAITING] buttons, respectively. PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 36 38 Stop the Lesson mode. You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/ STOP] button. NOTE • Even after Lesson 1 has started and the Song is playing, you can still select the part. Song Lesson Lesson 2 (Timing) In this lesson, try playing the notes with the correct timing. Simply concentrate on playing each note in time with the rhythmic accompaniment. The correct notes sound even if you play wrong notes as long as you play in time with the rhythm. 1 Select a Song for your lesson. • You cannot use Dual or Split Voices during lessons. • The Split Point is fixed and it cannot be changed. For the left-hand lesson, it is fixed at 59 or B2; for the left-hand chord lesson, it is fixed at 54 or F#2. NOTE • You cannot select the part during Song playback before Lesson 2 starts. If a Song is currently being played back, stop the Song first, then continue from Step 2. 2 Select the part you want to practice. 3 Start Lesson 2. Press the [TIMING] button to start Lesson 2. r2 NOTE NOTE • Even after Lesson 2 has started and the Song is playing, you can still select the part. TIMING 004 Play the notes shown in the display. In Lesson 2, simply play each note in time with the music. 4 Stop the Lesson mode. You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button. Grade When the lesson Song has played all the way through in Lesson mode 2 or 3, your performance will be evaluated in four levels: OK, Good, Very Good, or Excellent. OK Good Very0Good Excellent 37 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 39 Song Lesson Lesson 3 (Waiting) In this mode, try playing the correct notes. The notes you should play appear in the score and the keyboard on the display. The Song pauses until you play the right note. 1 Select a Song for your lesson. NOTE 2 Select the part you want to practice. 3 Start Lesson 3. Press the [WAITING] button to start Lesson 3. r3 WAITING • You cannot select the part during Song playback before Lesson 3 starts. If a Song is currently being played back, stop the Song first, then continue from Step 2. NOTE • Even after Lesson 3 has started and the Song is playing, you can still select the part. Play the notes shown in the display. Try playing the correct notes. 4 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 38 40 Stop the Lesson mode. You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/ STOP] button. Song settings Changing the Melody Voice You can change a Song’s melody Voice to any other Voice you prefer. NOTE • You cannot change the melody Voice of a User Song. 1 Select the Song and play it. Refer to the section “Playing Songs” on page 20. 2 Select a desired Voice by using the number buttons [0][9], [+], [-]. 003 HnkyTonk 001 The selected Voice sounds when you play the keyboard. If a Song has played through and stopped during this procedure, press the [START/STOP] button to start playback again. 3 Press and hold the [VOICE] button for longer than a second. “SONG MELODY VOICE” appears in the display for a few seconds, indicating that the Voice selected in Step 2 has replaced the Song’s original melody Voice. Hold for longer than a second. Song Volume This procedure allows you to adjust the balance between Song playback and the notes you play on the keyboard by setting the volume of the playback sound. 1 Press the [SONG] button. 39 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 41 Song settings 2 Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until “SongVol” appears. Current Song Volume 100 3 Song Volume SongVol Set the Song Volume by pressing the number buttons [0][9], [+], [-]. NOTE • Press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the value to its default setting (100). Mute You can mute Track 1 or Track 2 during Song playback. • Track 1 can be muted by pressing the [REC TRACK 1] button during Song playback. • Track 2 can be muted by pressing the [REC TRACK 2] button during Song playback. You can cancel the mute function by pressing the corresponding track buttons, [TRACK 1] or [TRACK 2] again during Song playback, or by selecting any other Song. 001 Arabic 010 Pressing one of the Track buttons [TRACK 1] or [TRACK 2] will mute the corresponding track during Song playback. Unlit—track is muted or contains no data. PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 40 42 Lit—track contains data. Song settings Practice Makes Perfect You can repeatedly practice a section you find difficult. This function lets you specify a section of a Song you want to practice—“A” is the start point and “B” is the end point—for repeat playback. A B Repeat playback of this section 1 Play the Song and press the [A-B REPEAT] button at the beginning of the section you want to repeat (the “A” point). “A-REPEAT” will be displayed. A- 2 REPEAT Press the [A-B REPEAT] button a second time at the end of the section you want to repeat (the “B” point). The specified A-B section of the Song will now play repeatedly, letting you practice the section over and over. A-b • The repeat start and end points can be specified in one-measure increments. • You can also set the A-B Repeat function when the Song is stopped. Simply use the [REW] and [FF] buttons to select the desired measures, pressing the [AB REPEAT] button for each point, then start playback. • If you want to set the start point “A” at the very beginning of the Song press the [A-B REPEAT] button before starting playback of the Song. REPEAT You can stop repeat playback by pressing the [A-B REPEAT] button. The A-B REPEAT mode will be canceled and normal playback of the Song will continue. oFF NOTE NOTE • The A-B Repeat function will be canceled when you select another Song or Style mode. REPEAT 41 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 43 Play With a Variety of Effects Adding Harmony This feature adds harmony notes as well as tremolo or echo effects to the Main Voice. 1 Press the [HARMONY] button to turn harmony on. When you don’t want to add harmony notes, press the [HARMONY ON/OFF] button again to turn Harmony off. Appears when harmony is on. 2 Press and hold the [HARMONY ON/OFF] button for longer than a second. “HarmType” appears in the display for a few seconds, followed by the Harmony Type. Currently selected Harmony type 02 NOTE • When you press the [HARMONY ON/OFF] button to turn this feature on, the appropriate Harmony type for the currently selected Main Voice is automatically selected. NOTE • You can also access the Harmony Type setting display by pressing the [FUNCTION] button several times. • Harmony will be turned off if the Chord Dictionary function is used. Trio Hold for longer than a second. 3 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 42 44 Select a desired Harmony Type by using the number buttons [0]-[9], [+], [-]. Refer to the Harmony Type list on page 84. Try playing the keyboard with the harmony function. The effect and operation of each Harmony Type is different—refer to the section “How to sound each Harmony Type” on the next page as well as the Harmony Type List for details. Play With a Variety of Effects NOTE ● How to sound each Harmony Type • Harmony type 01-05 • The harmony notes can be added only to the Main Voice, not to Dual or Split Voices. • Harmony type 13-19 (Tremolo) Press the right-hand keys while playing chords in the auto accompaniment range of the keyboard when the Auto Accompaniment is on (page 23). • The keys left of the Split Point of the keyboard produce no harmony notes when the auto accompaniment is on (ACMP ON is lit). Keep holding down the keys. • Harmony type 20-26 (Echo) • Harmony type 06-12 (Trill) Keep holding down the keys. Hold down two keys. You can adjust the Harmony Volume in the Function Settings (page 60). Adding Reverb Reverb adds the ambience of a room or concert hall to the sound that you play on the keyboard. To add Reverb Press the [REVERB ON/OFF] button to turn Reverb on. Reverb is normally on. You can check how the selected Reverb Type sounds by playing the keyboard. To turn Reverb off, press the [REVERB ON/OFF] button again. Appears when Reverb is on. Select a Reverb Type The ideal type is automatically selected whenever you select a Song or Style, but you can select any of the available Reverb Types. 1 Press and hold the [REVERB ON/OFF] button for longer than a second. “REVERB” appears in the display for a few seconds, followed by the Reverb Type. 02 Hall2 Currently selected Reverb Type Hold for longer than a second. 43 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 45 Play With a Variety of Effects 2 Select the desired Reverb Type by using the number buttons [0]-[9], [+], [-]. Refer to the Reverb Type list on page 85 for details. You can adjust the Reverb depth in the Function Settings (Reverb Level on page 60). NOTE • You can also access the Reverb Type setting display by pressing the [FUNCTION] button several times. Adding Chorus This effect makes the Voice sound richer, warmer and more spacious. The best-suited Chorus type is automatically selected whenever you select a Voice; however, you can select any of the available types. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until the “Chorus” appears. “Chorus” appears in the display for a few seconds, followed by the Chorus Type. 1 2 Chorus1 Currently selected Chorus Type Select a desired Chorus Type by using the number buttons [0]-[9], [+], [-]. Refer to the Chorus Type list on page 85 for details. You can adjust the Chorus depth independently for the Main, Dual and Split Voices in the Function Settings (page 60). Adding Panel Sustain This function adds a fixed sustain to the keyboard Voices. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until the “Sustain” item appears. oFF Sustain Current setting 2 Press the [+] button to turn the Panel Sustain on. Panel Sustain will be added to the notes you play on the keyboard when the Panel Sustain is on. To turn it off, press the [-] button. on Sustain NOTE • See the section “Connecting a footswitch (SUSTAIN Jack)” on page 9 for information on applying sustain with the optional footswitch. On PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 44 46 Handy Performance Features Touch Response Sensitivity Touch Response Appears when Touch Response is on. NOTE • The Touch Response function cannot be used for some Voices (such as organ), even if the Touch Response icon appears in the display. Press the [TOUCH ON/OFF] button to turn Touch Response on. When Touch Response is on, you can control the volume of notes according to how hard you play the keys. Touch Response is normally on. Press the [TOUCH ON/OFF] button again to turn the Touch Response off. When Touch Response is off, the same volume will be produced no matter how hard you play the keys. Setting the Touch Sensitivity When Touch Response is on, you can adjust the sensitivity of the keyboard in response to keyboard dynamics in three steps. Higher values produce greater (easier) volume variation in response to keyboard dynamics—in other words, greater sensitivity. 1 Press and hold the [TOUCH ON/OFF] button for longer than a second. “TouchSns” appears in the display for a few seconds, followed by the current Touch Sensitivity value. Currently selected Touch Sensitivity 2 Medium Hold for longer than a second. 2 Select a Touch Sensitivity setting between 1 and 3 by using the number buttons [0]-[9], [+], [-]. 45 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 47 Handy Performance Features Setting the Split Point The Split Point setting can be changed as desired. Split Point—default setting: 54 (F#2) 36 48 60 72 84 96 The initial default Split Point is key number 54 (the F#2 key), but you can change it to another key. When you change the Split Point, the auto accompaniment range also changes. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until “SplitPnt” appears. Currently selected Split Point 054 Split Point SplitPnt 001 NOTE 2 Split Point Set the Split Point by using the number buttons [0]-[9], [+], [-]. • Press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the value to its default setting (54 or F#2). Transpose The overall pitch of the instrument can be shifted up or down by a maximum of 1 octave in semitone increments. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until the “Transpos” appears. Current transpose value 00 Transpos NOTE 2 Use the number buttons [0]-[9], [+], [-] to set the Transpose value between -12 and +12 as required. • The pitch of the Drum and Oriental Percussin Kits Voices (Voice numbers 109121, 518-523) cannot be changed. • Press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the value to its default setting (00). PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 46 48 Handy Performance Features Tuning You can fine tune the pitch of the entire instrument. The overall tuning of the instrument can be shifted up or down by a maximum of 100 cents in 1cent increments (100 cents = 1 semitone). 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until “Tuning” appears. Currently tuning value 000 2 Tuning Use the number buttons [0]-[9], [+] and [-] to set the Tuning value between -100 and +100 as required. NOTE • The pitch of the Drum and Oriental Percussin Kits Voices (Voice numbers 109121, 518-523) cannot be changed. • Press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the value to its default setting (000). One Touch Setting Sometimes selecting the ideal Voice to play with a Song or Style can be confusing. The One Touch Setting feature automatically selects the most suitable Voice for you when you select a Style or Song. Simply select Voice number “000” to activate this feature. 1 Press the [VOICE] button, and then select Voice number “000” by using the number buttons [0]-[9], [+], [-]. Appears when One Touch Setting is on. 000 SprnoSax This turns the One Touch Setting feature on. One Touch Setting will be turned off if you select any other Voice number. 47 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 49 Handy Performance Features Changing the tempo of the Song/Style Songs and Styles can be played at any tempo you desire—fast or slow. 1 Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up the Tempo setting in the display after selecting a Style/Song. Current Tempo value 116 2 Tempo Set the Tempo by using the number buttons [0]-[9], [+], [-]. You can also set the Tempo by simply tapping the [TEMPO/TAP] button at the required tempo—four times for time signatures in 4, and three times for time signatures in 3. You can change the Tempo during Style/Song playback by pressing the [TEMPO/TAP] button just twice. NOTE • Press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the value to the default tempo of a Style or Song. Adjusting the Voice Parameters The volume, octave (the pitch of the instrument can be shifted by up or down in octaves) and Chorus Send Level can be individually adjusted for the Main, Dual, and Split Voices. ● Main Voice Parameters (page 61) • Main Voice Volume • Main Voice Octave • Main Voice Chorus Send Level ● Dual Voice Parameters (page 61) • Dual Voice Volume • Dual Voice Octave • Dual Voice Chorus Send Level ● Split Voice Parameters (page 61) • Split Voice Volume • Split Voice Octave • Split Voice Chorus Send Level You can adjust each of the parameters above in the Function settings (page 60). PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 48 50 Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions Various ways to start and stop Style playback Starting Style playback The following three methods can be used to start Style playback. In all cases you will need to press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn auto accompaniment on before actually starting Style playback. Whichever method you choose, you can press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] before starting playback. To begin your performance, an introduction will play automatically, then will automatically switch to the MAIN section when finished. ■ Immediate Start Press the [START/STOP] button to begin rhythm-only playback of the selected Style. The bass and chords will begin playing as soon as you play a chord in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. Appears when the auto accompaniment is on Immediate Start ■ Chord Start Press the [SYNC START] button and the beat arrows will begin flashing, indicating that the Sync Start “standby” mode has been engaged. The bass and chords will begin playing as soon as you play a chord in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. Accompaniment range 001 GrandPno 001 Sync Start standby Style playback begins when you play a chord ■ Tap Start You can supply a count-in at any tempo you like to start playback. Simply tap the [TEMPO/TAP] button at any tempo—4 times for time signatures in 4, and 3 times for time signatures in 3—and the selected Style rhythm will begin playing at the tapped tempo. The bass and chords will begin playing as soon as you play a chord in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. Start at the tapped tempo 49 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 51 Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions Stopping Style playback The following three methods can be used to stop Style playback. ■ Immediate Stop Playback will stop as soon as you press the [START/STOP] button. Immediate Stop ■ Stop and Enter Sync Start Mode If you press the [SYNC START] button during Style playback, playback will stop immediately and the Sync Start standby mode will be engaged (beat arrows will flash). Stop immediately and enter the Sync Start mode 001 GrandPno 001 Sync Start standby ■ Play the Ending and Stop Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button to begin playing an ending section. Playback will stop when the ending has played all the way through. Stop after ending plays If you press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button a second time (while the ending is playing), the ending will play in ritardando (the tempo will gradually get slower). PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 50 52 Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions Pattern Variation (Sections) The instrument features a wide variety of Style “sections” (patterns) that allow you to vary the arrangement of the accompaniment to match the Song you are playing. Intro Main A/B Ending Auto fill ● INTRO section This is used for the beginning of the Song When the intro finishes playing, accompaniment shifts to the main section. The length of the intro (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style. ● MAIN section This is used for playing the main part of the Song. It plays a main accompaniment pattern, and repeats indefinitely until another section’s button is pressed. There are two variations on the basic pattern (A and B), and the Style playback sound changes harmonically based on the chords you play with your left hand. ● Fill-in section This is automatically added before changing the section A and B. ● ENDING section This is used for the ending of the Song. When the ending is finished, the auto accompaniment stops automatically. The length of the ending (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style. 1 2 Press the [STYLE] button and then select a Style. Turn auto accompaniment on. Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button. Appears when the auto accompaniment is on. 3 Turn SYNC START on. Press the [SYNC START] button. 51 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 53 Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions 4 Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button. MAIN A The name of the selected section—MAIN A or MAIN B—will be displayed 5 Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. INTRO≥A 6 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the Intro of the selected Style starts. For this example, play a C major chord (as shown below). For information on how to enter chords, see “Playing Auto Accompaniment Chords” on page 56. Accompaniment range 7 Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button. FILL A≥B When the fill-in is finished, it leads smoothly into the selected main section A/B. 8 Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. ENDING This switches to the ending section. When the ending is finished, the auto accompaniment stops automatically. You can have the ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button again while the ending is playing back. PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 52 54 Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions Adjusting the Style Volume This procedure allows you to adjust the balance between Style playback and the notes you play on the keyboard by setting the volume of the playback sound. 1 2 Press the [STYLE] button. Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until the “StyleVol” appears. Current Style volume setting 100 3 Style Volume StyleVol Set the Style volume by using the number buttons [0]-[9], [+], [-]. NOTE • Press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the value to its default setting (100). 53 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 55 Playing Auto Accompaniment Chords You’ve learned in the section “Play with a Style (Accompaniment)” on page 22 that the “feel” of the Style changes every time you play a chord on the left-hand side of the keyboard. Here, you’ll learn the types of the chords and how to play them in greater detail. The examples of chords are given here in the key of C. There are two basic ways (below) you can play the chords on the left-hand side of the keyboard, while playing the Style (page 23) Split Point—default setting: 54 (F#2) ■ Easy Chords ■ Standard Chords 36 48 60 72 84 96 Easy Chords This method lets you easily play chords in the accompaniment range of the keyboard using only one, two, or three fingers. C Cm • To play a major chord Press the root note of the chord. C7 • To play a minor chord Press the root note together with the nearest black key to the left of it. Cm 7 • To play a seventh chord Press the root note together with the nearest white key to the left of it. NOTE • Root notes and the corresponding keys Accompaniment range • To play a minor seventh chord Press the root note together with the nearest white and black keys to the left of it (three keys altogether). Standard Chords This method lets you produce accompaniment by playing chords using normal fingerings in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. CmM 7 CmM 7 (9) ( ) ( ( C (b5) CM7 b5 Cm 7 (9) Cm 7 (11) ) CM 7 aug CM7 (#11) ( Caug ) Csus 4 CM 7 (9) CM 7 ) C6 ) C (9) ( C 6 (9) C Cm (9) Cm 6 Cm 7 Cm 7 b5 CmM 7 b5 Cdim Cdim 7 C7 C 7 (13) C 7 (#9) C 7 b5 C 7 aug C 7 sus4 ) ) ) ) ( ( ( ( ) ) C 7 (b13) ( ( ) ( ( ) ( C 7 (b9) ) ) ( ) ( C 7 (#11) C 7 (9) ( ( ) ) ( ) Cm C 1+2+5 * Notes enclosed in parentheses are optional; the chords will be recognized without them. PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 54 56 Playing Auto Accompaniment Chords ● Recognized Standard Chords Chart Chord Name/[Abbreviation] Normal Voicing Major [M] 1-3-5 Chord (C) C Display • Notes in parentheses can be omitted. C Add ninth [(9)] 1-2-3-5 C(9) C(9) Sixth [6] 1 - (3) - 5 - 6 C6 C6 Sixth ninth [6(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 6 C6(9) C6(9) * Major seventh [M7] 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 or 1 - (3) - 5 - 7 CM7 CM7 Major seventh ninth [M7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 CM7(9) CM7(9) * CM7(#11) CM7(#11)* 1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - 7 or Major seventh add sharp eleventh [M7(#11)] 1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - 7 • Playing two same root keys in the adjacent octaves produces accompaniment based only on the root. Flatted fifth [(b5)] 1 - 3 - b5 C(b5) Cb5 * Major seventh flatted fifth [M7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - 7 CM7b5 CM7b5 * Suspended fourth [sus4] 1-4-5 Csus4 Csus4 Augmented [aug] 1 - 3 - #5 Caug Caug Major seventh augmented [M7aug] 1 - (3) - #5 - 7 CM7aug CM7aug * Minor [m] 1 - b3 - 5 Cm Cm Minor add ninth [m(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - 5 Cm(9) Cm(9) Minor sixth [m6] 1 - b3 - 5 - 6 Cm6 Cm6 Minor seventh [m7] 1 - b3 - (5) - b7 Cm7 Cm7 Minor seventh ninth [m7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - b7 Cm7(9) Cm7(9) Minor seventh add eleventh [m7(11)] 1 - (2) - b3 - 4 - 5 - (b7) Cm7(11) Cm7(11) * Minor major seventh [mM7] 1 - b3 - (5) - 7 CmM7 CmM7 Minor major seventh ninth [mM7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - 7 CmM7(9) CmM7(9) * Minor seventh flatted fifth [m7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - b7 Cm7b5 Cm7b5 Minor major seventh flatted fifth [mM7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - 7 CmM7b5 CmM7b5 * Diminished [dim] 1 - b3 - b5 Cdim Cdim Diminished seventh [dim7] 1 - b3 - b5 - 6 Cdim7 Cdim7 Seventh [7] 1 - 3 - (5) - b7 or 1 - (3) - 5 - b7 C7 C7 Seventh flatted ninth [7(b9)] 1 - b2 - 3 - (5) - b7 C7(b9) C7(b9) Seventh add flatted thirteenth [7(b13)] 1 - 3 - 5 - b6 - b7 C7(b13) C7(b13) Seventh ninth [7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - b7 C7(9) C7(9) Seventh add sharp eleventh [7(#11)] 1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - b7 or 1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - b7 C7(#11) C7(#11) Seventh add thirteenth [7(13)] 1 - 3 - (5) - 6 - b7 C7(13) C7(13) Seventh sharp ninth [7(#9)] 1 - #2 - 3 - (5) - b7 C7(#9) C7(#9) Seventh flatted fifth [7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - b7 C7b5 C7b5 * Seventh augmented [7aug] 1 - 3 - #5 - b7 C7aug C7aug Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4] 1 - 4 - (5) - b7 C7sus4 C7sus4 One plus two plus five [1+2+5] 1-2-5 C1+2+5 C* NOTE • A perfect fifth (1+5) produces accompaniment based only on the root and fifth which can be used with both major and minor chords. • The chord fingerings listed are all in “root” position, but other inversions can be used—with the following exceptions: m7, m7b5, 6, m6, sus4, aug, dim7, 7b5, 6(9), 1+2+5 • Inversion of the 7sus4 and m7(11) chords are not recognized if the notes shown in parentheses are omitted. • The auto accompaniment will sometimes not change when related chords are played in sequence (e.g. some minor chords followed by the minor seventh). • Two-note fingerings will produce a chord based on the previously played chord. * These chords are not shown in the Chord Dictionary function. 55 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 57 Playing Auto Accompaniment Chords Looking up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary The Dictionary function is essentially a built-in “chord dictionary” that shows you the individual notes of chords. It is ideal when you know the name of a certain chord and want to quickly learn how to play it. 1 Press and hold the [WAITING] button for longer than a second. “Dict.” will appear in the display. Dict. Hold for longer than a second. 2 As an example, we’ll learn how to play a GM7 (G major seventh) chord. Press the “G” key in the root section of the keyboard. (The note doesn’t sound.) The root note you set is shown in the display. Keys for chord type dictionary C# D# Db Eb F# G# A# Gb Ab Bb Dict. C D E F G A B 3 Keys for root dictionary 001 NOTE Press the “M7” (major seventh) key in the chord section of the keyboard. (The note doesn’t sound.) The notes you should play for the specified chord (root note and chord type) are shown in the display, both as notation and in the keyboard diagram. • Major chords are usually indicated by the root name only. For example, the indication “C” in a score refers to a “C Major” chord. To look up the fingering for a major chord press the root key and then the M chord type key. Notation of chord mM7 m7(9) 7(b13) 7aug (9) m(9) m7b5 7(9) dim7 7sus4 Dict. 001 M M7 G m6 m 7 m7 7(#9) 7(#11) aug 7(b9) 7(13) dim sus4 Chord name (root and type) Individual notes of chord (keyboard) To call up possible inversions of the chord, press the [+]/[-] buttons. 4 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 56 58 Try playing a chord in the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard, checking the indications in the display. When you’ve played the chord properly, a bell sound signals your success and the chord name in the display flashes. Playing Auto Accompaniment Chords ■ About chords Playing two or more notes together simultaneously creates a “chord.” Playing a note together with two other notes spaced three notes (steps) apart—such as the notes C, E and G—creates a harmonious sound. Chords like these are called “triads” and they play an important role in most music. 3rd Root 3rd Taking the chord above as an example, the lowest note of this triad is called the “root note.” This is the central note sound, and it supports or anchors the rest of the notes chord. You’ll notice that the middle note of the chord above (E) is the third step in the succession of scale notes—C, D, then E. There are two types of “thirds” in chords: major thirds and minor thirds. Major third—four half steps from the root Minor third—three half steps from the root We’ll also alter the top note of our original chord and make three additional chords, as shown below. (The captions indicate the intervals between each of the notes.) ◆ Major chord ◆ Minor chord CM Minor 3rd ◆ Augmented chord Cm Major 3rd Major 3rd ◆ Diminished chord C aug Minor 3rd Major 3rd C dim Major 3rd Minor 3rd Minor 3rd The basic characteristics of the chord sound are same, no matter if we change the order of the notes from bottom to top, or if we add other same name notes in different octaves. Beautiful sounding harmonies can be built in this manner, and emotional music can be created by playing different chords one after the other according to commonly accepted rules. Harmony determines the nature of chords, and music is created based on harmony. ● Chord names From the chord name, you can tell at a glance what type of chord it is and which notes make up the chord. Understanding the basic structure of chords is very useful—once you’re familiar with this, you’ll be quickly and easily play chords by looking at the names that appear above the notation. Cm Root note Chord type ● Chord types (These chords are among those that can be recognized by the Fingered method.) Suspended 4 th 7 th C sus4 Perfect 5th C7 Perfect 4th Minor/major 7 th Flatted 7 th Minor chord Major chord Flatted 7 th Minor chord Major 7 th C 7sus4 C m7 Flatted 5 th Minor 7 th chord Major chord 7 th, suspended 4 th (b5) C7 7 th chord C M7 Minor 7 th, flatted 5 th (b5) Flatted 5 th Major 7 th C m7 7 th, flatted 5 th C mM7 Major 7th Minor 7 th Flatted 7 th Suspended 4 th chord 57 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 59 Function Settings The [FUNCTION] button gives you access to a variety of operations related to adjusting or enhancing the sound and making settings for connection to external devices. Select the item and change the value There are 47 different items that can be set. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until desired item appears. Each time the [FUNCTION] button is pressed 47 function items are displayed in sequence. The description and display sample is provided on the Function Setting List on page 60-61. 100 StyleVol Value Function item 2 Set the value by using the number buttons [0]-[9], [+], [-]. For on/off settings or the PC Mode setting, use [+]/[-] buttons. 3 If necessary, hold the [FUNCTION] button for longer than a second to save your settings to flash memory. (Refer to “Backup” on page 33) Writing! Hold for longer than a second. ● Function Setting List Display StyleVol Range/settings 000-127 000-127 -12–00–12 SongVol TransPos Tuning Pitch Bend Range Split Point Tuning PBRange SplitPnt -100–000–100 01-12 000-127 (C-2–G8) Touch Sensitivity TouchSns 1 (Soft) 2 (Medium) 3 (Hard) Description Determines the volume of the Style. Determines the volume of the Song. Determines the pitch of the instrument by semitone increments. Sets the pitch of the instrument’s sound in 1-cent increments. Determines the pitch bend range. Determines the highest key for the Split Voice and sets the Split “point”—in other words, the key that separates the Split (lower) and Main (upper) Voices. The Split Point setting and Accompaniment Split Point setting are automatically set to the same value. When Touch Response is on, this determines the sensitivity of the feature. PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 58 60 Item Style Volume Song Volume Transpose Function Settings Item Accompaniment Tuning Oriental Scales (Tune C - Tune B) Display TuneAcc Range/settings ON/OFF Tune C : Tune B M.Volume M.Octave M.Chorus -64–00–63 D.Voice D.Volume D.Octave D.Chorus 001-482 000-127 -2–0–2 000-127 S.Voice S.Volume S.Octave S.Chorus 001-482 000-127 -2–0–2 000-127 Reverb 01-10 Reverb Level RevLevel 000-127 Chorus Type Chorus 1-5 Panel Sustain Sustain ON/OFF Harmony Type HarmType 01-26 Harmony Volume HarmVol 000-127 Style Register StyleReg PC Mode PC0mode OFF/PC1/PC2 Local On/Off Local ON/OFF External Clock ExtClock ON/OFF Initial Setup Send InitSend YES/NO Time Signature Metronome Volume Lesson Track (R) TimeSig MetroVol R-Part 00-15 000-127 01-16 Lesson Track (L) L-Part 01-16 Demo Cancel D-Cancel ON/OFF Main Voice Volume Main Voice Octave Main Voice Chorus Send Level Dual Voice Dual Voice Volume Dual Voice Octave Dual Voice Chorus Send Level Split Voice Split Voice Volume Split Voice Octave Split Voice Chorus Send Level Reverb Type 000-127 -2–0–2 000-127 Description Determines whether Scale Tuning is applied to the accompaniment or not. Use the [+] button to turn it on (apply it to the accompaniment) and [-] to turn it off. Determines the pitch of each note. Determines the volume of the Main Voice. Determines the octave range for the Main Voice. Determines how much of the Main Voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. Selects the Dual Voice. Determines the volume of the Dual Voice. Determines the octave range for the Dual Voice. Determines how much of the Dual Voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. Selects the Split Voice. Determines the volume of the Split Voice. Determines the octave range for the Split Voice. Determines how much of the Split Voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. Determines the Reverb type, including off (10). Refer to the Reverb Type list on page 85. Determines how much of the Voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect. Determines the Chorus Type, including off (05). Refer to the Chorus Type list on page 85. Determines whether or not Panel Sustain is always applied to the Main/Dual/Split Voices. Panel Sustain is applied continuously when ON, or not applied when OFF. Determines the Harmony Type. Refer to the Harmony Type list on page 84. Determines the volume of the Harmony effect when Harmony type 1-5 is selected. Select and register a style file from flash files that are loaded from computer. Select a style file by using [+]/[-] button, and then register it by using [0] button. The selected Style will automatically be registered as Style number 136. Optimizes the MIDI settings when you connect to a computer (page 64). Determines whether the instrument’s keyboard controls the internal tone generator (ON) or not (OFF). Determines whether the instrument synchronizes to the internal clock (OFF) or an external clock (ON). Lets you send the data of the panel settings to a computer. Use the [+] button to transmit the data. Determines the time signature of the Metronome. Determines the volume of the Metronome. Determines the guide track number for your right hand lesson. The setting is only effective for Songs in SMF format 0 transferred from a computer. Refer to the section “Using Transferred Songs for Lessons” on page 67. Determines the guide track number for your left hand lesson. The setting is only effective for Songs in SMF format 0 transferred from a computer. Refer to the section “Using Transferred Songs for Lessons” on page 67 Determines whether Demo cancel is enabled or not. When this is set to ON, the Demo Song will not play, even if the [DEMO] button is pressed. 59 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 61 About MIDI The instrument features a MIDI terminals that can be connected to other MIDI instruments and devices for expanded musical functionality. What is MIDI? MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is a world-standard interface for communication between electronic musical instruments and music devices. When MIDI-equipped instruments are connected via a MIDI cable, it becomes possible to transfer performance and setting data between them for significantly enhanced performance and production potential. CAUTION • Connect the PSR-A300 to external equipment only after turning off power for all devices. Then, turn on the power, first to the PSR-A300, then to the connected external equipment. What You Can Do With MIDI • Transferring performance and setting data between the PSR-A300 and MIDI-equipped instruments or computers. (page 63) • Transferring the Song or Style data between the PSR-A300 and computers. (page 65) PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 60 62 About MIDI Transferring Performance Data To and From Another Instrument By connecting the PSR-A300 to other MIDI devices or a computer, the performance data of the instrument can be used on those other MIDI devices or computer, and also the performance data from other MIDI devices and computer can be received and sounded with the PSR-A300. ● When the instrument is connected with another MIDI device, it transmits/receives performance data. MIDI OUT MIDI IN PSR-A300 MIDI device MIDI IN MIDI OUT ● When the instrument is connected with a computer, it transmits/ receives performance data. MIDI IN MIDI OUT USB PSR-A300 A USB-MIDI interface (such as the Yamaha UX16) ■ MIDI settings These settings should be made when transmitting/receiving performance data to a connected MIDI device or computer. Local Settings Local Control determines whether or not notes played on the instrument are sounded by its internal tone generator system; the internal tone generator is active when local control is on, and inactive when local control is off. On ........ This is the normal setting in which notes played on the instrument’s keyboard are sounded by the internal tone generator system. Data received via the instrument’s MIDI terminal will also be played by the internal tone generator. Off ....... With this setting the instrument itself produces no sound (keyboard performance, Harmony, or Style playback), but the performance data is transmitted via the MIDI terminal. Data received via the instrument’s MIDI terminal will also be played by the internal tone generator. You can set the Local Control in the Function Settings (page 60). NOTE • If you can’t get any sound out of the instrument, Local Control may be the most likely cause. Playing the keyboard results in no sound when Local is set to OFF. 61 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 63 About MIDI External Clock Settings These settings determine whether the instrument is synchronized to its own internal clock (OFF), or to a clock signal from an external device (ON). On......... The instrument’s time based functions will be synchronized to the clock from an external device connected to the MIDI terminal. Off ........ The instrument uses its own internal clock (default). You can set the External Clock in the Function Settings (page 60). NOTE • If External Clock is ON and no clock signal is being received from an external device, the Song, Style, and metronome functions will not start. PC Mode The PC settings instantly reconfigure all important MIDI settings (as shown below). The selections are PC1, PC2 and OFF. ● The chart of PC Settings PC1 PC2* OFF LOCAL Off Off On EXTERNAL CLOCK On Off Off SONG OUT** Off Off On STYLE OUT*** Off Off On KEYBOARD OUT**** Off On On * NOTE • Song Out, Style Out and Keyboard Out can only be changed by the PC setting. They cannot be set independently. • Copyrighted Songs and User Songs cannot be used with Song Out. Set the PC mode to PC2 when using Digital Music Notebook. Digital Music Notebook is a major new multimedia platform for music tuition and performance. Visit the website below for more information on the latest version of Digital Music Notebook and how to install it. www.digitalmusicnotebook.com ** Determines whether Song data is transmitted (ON) via MIDI or not (OFF) during Song playback. *** Determines whether Style data is transmitted (ON) via MIDI or not (OFF) during Style playback. **** Determines whether keyboard performance data of the instrument is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF). 1 Press and hold the [DEMO] button for longer than a second to call up the PC Mode. oFF 2 Hold for longer than a second. Select PC1, PC2, or OFF by using the [+], [-] buttons. PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 62 64 PC mode About MIDI Remote Control of MIDI Devices You can also use this instrument as a remote control device for the Digital Music Notebook application on your computer (via the MIDI connection) —controlling playback, stop and transport functions from the panel. ● Remote control keys PSR-A300: To use the remote control functions, simultaneously hold down the lowest two keys on the keyboard (C1 and C#1) and press the appropriate key (shown below). NOTE • Remote control of MIDI devices will function independently of the PC2 mode. C#1 C1 C6: Fast forward B5: Start A5: Stop G5: Rewind F5: Top (move to the beginning of the song) E5: Metronome ON/OFF PSR-A300 Panel Setting Transmission (Initial Send) Sends the PSR-A300 panel settings to an external MIDI device. When recording a PSR-A300 performance to an external sequencer or similar equipment, you can use this function to send the current PSR-A300 panel settings so that when the sequence is played back the original panel settings are automatically restored. You can set Initial Send in the Function settings (page 60). Transferring data between the PSR-A300 and a computer The PSR-A300 includes 35 preset Songs and 135 Styles, but you can load other Songs and Styles from your computer and use them in the same way as the preset Songs as long as the loaded Song is SMF format 0* or SFF (Style File Format). Loaded Song data will be stored in Song numbers beginning with 041 and one of the loaded style/s can be registered as the 136th style. In order to perform the operations described in this section you will need to use a computer connected to the Internet to download the free Musicsoft Downloader application from the URL listed below. * The SMF (Standard MIDI File) format is one of the most common and widely compatible sequence formats used for storing sequence data. Most commercially available MIDI sequence data is provided in SMF Format 0. 63 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 65 About MIDI Installing Musicsoft Downloader You can download the “Musicsoft Downloader” application from the following website. Make sure that your computer has an Internet connection. http://music.yamaha.com/download/ ● The minimum computer requirements for Musicsoft Downloader operation are as follows: • OS : Windows 98SE/Me/2000/XP Home Edition/ XP Professional • CPU : 233 MHz or higher; Intel® Pentium®/Celeron® processor family (500 MHz or more is recommended) • Memory : 64 MB or more (256 MB or more is recommended) • Hard Disk : at least 128 MB of free space (at least 512 MB of free space is recommended) • Display : 800 x 600 HighColor (16-bit) • Other : Microsoft® Internet Explorer®5.5 or higher NOTE • Visit the Yamaha website for more information on the latest version of Musicsoft Downloader (version 5.2.0 or higher) and how to install it. Connecting a personal computer After installing the Musicsoft Downloader application on your computer, connect the PSR-A300 as described below. A Yamaha UX16 or similar USB-MIDI interface (sold separately) will be necessary for MIDI connection between the PSR-A300 and a USBequipped computer. Make sure to purchase a Yamaha UX16 or a quality USB-MIDI interface at a musical instrument store, computer store or electrical appliance store. If you use the UX16 interface, install the driver supplied with the interface on your computer. MIDI IN MIDI OUT USB PSR-A300 A USB-MIDI interface (such as the Yamaha UX16) PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 64 66 About MIDI Transferring data from a computer You can transmit Song or Style File Format (SFF) files from your computer to your PSR-A300’s Flash Memory. For details about how to transmit the data using the Musicsoft Downloader application, refer to the Online help topic “Transferring Data Between the Computer and Instrument (for unprotected data)” of the Musicsoft Downloader. ● Data that can be loaded to the PSR-A300 from a computer • Songs : 99 Songs max (Song numbers 041-) • Styles : Style number 136 • Data : 373 kilobytes • Song data Format : SMF Format 0 • Style data Format : SFF • File : 05PK.USR (user file) ***.MID (MIDI Song) ***.STY (Style file) NOTE • The Musicsoft Downloader application may not be able to access the instrument in the following cases: • During Demo playbaack • During Style playback • During Song playback • During recording CAUTION • Use the power adaptor when transferring data. The data can be corrupted if the batteries fail during the transfer. • Never turn the power off and never plug/ unplug the AC power adaptor during data transmission. Not only will the data fail to be transferred and saved, but operation of the flash memory may become unstable and its contents may disappear completely when the power is turned on or off. NOTE • Close the window to exit from the Musicsoft Downloader and re-enable control of the instrument. Transferring a user file from the PSR-A300 to a computer You can transfer backup data (page 33), including the five User Songs stored to the instrument, to a computer as a “user file” by using Musicsoft Downloader. For details about how to transmit Song data using the Musicsoft Downloader application, refer to the Online help topic “Transferring Data Between the Computer and Instrument (for unprotected data)” in the application. ● Data that can be transferred to a computer from the PSR-A300 • User file (05PK.USR: backup data containing five User Songs) • Songs transferred from a computer • Styles transferred from a computer NOTE • Preset Song data cannot be transmitted from the PSR-A300. • Do not rename the user file on the computer. If you do so, it will not be recognized when transferred to the instrument. CAUTION • The backup data, including the five User Songs is transmitted/received as a single file. As a result, all backup data (including the five Songs) will be overwritten every time you transmit or receive. Keep this in mind when transferring data. ● Erasing Transferred Song Data from the PSR-A300 Memory To erase all Songs or Styles transferred from the computer, use “flash clear” function on page 33. To erase specific Songs and Styles transferred from the computer, use the Delete function on Musicsoft Downloader. ● Using Transferred Songs for Lessons In order to use Songs (only SMF format 0) transferred from a computer for lessons it is necessary to specify which channels are to be played back as the right-hand and left-hand parts. Refer to the “Lesson Track (R)” or “Lesson Track (L)” in the Function Setting List on page 61. The procedure for setting the “guide track” is as follows: Select a transferred Song you want to use for lessons. Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until the “R-Part” or “L-Part” appears in the display, and then use the number buttons [0]-[9], [+], [-] to select the channel you want to play back as the specified right- or left-hand part. We recommend that you select channel 1 for the right-hand part and channel 2 for the left-hand part. 65 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 67 Troubleshooting Problem Possible Cause and Solution When the instrument is turned on or off, a popping sound is temporarily produced. This is normal and indicates that the instrument is receiving electrical power. When using a mobile phone, noise is produced. Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the instrument may produce interference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone or use it further away from the instrument. There is no sound even when the keyboard is played or when a Song or Style is being played back. Check that nothing is connected to the PHONES/OUTPUT jack on the rear panel. When a set of headphones is plugged into this jack, no sound is output. Check the Local Control on/off. (See page 63.) Playing keys in the right hand area of the keyboard does not produce any sound. When using the Dictionary function (page 58), the keys in the right hand area are used only for entering the chord root and type. • The volume is too soft. • The sound quality is poor. • The rhythm stops unexpectedly or will not play. • The recorded data of the Song, etc. does not play correctly. • The LCD display suddenly goes dark, and all panel settings are reset. The batteries are low or dead. Replace all six batteries with completely new ones, or use the optional AC adaptor. The Style or Song does not play back when the [START/STOP] button is pressed. Is External Clock set to ON? Make sure External Clock is set to OFF; refer to “External Clock Settings” on page 64. Make sure that the Style Volume (page 55) is set to an appropriate level. The Style does not sound properly. Not all of the voices seem to sound, or the sound seems to be cut off. The instrument is polyphonic up to a maximum of 32 notes. If the Dual voice or Split voice is being used and a style or Song is playing back at the same time, some notes/sounds may be omitted (or “stolen”) from the accompaniment or Song. The footswitch (for sustain) seems to produce the opposite effect. For example, pressing the footswitch cuts off the sound and releasing it sustains the sounds. The polarity of the footswitch is reversed. Make sure that the footswitch plug is properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the power. The sound of the voice changes from note to note. This is normal. The AWM tone generation method uses multiple recordings (samples) of an instrument across the range of the keyboard; thus, the actual sound of the voice may be slightly different from note to note. The ACMP ON indicator does not appear when the [ACMP ON/OFF] button is pressed. Always press the [STYLE] button first when you are going to use any style-related function. The harmony doesn’t sound. The method of sounding the harmony effect (01-26) differs depending on the selected type. For Types 01-05, turn the Auto Accompaniment on and play it by pressing a chord in the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard, then play some keys in the right-hand side to get the harmony effect. For Types 06-26, turning the Auto Accompaniment on or off has no effect. However, it is necessary to play two notes simultaneously for Types 06-12. The part indications, such as Right, Left and Both Hands, do not appear—even when pressing the [R] or [L] buttons for the Lesson. Make sure that you are not pressing the [R] or [L] buttons while the Song is playing. If you press one of the part buttons while playing the Song and before starting the Lesson, these buttons serve to mute the corresponding Song tracks. Stop the Song first, then select the desired part and start the Lesson. PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 66 68 Is the Split Point set at an appropriate key for the cords you are playing? Set the Split Point at an appropriate key (page 48). Is the “ACMP ON” indicator showing in the display? If it is not showing press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button so that it does show. Index Panel Controls and Terminals A-B REPEAT button ................................................. 43 ACMP ON/OFF button .............................................. 23 DEMO button ............................................................. 21 DUAL ON/OFF button .............................................. 13 FF button .................................................................... 21 FUNCTION button .............................................. 35, 60 HARMONY ON/OFF button .................................... 44 INTRO/ENDING/rit. Button ..................................... 53 L button ...................................................................... 38 LISTEN & LEARN button ........................................ 38 MAIN/AUTO FILL button ........................................ 53 MASTER VOLUME control ................................. 9, 34 METRONOME ON/OFF button ............................... 18 number buttons 0-9, +/YES, -/NO ............................. 35 ORIENTAL SCALE buttons ..................................... 29 PAUSE button ............................................................ 21 PITCH BEND wheel .................................................. 32 PORTABLE GRAND button .................................... 15 R button ...................................................................... 38 REC button ................................................................. 25 REC TRACK 1 button ............................................... 27 REC TRACK 2 button ............................................... 27 REVERB ON/OFF button ......................................... 45 REW button ............................................................... 21 SONG button ....................................................... 20, 35 SOUND EFFECT KIT button ................................... 17 SPLIT ON/OFF button .............................................. 14 STANDBY/ON switch .......................................... 9, 34 START/STOP button ................................................. 34 STYLE button ...................................................... 22, 35 SYNC START button ................................................ 23 TEMPO/TAP button .................................................. 50 TIMING button .......................................................... 39 TOUCH ON/OFF button ........................................... 47 VOICE button ...................................................... 12, 35 WAITING button ....................................................... 40 DC IN 12V jack ........................................................... 8 MIDI IN/OUT terminal .............................................. 62 PHONES/OUTPUT jack .............................................. 9 SUSTAIN jack ............................................................. 9 Alphabetical Order A AB Repeat .................................................................. 43 AC Power Adaptor ....................................................... 8 Accompaniment Tuning ............................................. 31 ACMP ON/OFF ......................................................... 23 Auto Accompaniment ................................................ 23 Auto accompaniment range ................................... 23-24 B Backup ........................................................................ 33 Backup Clear .............................................................. 33 Battery .......................................................................... 8 Beat Display ............................................................... 36 C Cancel ......................................................................... 28 Chord ......................................................... 24, 56-57, 59 Chord Dictionary ........................................................ 58 Chord Display ...................................................... 36, 57 Chorus ........................................................................ 46 Chorus Send Level (Dual) .......................................... 61 Chorus Send Level (Main) ......................................... 61 Chorus Send Level (Split) .......................................... 61 Chorus Type List ........................................................ 85 Computer ............................................................... 63-67 D Delete (Song) ............................................................. 28 Demo .......................................................................... 21 Display ....................................................................... 36 Drum Kit .................................................................... 15 Drum Kit List ............................................................. 78 Dual ............................................................................ 13 E Ending .................................................................. 52, 54 External Clock ...................................................... 61, 64 F FF ............................................................................... 21 Flash Clear ................................................................. 33 Flash Memory ............................................................ 67 Footswitch (Sustain jack) ............................................. 9 Function Setting List ............................................. 60-61 G Grade .......................................................................... 39 H Harmony ................................................................ 44-45 Harmony Type List .................................................... 84 Harmony Volume ....................................................... 61 67 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 69 Index I Initial Send ................................................................. 61 Initialization ............................................................... 33 Intro ...................................................................... 51, 54 Reverb Type List ........................................................ 85 Rew ............................................................................ 21 Rhythm ....................................................................... 22 Root ...................................................................... 56, 58 S K Main/Auto fill ....................................................... 53-54 Master Volume Control ......................................... 9, 34 Measure ...................................................................... 36 Melody Voice ............................................................. 41 Metronome ............................................................ 18-19 Metronome Volume ................................................... 19 MIDI .......................................................................... 62 Music Rest ................................................................... 6 Musicsoft Downloader .......................................... 65-66 Mute ........................................................................... 42 Save data to computer ................................................ 67 Scale Setting .......................................................... 29-31 SFF ....................................................................... 22, 67 SMF Format 0 ............................................................ 65 Song ............................................................................ 20 Song List .................................................................... 21 Song Volume .............................................................. 41 Split ............................................................................ 14 Split Point ............................................................. 14, 48 Start ............................................................................ 34 Stop ............................................................................ 34 Style ............................................................22-23, 51-54 Style File .............................................................. 22, 67 Style List .................................................................... 83 Style Register ............................................................. 61 Style Volume .............................................................. 55 Supplied Accessories ............................................. 6, 91 Synchro Start ........................................................ 23, 51 N T NO .............................................................................. 28 Notation ...................................................................... 36 Tempo ........................................................................ 50 Time Signature ........................................................... 19 Touch Response ......................................................... 47 Touch sensitivity ........................................................ 47 Track .............................................................. 26, 36, 42 Track Rec .............................................................. 26-27 Transfer ................................................................ 63, 67 Transpose ................................................................... 48 Tuning ........................................................................ 49 Turn Auto accompaniment on or off .......................... 23 Keyboard Display ...................................................... 36 L Lesson ................................................................... 37-40 Lesson track R/L for transferred songs ................ 61, 67 Local .................................................................... 61, 63 M O Octave (Dual) ............................................................. 61 Octave (Main) ............................................................ 61 Octave (Split) ............................................................. 61 One Touch Setting ..................................................... 49 Option ........................................................................ 91 Oriental Percussion Kit .............................................. 15 Oriental Percussion Kit List ....................................... 78 Oriental Scales ........................................................... 29 P Panel Sustain .............................................................. 46 Part ............................................................................. 38 Pause .......................................................................... 21 PC setting ................................................................... 64 Pitch Bend range ........................................................ 32 Press and Hold for a while ......................................... 34 R Recording .............................................................. 25-27 Remote Control .......................................................... 65 Reverb ........................................................................ 45 Reverb Level .............................................................. 61 User File ..................................................................... 67 User Song .............................................................. 25-26 V Voice ..................................................................... 12-14 Voice List ................................................................... 71 X XGlite ........................................................................... 6 Y YES ............................................................................ 28 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual 68 70 U Voice List / Voice-Liste / Liste des voix ■ Maximum Polyphony • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • The instrument has 32-note maximum polyphony. This means that it can play a maximum of up to 32 notes at once, regardless of what functions are used. Auto accompaniment uses a number of the available notes, so when auto accompaniment is used the total number of available notes for playing on the keyboard is correspondingly reduced. The same applies to the Split Voice and Song functions. If the maximum polyphony is exceeded, earlier played notes will be cut off and the most recent notes have priority (last note priority). ■ Maximale Polyphonie • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Das Instrument verfügt über eine maximale Polyphonie von 32 Noten. Dies bedeutet, daß das Instrument unabhängig von den aktivierten Funktionen maximal 32 Noten gleichzeitig spielen kann. Eine bestimmte Anzahl der verfügbaren Noten wird von der automatischen Begleitung belegt; bei deren Einsatz verringert sich somit die Anzahl der für das Spiel auf der Klaviatur verfügbaren Noten entsprechend. Das Gleiche gilt für Split Voices und Song-Funktion. Wenn die maximale Polyphonie überschritten wird, werden die am frühesten gespielten Noten ausgeschaltet und die zuletzt gespielten Noten haben Vorrang (Last Note Priority). ■ Polyphonie maximale • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 205 Le PSR-A300 dispose d’une polyphonie maximale de 32 notes. Cela signifie que l’instrument peut reproduire un nombre maximal de 32 voix à la fois, indépendamment des fonctions utilisées. L’accompagnement automatique fait appel à un certain nombre de notes disponibles. Il s’ensuit que lorsque l’accompagnement automatique est utilisé, le nombre total de notes disponibles pour l’interprétation au clavier est réduit en conséquence. Cela s’applique aussi aux fonctions Split Voice (Voix partagées) et Song (Morceau). Lorsque la polyphonie maximale est dépassée, les notes jouées en premier ne produisent aucun son ; seules les notes interprétées en dernier sont audibles (priorité à la dernière note). NOTE • The Voice List includes MIDI program change numbers for each voice. Use these program change numbers when playing the instrument via MIDI from an external device. • Program Numbers 001 to 128 directly relate to MIDI Program Change Numbers 000 to 127. That is, Program Numbers and Program Change Numbers differ by a value of 1. Remember to take this into consideration. • Some voices may sound continuously or have a long decay after the notes have been released while the sustain pedal (footswitch) is held. HINWEIS • In der Voice-Liste sind für jede Voice MIDIProgrammwechselnummern enthalten. Verwenden Sie diese Programmwechselnummern, wenn Sie das Instrument über MIDI von einem externen Gerät aus ansteuern. • Die Programmnummern 001 bis 128 hängen direkt mit den MIDI-Programmwechsel-Nummern 000 bis 127 zusammen. Das bedeutet: Programmnummern und ProgrammwechselNummern unterscheiden sich mit einem Wert von 1. Denken Sie bei diesen Überlegungen daran. • Solange der Sustain-Fußschalter gedrückt ist, ertönen einige Voices nach dem Loslassen der Taste eventuell kontinuierlich oder mit einer langen Abklingzeit (Decay). NOTE • La liste des voix comporte des numéros de changement de programme MIDI pour chaque voix. Utilisez ces derniers pour commander le PSR-A300 à partir d’un périphérique MIDI. • Les numéros de programme 001 à 128 correspondent aux numéros de changement de programme MIDI 000 à 127. Cela signifie que les numéros de programme et les numéros de changement de programme sont décalés de 1. N’oubliez pas de tenir compte de cet écart. • Certaines voix peuvent avoir une sonorité prolongée ou un long déclin après le relâchement des touches, et ceci pendant la durée de maintien de la pédale de sustain (sélecteur au pied). PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi 71 Voice List / Voice-Liste / Liste des voix ● Panel Voice List / Verzeichnis der BedienfeldVoices / Liste des voix de panneau MIDI Program Voice MSB LSB Change# No. (0 - 127) (0 - 127) (1 - 128) Bank Select Voice Name PIANO Voice Name 043 0 112 37 Slap Bass 044 0 112 39 Synth Bass 045 0 113 39 Hi-Q Bass 046 0 113 40 Dance Bass 001 0 112 1 Grand Piano 002 0 112 2 Bright Piano 003 0 112 4 Honky-tonk Piano 047 0 112 49 String Ensemble 004 0 112 3 MIDI Grand Piano 048 0 112 50 Chamber Strings 005 0 113 3 CP 80 049 0 112 51 Synth Strings 006 0 112 7 Harpsichord 050 0 113 50 Slow Strings 051 0 112 45 Tremolo Strings Galaxy Electric Piano 052 0 112 46 Pizzicato Strings 0 112 41 Violin E.PIANO 007 0 114 5 STRINGS 008 0 112 5 Funky Electric Piano 053 009 0 112 6 DX Modern Electric Piano 054 0 112 43 Cello 010 0 113 6 Hyper Tines 055 0 112 44 Contrabass 011 0 114 6 Venus Electric Piano 056 0 112 106 Banjo 012 0 112 8 Clavi 057 0 112 47 Harp 058 0 112 56 013 0 112 17 Jazz Organ 1 014 0 113 17 Jazz Organ 2 059 0 112 53 Choir 015 0 112 18 Click Organ 060 0 113 53 Vocal Ensemble 016 0 116 17 Bright Organ 061 0 112 54 Vox Humana 017 0 112 19 Rock Organ 062 0 112 55 Air Choir 018 0 114 19 Purple Organ 019 0 118 17 16'+2' Organ 063 0 112 67 Tenor Sax 020 0 119 17 16'+4' Organ 064 0 112 66 Alto Sax 0 112 65 Soprano Sax ORGAN Orchestra Hit CHOIR SAXOPHONE 021 0 114 17 Theater Organ 065 022 0 112 20 Church Organ 066 0 112 68 Baritone Sax 023 0 113 20 Chapel Organ 067 0 114 67 Breathy Tenor Sax 024 0 112 21 Reed Organ 068 0 112 69 Oboe ACCORDION 069 0 112 72 Clarinet 22 Traditional Accordion 070 0 112 70 English Horn 071 0 112 71 Bassoon 025 0 113 026 0 112 22 Musette Accordion 027 0 113 24 Bandoneon 028 0 112 23 Harmonica GUITAR TRUMPET 072 0 112 57 Trumpet 073 0 112 60 Muted Trumpet 029 0 112 25 Classical Guitar 074 0 112 58 Trombone 030 0 112 26 Folk Guitar 075 0 113 58 Trombone Section 031 0 113 26 12Strings Guitar 076 0 112 61 French Horn 077 0 112 59 Tuba 032 0 112 27 Jazz Guitar 033 0 113 27 Octave Guitar 034 0 112 28 Clean Guitar 078 0 112 62 Brass Section 035 0 117 28 60’s Clean Guitar 079 0 113 62 Big Band Brass 036 0 112 29 Muted Guitar 080 0 119 62 Mellow Horns 037 0 112 30 Overdriven Guitar 081 0 112 63 Synth Brass 038 0 112 31 Distortion Guitar 082 0 113 63 80’s Brass 083 0 114 63 BASS BRASS Techno Brass FLUTE 039 0 112 33 Acoustic Bass 040 0 112 34 Finger Bass 084 0 112 74 Flute 041 0 112 35 Pick Bass 085 0 112 73 Piccolo 042 0 112 36 Fretless Bass 086 0 112 76 Pan Flute PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi 206 72 MIDI Program MSB LSB Change# (0 - 127) (0 - 127) (1 - 128) Bank Select Voice No. Voice List / Voice-Liste / Liste des voix MIDI Program MSB LSB Change# (0 - 127) (0 - 127) (1 - 128) Bank Select Voice No. Voice Name 087 0 112 75 Recorder 088 0 112 80 Ocarina ● XGlite Voice/XGlite Optional Voice* List / Liste der XGlite-Voices/optionale XGlite-Voices* / Voix XGlite/liste des voix* XGlite en option Voice No. SYNTH LEAD Voice Name 089 0 112 81 Square Lead 090 0 112 82 Sawtooth Lead 122 0 0 1 Grand Piano 091 0 112 86 Voice Lead 123 0 1 1 Grand Piano KSP 092 0 112 99 Star Dust 124 0 40 1 Piano Strings 093 0 112 101 Brightness 125 0 41 1 Dream 094 0 115 82 Analogon 126 0 0 2 Bright Piano 095 0 119 82 PIANO Fargo 127 0 1 2 Bright Piano KSP SYNTH PAD 128 0 0 3 Electric Grand Piano Electric Grand Piano KSP 096 0 112 89 Fantasia 129 0 1 3 097 0 113 101 Bell Pad 130 0 32 3 Detuned CP80 098 0 112 92 Xenon Pad 131 0 0 4 Honky-tonk Piano 099 0 112 95 Equinox 132 0 1 4 Honky-tonk Piano KSP 100 0 113 90 Dark Moon 133 0 0 5 Electric Piano 1 134 0 1 5 Electric Piano 1 KSP PERCUSSION 207 Bank Select MIDI Program MSB LSB Change# (0 - 127) (0 - 127) (1 - 128) 101 0 112 12 Vibraphone 135 0 32 5 Chorus Electric Piano 1 102 0 112 13 Marimba 136 0 0 6 Electric Piano 2 103 0 112 14 Xylophone 137 0 1 6 Electric Piano 2 KSP 104 0 112 115 Steel Drums *138 0 32 6 Chorus Electric Piano 2 105 0 112 9 Celesta 139 0 41 6 DX + Analog Electric Piano 106 0 112 11 Music Box 140 0 0 7 Harpsichord 107 0 112 15 Tubular Bells 141 0 1 7 Harpsichord KSP 108 0 112 48 Timpani 142 0 35 7 Harpsichord 3 DRUM KITS 143 0 0 8 Clavi 144 0 1 8 Clavi KSP 109 127 0 1 Standard Kit 1 110 127 0 2 Standard Kit 2 111 127 0 9 Room Kit 145 0 0 9 Celesta 112 127 0 17 Rock Kit 146 0 0 10 Glockenspiel 113 127 0 25 Electronic Kit 147 0 0 11 Music Box 114 127 0 26 Analog Kit 148 0 64 11 Orgel 115 127 0 28 Dance Kit 149 0 0 12 Vibraphone 116 127 0 33 Jazz Kit 150 0 1 12 Vibraphone KSP 117 127 0 41 Brush Kit 151 0 0 13 Marimba 118 127 0 49 Symphony Kit 152 0 1 13 Marimba KSP 119 126 0 1 SFX Kit 1 153 0 64 13 Sine Marimba 120 126 0 2 SFX Kit 2 154 0 97 13 Balimba 121 126 0 113 Sound Effect Kit 155 0 98 13 Log Drums 156 0 0 14 Xylophone 157 0 0 15 Tubular Bells 158 0 96 15 Church Bells 159 0 97 15 Carillon 160 0 0 16 Dulcimer 161 0 35 16 Dulcimer 2 162 0 96 16 Cimbalom 163 0 97 16 Santur CHROMATIC PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi 73 Voice List / Voice-Liste / Liste des voix MIDI Program MSB LSB Change# (0 - 127) (0 - 127) (1 - 128) Bank Select Voice No. ORGAN Voice No. Voice Name 211 0 41 29 164 0 0 17 Drawbar Organ 212 0 45 29 Jazz Man 165 0 32 17 Detuned Drawbar Organ 213 0 0 30 Overdriven Guitar 166 0 33 17 60’s Drawbar Organ 1 214 0 43 30 Guitar Pinch 167 0 34 17 60’s Drawbar Organ 2 215 0 0 31 Distortion Guitar 168 0 35 17 70’s Drawbar Organ 1 216 0 40 31 Feedback Guitar 169 0 37 17 60’s Drawbar Organ 3 217 0 41 31 Feedback Guitar 2 170 0 40 17 16+2'2/3 218 0 0 32 Guitar Harmonics 171 0 64 17 Organ Bass 219 0 65 32 Guitar Feedback 172 0 65 17 70’s Drawbar Organ 2 220 0 66 32 173 0 66 17 Cheezy Organ 174 0 67 17 Drawbar Organ 3 221 0 0 33 Acoustic Bass 175 0 0 18 Percussive Organ 222 0 40 33 Jazz Rhythm 176 0 24 18 70’s Percussive Organ 223 0 45 33 Velocity Crossfade Upright Bass 177 0 32 18 Detuned Percussive Organ 224 0 0 34 Finger Bass 178 0 33 18 Light Organ 225 0 18 34 Finger Dark 179 0 37 18 Percussive Organ 2 226 0 40 34 Bass & Distorted Electric Guitar 180 0 0 19 Rock Organ 227 0 43 34 Finger Slap Bass 181 0 64 19 Rotary Organ 228 0 45 34 Finger Bass 2 182 0 65 19 Slow Rotary 229 0 65 34 Modulated Bass 183 0 66 19 Fast Rotary 230 0 0 35 Pick Bass 184 0 0 20 Church Organ 231 0 28 35 Muted Pick Bass 185 0 32 20 Church Organ 3 232 0 0 36 Fretless Bass 186 0 35 20 Church Organ 2 233 0 32 36 Fretless Bass 2 187 0 40 20 Notre Dame 234 0 33 36 Fretless Bass 3 188 0 64 20 Organ Flute 235 0 34 36 Fretless Bass 4 189 0 65 20 Tremolo Organ Flute 236 0 0 37 Slap Bass 1 190 0 0 21 Reed Organ 237 0 32 37 Punch Thumb Bass 191 0 40 21 Puff Organ 238 0 0 38 Slap Bass 2 192 0 0 22 Accordion 239 0 43 38 Velocity Switch Slap 193 0 0 23 Harmonica 240 0 0 39 Synth Bass 1 194 0 32 23 Harmonica 2 241 0 40 39 Techno Synth Bass 195 0 0 24 Tango Accordion 242 0 0 40 Synth Bass 2 196 0 64 24 Tango Accordion 2 243 0 6 40 Mellow Synth Bass 244 0 12 40 Sequenced Bass GUITAR Muted Steel Guitar Guitar Harmonics 2 BASS 197 0 0 25 Nylon Guitar 245 0 18 40 Click Synth Bass 198 0 43 25 Velocity Guitar Harmonics 246 0 19 40 Synth Bass 2 Dark 199 0 96 25 Ukulele *247 0 40 40 Modular Synth Bass 200 0 0 26 Steel Guitar 248 0 41 40 DX Bass 201 0 35 26 12-string Guitar 202 0 40 26 Nylon & Steel Guitar 249 0 0 41 Violin 203 0 41 26 Steel Guitar with Body Sound 250 0 8 41 Slow Violin 204 0 96 26 Mandolin 251 0 0 42 Viola 205 0 0 27 Jazz Guitar 252 0 0 43 Cello 206 0 32 27 Jazz Amp 253 0 0 44 Contrabass 207 0 0 28 Clean Guitar 254 0 0 45 Tremolo Strings 208 0 32 28 Chorus Guitar 255 0 8 45 Slow Tremolo Strings 209 0 0 29 Muted Guitar 256 0 40 45 Suspense Strings 210 0 40 29 Funk Guitar 1 257 0 0 46 Pizzicato Strings STRINGS PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi 208 74 MIDI Program MSB LSB Change# (0 - 127) (0 - 127) (1 - 128) Bank Select Voice Name Voice List / Voice-Liste / Liste des voix MIDI Program MSB LSB Change# (0 - 127) (0 - 127) (1 - 128) Bank Select Voice No. Voice Name 258 0 0 47 Orchestral Harp 303 0 18 64 259 0 40 47 Yang Chin 304 0 41 64 260 0 0 48 Timpani Soft Brass ENSEMBLE 305 0 0 65 Soprano Sax 261 0 0 49 Strings 1 306 0 0 66 Alto Sax 262 0 3 49 Stereo Strings 307 0 40 66 Sax Section 263 0 8 49 Slow Strings 308 0 0 67 Tenor Sax 264 0 35 49 60’s Strings 309 0 40 67 Breathy Tenor Sax 265 0 40 49 Orchestra 310 0 0 68 Baritone Sax 266 0 41 49 Orchestra 2 311 0 0 69 Oboe 267 0 42 49 Tremolo Orchestra 312 0 0 70 English Horn 268 0 45 49 Velocity Strings 313 0 0 71 Bassoon 269 0 0 50 Strings 2 314 0 0 72 270 0 3 50 Stereo Slow Strings 271 0 8 50 Legato Strings 315 0 0 73 Piccolo 272 0 40 50 Warm Strings 316 0 0 74 Flute 273 0 41 50 Kingdom 317 0 0 75 Recorder 274 0 0 51 Synth Strings 1 318 0 0 76 Pan Flute 275 0 0 52 Synth Strings 2 319 0 0 77 Blown Bottle 276 0 0 53 Choir Aahs 320 0 0 78 Shakuhachi 277 0 3 53 Stereo Choir 321 0 0 79 Whistle 278 0 32 53 Mellow Choir 322 0 0 80 Ocarina 279 0 40 53 Choir Strings 280 0 0 54 Voice Oohs 323 0 0 81 Square Lead 281 0 0 55 Synth Voice 324 0 6 81 Square Lead 2 282 0 40 55 Synth Voice 2 325 0 8 81 LM Square 283 0 41 55 Choral 326 0 18 81 Hollow 284 0 64 55 Analog Voice 327 0 19 81 Shroud 285 0 0 56 Orchestra Hit 328 0 64 81 Mellow 286 0 35 56 Orchestra Hit 2 329 0 65 81 Solo Sine 287 0 64 56 Impact 330 0 66 81 Sine Lead 331 0 0 82 Sawtooth Lead Choir Brass REED Clarinet PIPE SYNTH LEAD BRASS 209 MIDI Program MSB LSB Change# (0 - 127) (0 - 127) (1 - 128) Bank Select Voice No. Voice Name 288 0 0 57 Trumpet 332 0 6 82 Sawtooth Lead 2 289 0 32 57 Warm Trumpet 333 0 8 82 Thick Sawtooth 290 0 0 58 Trombone 334 0 18 82 Dynamic Sawtooth 291 0 18 58 Trombone 2 335 0 19 82 Digital Sawtooth 292 0 0 59 Tuba 336 0 20 82 Big Lead 293 0 0 60 Muted Trumpet 337 0 96 82 Sequenced Analog 294 0 0 61 French Horn 338 0 0 83 Calliope Lead 295 0 6 61 French Horn Solo 339 0 65 83 Pure Pad 296 0 32 61 French Horn 2 340 0 0 84 Chiff Lead 297 0 37 61 Horn Orchestra 341 0 0 85 Charang Lead 298 0 0 62 Brass Section 342 0 64 85 Distorted Lead 299 0 35 62 Trumpet & Trombone Section 343 0 0 86 Voice Lead 300 0 0 63 Synth Brass 1 344 0 0 87 Fifths Lead 301 0 20 63 Resonant Synth Brass 345 0 35 87 Big Five 302 0 0 64 Synth Brass 2 346 0 0 88 Bass & Lead PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi 75 Voice List / Voice-Liste / Liste des voix MIDI Program MSB LSB Change# (0 - 127) (0 - 127) (1 - 128) Bank Select Voice No. Voice No. Voice Name 347 0 16 88 Big & Low 348 0 64 88 Fat & Perky 395 0 0 105 Sitar 349 0 65 88 Soft Whirl 396 0 32 105 Detuned Sitar SYNTH PAD 397 0 35 105 WORLD Sitar 2 350 0 0 89 New Age Pad 398 0 97 105 Tamboura 351 0 64 89 Fantasy 399 0 0 106 Banjo 352 0 0 90 Warm Pad 400 0 28 106 Muted Banjo 353 0 0 91 Poly Synth Pad 401 0 96 106 Rabab 354 0 0 92 Choir Pad 402 0 97 106 Gopichant 355 0 66 92 Itopia 403 0 98 106 Oud 356 0 0 93 Bowed Pad 404 0 0 107 Shamisen 357 0 0 94 Metallic Pad 405 0 0 108 Koto 358 0 0 95 Halo Pad 406 0 96 108 Taisho-kin 359 0 0 96 Sweep Pad 407 0 97 108 Kanoon 408 0 0 109 Kalimba SYNTH EFFECTS 360 0 0 97 Rain 409 0 0 110 Bagpipe 361 0 65 97 African Wind 410 0 0 111 Fiddle 362 0 66 97 Carib 411 0 0 112 Shanai 363 0 0 98 Sound Track 364 0 27 98 Prologue 412 0 0 113 Tinkle Bell 365 0 0 99 Crystal 413 0 96 113 Bonang 366 0 12 99 Synth Drum Comp 414 0 97 113 Altair 367 0 14 99 Popcorn 415 0 98 113 Gamelan Gongs 368 0 18 99 Tiny Bells 416 0 99 113 Stereo Gamelan Gongs 369 0 35 99 Round Glockenspiel 417 0 100 113 Rama Cymbal 370 0 40 99 Glockenspiel Chimes 418 0 0 114 Agogo 371 0 41 99 Clear Bells 419 0 0 115 Steel Drums 372 0 42 99 Chorus Bells 420 0 97 115 Glass Percussion 373 0 65 99 Soft Crystal 421 0 98 115 Thai Bells 374 0 70 99 Air Bells 422 0 0 116 Woodblock 375 0 71 99 Bell Harp 423 0 96 116 Castanets 376 0 72 99 Gamelimba 424 0 0 117 Taiko Drum 377 0 0 100 Atmosphere 425 0 96 117 Gran Cassa 378 0 18 100 Warm Atmosphere 426 0 0 118 Melodic Tom 379 0 19 100 Hollow Release 427 0 64 118 Melodic Tom 2 380 0 40 100 Nylon Electric Piano 428 0 65 118 Real Tom 381 0 64 100 Nylon Harp 429 0 66 118 Rock Tom 382 0 65 100 Harp Vox 430 0 0 119 Synth Drum 383 0 66 100 Atmosphere Pad 431 0 64 119 Analog Tom 384 0 0 101 Brightness 432 0 65 119 Electronic Percussion 385 0 0 102 Goblins 433 0 0 120 Reverse Cymbal 386 0 64 102 Goblins Synth 387 0 65 102 Creeper 434 0 0 121 Fret Noise 388 0 67 102 Ritual 435 0 0 122 Breath Noise 389 0 68 102 To Heaven 436 0 0 123 Seashore 390 0 70 102 Night 437 0 0 124 Bird Tweet 391 0 71 102 Glisten 438 0 0 125 Telephone Ring 392 0 96 102 Bell Choir 439 0 0 126 Helicopter 393 0 0 103 Echoes 440 0 0 127 Applause 394 0 0 104 Sci-Fi 441 0 0 128 Gunshot PERCUSSIVE SOUND EFFECTS PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi 210 76 MIDI Program MSB LSB Change# (0 - 127) (0 - 127) (1 - 128) Bank Select Voice Name Voice List / Voice-Liste / Liste des voix MIDI Program MSB LSB Change# (0 - 127) (0 - 127) (1 - 128) ● Oriental Voice List / Liste der orientalischen Voices / Liste des voix orientales Bank Select Voice No. Voice Name 64 0 1 Cutting Noise 443 64 0 2 Cutting Noise 2 444 64 0 4 String Slap 445 64 0 17 Flute Key Click 483 0 113 106 Oud 446 64 0 33 Shower 484 0 114 78 Nay 447 64 0 34 Thunder 485 0 113 78 Kawala 448 64 0 35 Wind 486 0 113 108 Kanoun 449 64 0 36 Stream 487 0 121 26 Saz 450 64 0 37 Bubble 488 0 115 106 Oud Tremolo 451 64 0 38 Feed 489 0 114 112 Surnay 452 64 0 49 Dog 490 0 120 26 Bouzouki 453 64 0 50 Horse 491 0 113 16 Santoor 454 64 0 51 Bird Tweet 2 492 0 115 41 Rababa 455 64 0 56 Maou 493 0 119 26 Bouzouk 456 64 0 65 Phone Call 494 0 116 78 Nay Takasim 457 64 0 66 Door Squeak 495 0 114 108 Kanoun Oct. 458 64 0 67 Door Slam 496 0 116 106 Baglamas 459 64 0 68 Scratch Cut 497 0 117 106 Awtar 460 64 0 69 Scratch Split 498 0 122 112 Sorna 461 64 0 70 Wind Chime 499 0 114 106 Tar 462 64 0 71 Telephone Ring 2 500 0 114 16 Santuri 463 64 0 81 Car Engine Ignition 501 0 114 41 Kamanche 464 64 0 82 Car Tires Squeal 502 0 118 106 Awtar Tremolo 465 64 0 83 Car Passing 503 0 117 112 Gerba 466 64 0 84 Car Crash 504 0 121 112 Gerba Chorus 467 64 0 85 Siren 505 0 112 112 Dosaleh 468 64 0 86 Train 506 0 115 112 Mijwez 469 64 0 87 Jet Plane 507 0 116 112 Mizmar 470 64 0 88 Starship 508 0 119 112 Mizmar Oct. 471 64 0 89 Burst 509 0 120 112 Al Badou 472 64 0 90 Roller Coaster 510 0 118 112 Argoul 473 64 0 91 Submarine 511 0 116 22 Accordion 474 64 0 97 Laugh 512 0 117 49 Watariyat 1 475 64 0 98 Scream 513 0 119 49 Watariyat 2 476 64 0 99 Punch 514 0 113 46 Pizzicato 477 64 0 100 Heartbeat 515 0 121 82 Solo 1 478 64 0 101 Footsteps 516 0 124 82 Solo 2 479 64 0 113 Machine Gun 517 0 122 62 Brass 480 64 0 114 Laser Gun 481 64 0 115 Explosion 518 126 0 37 Arabic Kit 482 64 0 116 Firework 519 126 0 38 Khaligi Kit 520 126 0 39 Irani Kit 521 126 0 65 Arabic Mix Kit 522 126 0 66 Khaligi Mix Kit 523 126 0 67 Irani Mix Kit Voice Name ORIENTAL ORIENTAL PERCUSSION The voice number with an asterisk (*) is XGlite optional voice. Voice-Nummern mit einem Stern (*) sind optionale XGlite-Voices. Le numéro de voix porteur d’un astérisque (*) est une voix XGlite en option. 211 MIDI Program MSB LSB Change# (0 - 127) (0 - 127) (1 - 128) Bank Select Voice No. 442 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi 77 Drum Kit & Oriental Perussion Kit List / Drum-Kits und orientalische Percussion• “ ” indicates that the drum sound is the same as “Standard Kit 1”. • Each percussion voice uses one note. • The MIDI Note # and Note are actually one octave lower than keyboard Note # and Note. For example, in “109: Standard Kit 1”, the “Seq Click H” (Note# 36/Note C1) corresponds to (Note# 24/Note C0). • Key Off: Keys marked “O” stop sounding the instant they are released. • Voices with the same Alternate Note Number (*1 … 4) cannot be played simultaneously. (They are designed to be played alternately with each other.) C1 C#1 D1 E1 F1 D#1 F#1 G1 G#1 A1 B1 C2 A#1 C#2 D2 E2 F2 D#2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 B2 C3 A#2 C#3 D3 E3 F3 D#3 F#3 G3 G#3 A3 B3 C4 A#3 C#4 D4 E4 F4 D#4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 B4 C5 A#4 C#5 D5 E5 F5 D#5 F#5 G5 G#5 A5 B5 C6 109 127/0/1 110 127/0/2 111 127/0/9 112 127/0/17 113 127/0/25 Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2 Room Kit Rock Kit Electronic Kit Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch Push Scratch Pull Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare H Soft Sticks Bass Drum Soft Open Rim Shot Bass Drum Hard Bass Drum Side Stick Snare M Hand Clap Snare H Hard Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Reverse Cymbal Snare H Soft 2 SD Rock H Hi Q 2 Snare L Bass Drum H Open Rim Shot 2 Bass Drum 2 Bass Drum H BD Rock BD Rock BD Gate Snare M 2 SD Room L SD Rock L SD Rock L Snare H Hard 2 SD Room H Room Tom 1 SD Rock Rim Rock Tom 1 SD Rock H E Tom 1 Room Tom 2 Rock Tom 2 E Tom 2 Room Tom 3 Rock Tom 3 E Tom 3 Room Tom 4 Room Tom 5 Rock Tom 4 Rock Tom 5 E Tom 4 E Tom 5 Room Tom 6 Rock Tom 6 E Tom 6 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi Scratch Push Scratch Pull 212 78 A#5 Voice No. MSB(0-127) / LSB(0-127) / PC(1-128) Keyboard MIDI Key Alternate assign off Note# Note Note# Note 25 C# 0 13 C# -1 3 26 D 0 14 D -1 3 27 D# 0 15 D# -1 28 E 0 16 E -1 29 F 0 17 F -1 4 30 F# 0 18 F# -1 4 31 G 0 19 G -1 32 G# 0 20 G# -1 33 A 0 21 A -1 34 A# 0 22 A# -1 35 B 0 23 B -1 36 C 1 24 C 0 37 C# 1 25 C# 0 38 D 1 26 D 0 O 39 D# 1 27 D# 0 40 E 1 28 E 0 O 41 F 1 29 F 0 O 42 F# 1 30 F# 0 43 G 1 31 G 0 44 G# 1 32 G# 0 45 A 1 33 A 0 46 A# 1 34 A# 0 47 B 1 35 B 0 48 C 2 36 C 1 49 C# 2 37 C# 1 50 D 2 38 D 1 51 D# 2 39 D# 1 52 E 2 40 E 1 53 F 2 41 F 1 54 F# 2 42 F# 1 1 55 G 2 43 G 1 56 G# 2 44 G# 1 1 57 A 2 45 A 1 58 A# 2 46 A# 1 1 59 B 2 47 B 1 60 C 3 48 C 2 61 C# 3 49 C# 2 62 D 3 50 D 2 63 D# 3 51 D# 2 64 E 3 52 E 2 65 F 3 53 F 2 66 F# 3 54 F# 2 67 G 3 55 G 2 68 G# 3 56 G# 2 69 A 3 57 A 2 70 A# 3 58 A# 2 71 B 3 59 B 2 72 C 4 60 C 3 73 C# 4 61 C# 3 74 D 4 62 D 3 75 D# 4 63 D# 3 76 E 4 64 E 3 77 F 4 65 F 3 78 F# 4 66 F# 3 79 G 4 67 G 3 80 G# 4 68 G# 3 81 A 4 69 A 3 82 A# 4 70 A# 3 83 B 4 71 B 3 O 84 C 5 72 C 4 O 85 C# 5 73 C# 4 86 D 5 74 D 4 O 87 D# 5 75 D# 4 88 E 5 76 E 4 89 F 5 77 F 4 90 F# 5 78 F# 4 91 G 5 79 G 4 92 G# 5 80 G# 4 2 93 A 5 81 A 4 2 94 A# 5 82 A# 4 95 B 5 83 B 4 96 C 6 84 C 5 97 C# 6 85 C# 5 98 D 6 86 D 5 99 D# 6 87 D# 5 100 E 6 88 E 5 101 F 6 89 F 5 102 F# 6 90 F# 5 103 G 6 91 G 5 • „ “ bedeutet, dass der Schlagzeugklang gleich „Standard Kit 1“ ist. • Jede Perkussionsnote belegt eine Note. • Die MIDI-Note # und Note sind in Wirklichkeit eine Octave tiefer als hier aufgeführt. Beispiel: In „109: Standard Kit 1“ entspricht die „Seq Click H“ (Note# 36/Note C1) der Note (Note# 24/Note C0). • Key Off: Mit „O“ bezeichnete Tasten hören sofort auf zu klingen, sobald sie losgelassen werden. • Stimmen mit derselben Alternate Note Number (*1 … 4) können nicht gleichzeitig gespielt werden. (Diese Stimmen sind dazu gedacht, wechselweise gespielt zu werden.) Kits-Liste / Liste des kits de batterie et des kits de percussions orientales • « » indique que les sonorités de percussion sont identiques à celles de « Standard Kit 1 ». • Chaque voix de percussion utilise une note unique. • Le numéro de note MIDI (Note #) et la note MIDI se situent en réalité à une octave inférieure à celle qui est indiquée dans la liste. Par exemple, dans « 109 : Standard Kit 1 », « Seq Click H » (Note# 36/Note C1) correspond à (Note# 24/Note C0). • Key Off : pour les touches signalées par « O », l’émission de sons s’arrête instantanément aussitôt que les touches sont relâchées. • Les voix portant un même numéro de note alternative (*1 … 4) ne peuvent pas être jouées simultanément. (Elles sont en effet conçues pour être interprétées en alternance). C1 C#1 D1 E1 F1 D#1 F#1 G1 G#1 A1 B1 C2 A#1 C#2 D2 E2 F2 D#2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 B2 C3 A#2 C#3 D3 E3 F3 D#3 F#3 G3 G#3 A3 B3 C4 A#3 C#4 D4 E4 F4 D#4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 B4 C5 A#4 C#5 D5 E5 F5 D#5 F#5 G5 G#5 A5 B5 213 C6 A#5 Voice No. MSB(0-127) / LSB(0-127) / PC(1-128) Keyboard MIDI Key Alternate off assign Note# Note Note# Note 25 C# 0 13 C# -1 3 26 D 0 14 D -1 3 27 D# 0 15 D# -1 28 E 0 16 E -1 29 F 0 17 F -1 4 30 F# 0 18 F# -1 4 31 G 0 19 G -1 32 G# 0 20 G# -1 33 A 0 21 A -1 34 A# 0 22 A# -1 35 B 0 23 B -1 36 C 1 24 C 0 37 C# 1 25 C# 0 38 D 1 26 D 0 O 39 D# 1 27 D# 0 40 E 1 28 E 0 O 41 F 1 29 F 0 O 42 F# 1 30 F# 0 43 G 1 31 G 0 44 G# 1 32 G# 0 45 A 1 33 A 0 46 A# 1 34 A# 0 47 B 1 35 B 0 48 C 2 36 C 1 49 C# 2 37 C# 1 50 D 2 38 D 1 51 D# 2 39 D# 1 52 E 2 40 E 1 53 F 2 41 F 1 54 F# 2 42 F# 1 1 55 G 2 43 G 1 56 G# 2 44 G# 1 1 57 A 2 45 A 1 58 A# 2 46 A# 1 1 59 B 2 47 B 1 60 C 3 48 C 2 61 C# 3 49 C# 2 62 D 3 50 D 2 63 D# 3 51 D# 2 64 E 3 52 E 2 65 F 3 53 F 2 66 F# 3 54 F# 2 67 G 3 55 G 2 68 G# 3 56 G# 2 69 A 3 57 A 2 70 A# 3 58 A# 2 71 B 3 59 B 2 72 C 4 60 C 3 73 C# 4 61 C# 3 74 D 4 62 D 3 75 D# 4 63 D# 3 76 E 4 64 E 3 77 F 4 65 F 3 78 F# 4 66 F# 3 79 G 4 67 G 3 80 G# 4 68 G# 3 81 A 4 69 A 3 82 A# 4 70 A# 3 83 B 4 71 B 3 O 84 C 5 72 C 4 O 85 C# 5 73 C# 4 86 D 5 74 D 4 O 87 D# 5 75 D# 4 88 E 5 76 E 4 89 F 5 77 F 4 90 F# 5 78 F# 4 91 G 5 79 G 4 92 G# 5 80 G# 4 2 93 A 5 81 A 4 2 94 A# 5 82 A# 4 95 B 5 83 B 4 96 C 6 84 C 5 97 C# 6 85 C# 5 98 D 6 86 D 5 99 D# 6 87 D# 5 100 E 6 88 E 5 101 F 6 89 F 5 102 F# 6 90 F# 5 103 G 6 91 G 5 109 127/0/1 114 127/0/26 115 127/0/28 116 127/0/33 117 127/0/41 Standard Kit 1 Analog Kit Dance Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch Push Scratch Pull Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare H Soft Sticks Bass Drum Soft Open Rim Shot Bass Drum Hard Bass Drum Side Stick Snare M Hand Clap Snare H Hard Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Reverse Cymbal Reverse Cymbal Hi Q 2 SD Rock H Hi Q 2 AnSD Snappy SD Jazz H Light Bass Drum H BD Analog L BD Analog H Analog Side Stick Analog Snare 1 AnBD Dance-1 AnSD OpenRim AnBD Dance-2 AnBD Dance-3 Analog Side Stick AnSD Q BD Jazz BD Jazz SD Jazz L Brush Slap Analog Snare 2 Analog Tom 1 Analog HH Closed 1 Analog Tom 2 Analog HH Closed 2 Analog Tom 3 Analog HH Open Analog Tom 4 Analog Tom 5 Analog Cymbal Analog Tom 6 AnSD Ana+Acoustic Analog Tom 1 Analog HH Closed 3 Analog Tom 2 Analog HH Closed 4 Analog Tom 3 Analog HH Open 2 Analog Tom 4 Analog Tom 5 Analog Cymbal Analog Tom 6 SD Jazz M Jazz Tom 1 Brush Tap Brush Tom 1 Analog Cowbell Analog Cowbell Analog Conga H Analog Conga M Analog Conga L Analog Conga H Analog Conga M Analog Conga L Analog Maracas Analog Maracas Analog Claves Analog Claves Scratch Push Scratch Pull Scratch Push Scratch Pull Brush Slap L Jazz Tom 2 Brush Tom 2 Jazz Tom 3 Brush Tom 3 Jazz Tom 4 Jazz Tom 5 Brush Tom 4 Brush Tom 5 Jazz Tom 6 Brush Tom 6 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi 79 Drum Kit & Oriental Perussion Kit List / Drum-Kits und orientalische Percussion-Kits-Liste / Liste des kits de batterie et des kits de percussions orientales C1 C#1 D1 E1 F1 D#1 F#1 G1 G#1 A1 B1 C2 A#1 C#2 D2 E2 F2 D#2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 B2 C3 A#2 C#3 D3 E3 F3 D#3 F#3 G3 G#3 A3 B3 C4 A#3 C#4 D4 E4 F4 D#4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 B4 C5 A#4 C#5 D5 E5 F5 D#5 F#5 G5 G#5 A5 B5 C6 109 127/0/1 118 127/0/49 119 126/0/1 120 126/0/2 121 126/0/113 Standard Kit 1 Symphony Kit SFX Kit 1 SFX Kit 2 Sound Effect Kit Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch Push Scratch Pull Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare H Soft Sticks Bass Drum Soft Open Rim Shot Bass Drum Hard Bass Drum Side Stick Snare M Hand Clap Snare H Hard Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Drum Loop Bass Drum L Gran Cassa Gran Cassa Mute Cutting Noise Cutting Noise 2 Marching Sn M String Slap Marching Sn H Jazz Tom 1 Phone Call Door Squeak Door Slam Scratch Cut Scratch Wind Chime Telephone Ring 2 Jazz Tom 2 Jazz Tom 3 Jazz Tom 4 Jazz Tom 5 Hand Cym. L Jazz Tom 6 Hand Cym.Short L Flute Key Click Hand Cym. H Hand Cym.Short H PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi Car Engine Ignition Car Tires Squeal Car Passing Car Crash Siren Train Jet Plane Starship Burst Roller Coaster Submarine Heartbeat Footsteps Door Squeak Door Slam Applause Camera Horn Hiccup Cuckoo Clock Stream Frog Rooster Dog Cat Owl Horse Gallop Horse Neigh Cow Lion Scratch Yo! Go! Get up! Whoow! Huuaah! Shower Thunder Wind Stream Bubble Feed Laugh Scream Punch Heartbeat Footsteps Uh!+Hit Dog Horse Bird Tweet 2 Machine Gun Laser Gun Explosion Firework Maou 214 80 A#5 Voice No. MSB(0-127) / LSB(0-127) / PC(1-128) Keyboard MIDI Key Alternate off assign Note# Note Note# Note 25 C# 0 13 C# -1 3 26 D 0 14 D -1 3 27 D# 0 15 D# -1 28 E 0 16 E -1 29 F 0 17 F -1 4 30 F# 0 18 F# -1 4 31 G 0 19 G -1 32 G# 0 20 G# -1 33 A 0 21 A -1 34 A# 0 22 A# -1 35 B 0 23 B -1 36 C 1 24 C 0 37 C# 1 25 C# 0 38 D 1 26 D 0 O 39 D# 1 27 D# 0 40 E 1 28 E 0 O 41 F 1 29 F 0 O 42 F# 1 30 F# 0 43 G 1 31 G 0 44 G# 1 32 G# 0 45 A 1 33 A 0 46 A# 1 34 A# 0 47 B 1 35 B 0 48 C 2 36 C 1 49 C# 2 37 C# 1 50 D 2 38 D 1 51 D# 2 39 D# 1 52 E 2 40 E 1 53 F 2 41 F 1 54 F# 2 42 F# 1 1 55 G 2 43 G 1 56 G# 2 44 G# 1 1 57 A 2 45 A 1 58 A# 2 46 A# 1 1 59 B 2 47 B 1 60 C 3 48 C 2 61 C# 3 49 C# 2 62 D 3 50 D 2 63 D# 3 51 D# 2 64 E 3 52 E 2 65 F 3 53 F 2 66 F# 3 54 F# 2 67 G 3 55 G 2 68 G# 3 56 G# 2 69 A 3 57 A 2 70 A# 3 58 A# 2 71 B 3 59 B 2 72 C 4 60 C 3 73 C# 4 61 C# 3 74 D 4 62 D 3 75 D# 4 63 D# 3 76 E 4 64 E 3 77 F 4 65 F 3 78 F# 4 66 F# 3 79 G 4 67 G 3 80 G# 4 68 G# 3 81 A 4 69 A 3 82 A# 4 70 A# 3 83 B 4 71 B 3 O 84 C 5 72 C 4 O 85 C# 5 73 C# 4 86 D 5 74 D 4 O 87 D# 5 75 D# 4 88 E 5 76 E 4 89 F 5 77 F 4 90 F# 5 78 F# 4 91 G 5 79 G 4 92 G# 5 80 G# 4 2 93 A 5 81 A 4 2 94 A# 5 82 A# 4 95 B 5 83 B 4 96 C 6 84 C 5 97 C# 6 85 C# 5 98 D 6 86 D 5 99 D# 6 87 D# 5 100 E 6 88 E 5 101 F 6 89 F 5 102 F# 6 90 F# 5 103 G 6 91 G 5 Drum Kit & Oriental Perussion Kit List / Drum-Kits und orientalische Percussion-Kits-Liste / Liste des kits de batterie et des kits de percussions orientales C1 C#1 D1 E1 F1 D#1 F#1 G1 G#1 A1 B1 C2 A#1 C#2 D2 E2 F2 D#2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 B2 C3 A#2 C#3 D3 E3 F3 D#3 F#3 G3 G#3 A3 B3 C4 A#3 C#4 D4 E4 F4 D#4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 B4 C5 A#4 C#5 D5 E5 F5 D#5 F#5 G5 G#5 A5 B5 215 C6 A#5 Voice No. MSB(0-127) / LSB(0-127) / PC(1-128) Keyboard MIDI Key Alternate off assign Note# Note Note# Note 25 C# 0 13 C# -1 3 26 D 0 14 D -1 3 27 D# 0 15 D# -1 28 E 0 16 E -1 29 F 0 17 F -1 4 30 F# 0 18 F# -1 4 31 G 0 19 G -1 32 G# 0 20 G# -1 33 A 0 21 A -1 34 A# 0 22 A# -1 35 B 0 23 B -1 36 C 1 24 C 0 37 C# 1 25 C# 0 38 D 1 26 D 0 O 39 D# 1 27 D# 0 40 E 1 28 E 0 O 41 F 1 29 F 0 O 42 F# 1 30 F# 0 43 G 1 31 G 0 44 G# 1 32 G# 0 45 A 1 33 A 0 46 A# 1 34 A# 0 47 B 1 35 B 0 48 C 2 36 C 1 49 C# 2 37 C# 1 50 D 2 38 D 1 51 D# 2 39 D# 1 52 E 2 40 E 1 53 F 2 41 F 1 54 F# 2 42 F# 1 1 55 G 2 43 G 1 56 G# 2 44 G# 1 1 57 A 2 45 A 1 58 A# 2 46 A# 1 1 59 B 2 47 B 1 60 C 3 48 C 2 61 C# 3 49 C# 2 62 D 3 50 D 2 63 D# 3 51 D# 2 64 E 3 52 E 2 65 F 3 53 F 2 66 F# 3 54 F# 2 67 G 3 55 G 2 68 G# 3 56 G# 2 69 A 3 57 A 2 70 A# 3 58 A# 2 71 B 3 59 B 2 72 C 4 60 C 3 73 C# 4 61 C# 3 74 D 4 62 D 3 75 D# 4 63 D# 3 76 E 4 64 E 3 77 F 4 65 F 3 78 F# 4 66 F# 3 79 G 4 67 G 3 80 G# 4 68 G# 3 81 A 4 69 A 3 82 A# 4 70 A# 3 83 B 4 71 B 3 O 84 C 5 72 C 4 O 85 C# 5 73 C# 4 86 D 5 74 D 4 O 87 D# 5 75 D# 4 88 E 5 76 E 4 89 F 5 77 F 4 90 F# 5 78 F# 4 91 G 5 79 G 4 92 G# 5 80 G# 4 2 93 A 5 81 A 4 2 94 A# 5 82 A# 4 95 B 5 83 B 4 96 C 6 84 C 5 97 C# 6 85 C# 5 98 D 6 86 D 5 99 D# 6 87 D# 5 100 E 6 88 E 5 101 F 6 89 F 5 102 F# 6 90 F# 5 103 G 6 91 G 5 109 127/0/1 Standard Kit 1 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch Push Scratch Pull Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare H Soft Sticks Bass Drum Soft Open Rim Shot Bass Drum Hard Bass Drum Side Stick Snare M Hand Clap Snare H Hard Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree 518 126/0/37 Arabic Kit Zarb Back mf Zarb Tom f Zarb Eshareh Zarb Whipping Tombak Tom f Neghareh Tom f Tombak Back f Neghareh Back f Tombak Snap f Neghareh Pelang f Tombak Trill Khaligi Clap 1 Zalgouta Open Khaligi Clap 2 Zalgouta Close Arabic Hand Clap Tabel Tak 1 Sagat 1 Tabel Dom Sagat 2 Tabel Tak 2 Sagat 3 Riq Tik 3 Riq Tik 2 Riq Tik Hard 1 Riq Tik 1 Riq Tik Hard 2 Riq Tik Hard 3 Riq Tish Riq Snouj 2 Riq Roll Riq Snouj Riq Sak Riq Snouj 3 Riq Snouj 4 Riq Tak 1 Riq Brass 1 Riq Tak 2 Riq Brass 2 Riq Dom Katem Tak Doff Katem Dom Katem Sak 1 Katem Tak 1 Katem Sak 2 Katem Tak 2 Daholla Sak 2 Daholla Sak 1 Daholla Tak 1 Daholla Dom Daholla Tak 2 Tablah Prok Tablah dom 2 Tabla Roll of Edge Tablah Tak Finger 4 Tablah Tak Trill 1 Tablah Tak Finger 3 Tablah Tak Trill 2 Tablah Tak Finger 2 Tablah Tak Finger 1 Tablah Tik 2 Tablah Tik 4 Tablah Tik 3 Tablah Tik 1 Tablah Tak 3 Tablah Tak 1 Tablah Tak 4 Tablah Tak 2 Tablah Sak 2 Tablah Tremolo Tablah Sak 1 Tablah Dom 1 519 126/0/38 520 126/0/39 Khaligi Kit Irani Kit Khaligi Bongo Low Dom Khaligi Bongo Low Tak Khaligi Bongo High Sak Khaligi Bongo High Dom Tabel Lewa High Sak Khaligi Bongo Snap Tabel Lewa High Dom Lewa Cymbal 2 Tabel Lewa Big Dom Lewa Cymbal 1 Tabel Lewa Big Tak Tablah Big Dom 1 Tablah Big Tak 1 Tablah Big Sak 1 Tablah Big Dom 2 Tablah Big Tak 2 Tablah Big Sak 2 Tablah Small Snap 2 Tablah Small Dom Tablah Small Snap Tablah Small Tik Tablah Small Sak Manjoor Twaisat 1 Twaisat 4 Open Twaisat 5 Open Twaisat 2 Tar Low Dom 1 Tar Low Sak 1 Tar Segal Dom Tar Low Dom 2 Tar Segal Tak Tar Low Dom 2 Tar Segal Sak Arabic Hand Clap Tar High Dom 1 Tar High Sak 1 Tar High Dom 2 Tar High Sak 2 Khaligi Clap 1 Khaligi Clap 2 Merwas Solo 1 Dom Merwas Solo 2 Dom Merwas Solo 1 Sak Merwas Solo 2 Sak Merwas Solo 1 Tak Merwas Solo 2 Tak Tar Barashim Group Dom Tar Barashim Group Sak Tar Barashim Group Tak Tar Barashim Solo Sak Tar Barashim Solo Dom Tar Barashim Solo Tak Yahla Dom 1 Yahla Tak 1 Yahla Dom 2 Yahla Tak 2 Nagara High Nagara Low Zeer Low Dom 1 Zeer Low Roll Zeer Low Dom 2 Zeer High Roll Zeer Low Dom 2 Zeer High Dom 1 Tabel Low Dom Zeer High Dom 2 Tabel Low Tak Tabel High Dom Tabel High Sak Tabel High Tak Tabel Low Sak Daf Tom Daf Chain Up Daf Back Daf Chain Down Daf Chap Daf Full Roll Daf Chain Roll Daf Whipping Roll Clap Finger Snap 1 Neghareh Roll Neghareh Tom Neghareh Snap (Pelang) Neghareh Chap Neghareh Eshareh Neghareh Back Kurdish Dohol Low Kurdish Dohol High Kurdish Dohol Low Buzz Lurish Dohol Low Lurish Dohol Low Buzz Lurish Dohol High Tombak Full Roll Tombak Timpani Roll Tombak Tom Tombak Eshareh Right Tombak Back Tombak Eshareh Left Tombak Snap Zarb Tom Zarb Whipping Zarb Back Zarb Eshareh Zarb Chap Zarb Full Roll Zarb Snap Zarb Whipping Roll Dayereh Roll Dayereh Tom Dayereh Eshareh Dayereh Back Dayereh Snap Dayereh Edge Roll PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi 81 Drum Kit & Oriental Perussion Kit List / Drum-Kits und orientalische Percussion-Kits-Liste / Liste des kits de batterie et des kits de percussions orientales C1 C#1 D1 E1 F1 D#1 F#1 G1 G#1 A1 B1 C2 A#1 C#2 D2 E2 F2 D#2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 B2 C3 A#2 C#3 D3 E3 F3 D#3 F#3 G3 G#3 A3 B3 C4 A#3 C#4 D4 E4 F4 D#4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 B4 C5 A#4 C#5 D5 E5 F5 D#5 F#5 G5 G#5 A5 B5 C6 109 127/0/1 Standard Kit 1 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch Push Scratch Pull Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare H Soft Sticks Bass Drum Soft Open Rim Shot Bass Drum Hard Bass Drum Side Stick Snare M Hand Clap Snare H Hard Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree 521 126/0/65 Arabic Mix Kit Conga Analog H Conga Analog M Conga Analog L Vibraslap Kick Techno L Side Stick Arabic Mix Snare Techno Guiro Long Kick Techno Q Open Rim Shot Kick Kick Arabic Mix Snare Tight Snare Arabic Mix Hand Clap Snare Tom Electro 1 Hi-Hat Closed Arabic Mix Tom Electro 2 Hi-Hat Closed 3 Tom Electro 3 Hi-Hat Open Arabic Mix Tom Electro 4 Tom Electro 5 Crash Cymbal 1 Tom Electro 6 Hi-Hat Open 3 Reverse Cymbal Timbale L Conga H Open Timbale H Conga H Mute Tambourine Conga L Cowbell Claves Bongo H Wood Block H Bongo L Wood Block L Iranian Kurdish Dohol Low f Cabasa Iranian Kurdish Dohol High f Shaker Snap 1 Maracas Snap 2 Khaligi Twaisat 3 Khaligi Twaisat 1 Khaligi Twaisat 2 Khaligi Twaisat 5 Open Khaligi Twaisat 4 Open Khaligi Tablah Small Dom Khaligi Tar Barashim Group Dom Khaligi Tablah Small Snap Khaligi Tar Barashim Group Sak Khaligi Tablah Small Sak Khaligi Tar Barashim Group Tak Khaligi Tablah Small Tik Khaligi Tablah Big Dom 1 Khaligi Tar Segal Dom Khaligi Tablah Big Tak 1 Khaligi Tar Segal Tak Khaligi Tablah Big Sak 1 Tablah Dom 1 Tablah Tak 1 Tablah Tremolo Tablah Tak 2 Tablah Tik 1 Tablah Sak 1 Tablah Tik 3 Tablah Tik 2 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi 522 126/0/66 Khaligi Mix Kit Zalgouta Open Bell Tree Zalgouta Close Timbale H Timbale L Conga H Mute Bongo H Conga H Open Bongo L Conga L Shaker Tablah Dom 1 Tablah Tak Finger 3 Tablah Tik 3 Tablah Tak Finger 4 Tablah Tik 4 Tablah Tik 1 Tablah Tremolo Cowbell Hand Clap Tambourine Snare Tight Kick Analog Short Kick Crash Cymbal 1 Snare Crash Cymbal 2 Side Stick Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Finger Snap 1 Chinese Cymbal Finger Snap 2 Riq Brass 2 Riq Brass 1 Riq Tish Riq Snouj 1 Riq Roll Riq Snouj 2 RIQ Sak 1 Riq Dom Riq Snouj 3 Tombak Back Tombak Tom Tombak Snap Tombak Eshareh Right Claves Daf Chap Daf Tom Daf Full Roll Triangle Mute Daf Back Triangle Open Neghareh Tom Neghareh Back Neghareh Roll Neghareh Snap (Pelang) Wood Block H Wood Block L Zarb Back Zarb Tom Zarb Eshareh Zarb Whipping Zarb Chap Hi-Hat Closed Analog Hi-Hat Open Analog 523 126/0/67 Irani Mix Kit Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Open Conga L Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Ride Cymbal 1 Kick Side Stick Snare Crash Cymbal 1 Snare Tight Khaligi Tablah Big Dom 1 Khaligi Tablah Big Sak 1 Khaligi Tablah Big Tak 1 Arabic Doholla Sak 1 Arabic Doholla Tom Arabic Doholla Tak 2 Arabic Doholla Tak 1 Daf Tom Daf Chain Up Daf Back Daf Chain Down Daf Chap Daf Full Roll Daf Chain Roll Daf Whipping Roll Clap Finger Snap 1 Neghareh Roll Neghareh Tom Neghareh Snap (Pelang) Neghareh Chap Neghareh Eshareh Neghareh Back Kurdish Dohol Low Kurdish Dohol High Kurdish Dohol Low Buzz Lurish Dohol Low Lurish Dohol Low Buzz Lurish Dohol High Tombak Full Roll Tombak Timpani Roll Tombak Tom Tombak Eshareh Right Tombak Back Tombak Eshareh Left Tombak Snap Zarb Tom Zarb Whipping Zarb Back Zarb Eshareh Zarb Chap Zarb Full Roll Zarb Snap Zarb Whipping Roll Dayereh Roll Dayereh Tom Dayereh Eshareh Dayereh Back Dayereh Snap Dayereh Edge Roll Twaisat 4 Open Twaisat 2 Twaisat 5 Open Twaisat 1 Timbale H Timbale L 216 82 A#5 Voice No. MSB(0-127) / LSB(0-127) / PC(1-128) Keyboard MIDI Key Alternate off assign Note# Note Note# Note 25 C# 0 13 C# -1 3 26 D 0 14 D -1 3 27 D# 0 15 D# -1 28 E 0 16 E -1 29 F 0 17 F -1 4 30 F# 0 18 F# -1 4 31 G 0 19 G -1 32 G# 0 20 G# -1 33 A 0 21 A -1 34 A# 0 22 A# -1 35 B 0 23 B -1 36 C 1 24 C 0 37 C# 1 25 C# 0 38 D 1 26 D 0 O 39 D# 1 27 D# 0 40 E 1 28 E 0 O 41 F 1 29 F 0 O 42 F# 1 30 F# 0 43 G 1 31 G 0 44 G# 1 32 G# 0 45 A 1 33 A 0 46 A# 1 34 A# 0 47 B 1 35 B 0 48 C 2 36 C 1 49 C# 2 37 C# 1 50 D 2 38 D 1 51 D# 2 39 D# 1 52 E 2 40 E 1 53 F 2 41 F 1 54 F# 2 42 F# 1 1 55 G 2 43 G 1 56 G# 2 44 G# 1 1 57 A 2 45 A 1 58 A# 2 46 A# 1 1 59 B 2 47 B 1 60 C 3 48 C 2 61 C# 3 49 C# 2 62 D 3 50 D 2 63 D# 3 51 D# 2 64 E 3 52 E 2 65 F 3 53 F 2 66 F# 3 54 F# 2 67 G 3 55 G 2 68 G# 3 56 G# 2 69 A 3 57 A 2 70 A# 3 58 A# 2 71 B 3 59 B 2 72 C 4 60 C 3 73 C# 4 61 C# 3 74 D 4 62 D 3 75 D# 4 63 D# 3 76 E 4 64 E 3 77 F 4 65 F 3 78 F# 4 66 F# 3 79 G 4 67 G 3 80 G# 4 68 G# 3 81 A 4 69 A 3 82 A# 4 70 A# 3 83 B 4 71 B 3 O 84 C 5 72 C 4 O 85 C# 5 73 C# 4 86 D 5 74 D 4 O 87 D# 5 75 D# 4 88 E 5 76 E 4 89 F 5 77 F 4 90 F# 5 78 F# 4 91 G 5 79 G 4 92 G# 5 80 G# 4 2 93 A 5 81 A 4 2 94 A# 5 82 A# 4 95 B 5 83 B 4 96 C 6 84 C 5 97 C# 6 85 C# 5 98 D 6 86 D 5 99 D# 6 87 D# 5 100 E 6 88 E 5 101 F 6 89 F 5 102 F# 6 90 F# 5 103 G 6 91 G 5 Style List / Style-Liste / Liste des styles Style No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 217 41 Style Name 8 Beat 8BeatModern 60’s8Beat 8Beat 60’sRock RockShuffle 8BeatRock 16 Beat 16Beat PopShuffle GuitarPop Ballad PianoBallad LoveSong 6/8ModernEP PopBallad 16BeatBallad Dance EuroTrance SwingHouse Clubdance TechnoParty Disco 70’sDisco LatinDisco Swing & Jazz BigBandFast BigBandBallad JazzClub Swing Five/Four R&B Soul 6/8Soul Rock&Roll ComboBoogie Latin BrazilianSamba BossaNova PopBossa Tijuana DiscoLatin Mambo Salsa Beguine GuitarRumba RumbaFlamenca Reggae Ballroom VienneseWaltz Style No. 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 Style Name EnglishWaltz Foxtrot Tango Samba ChaChaCha Rumba Jive March & Waltz March 6/8March SwingWaltz JazzWaltz Arabic Saeidy1 Saeidy2 Maksoum Karachi Laff Baladi Ayoub MaksoumSarih Katakoufti Soudasi Ibrahimi Zaffah Hajaa Khaligi Arabic Rumba WehdaKabira WehdaSaghira Wehda SaeidyDance LaffDance KarachiDance Jerk MasmoudiKabir Samai Khaligi KhaligiRhumba Shakshaka Khebaiti Emarati Muruba Bastah Dazzah Sharah Seeroos AlBudoor Wadea Samri Style No. 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 Style Name Mathoalath Ashori Liwa Tanborah Sout Adani Maghrebi Ray1 Ray2 Ray3 Khammari Iranian BandariDance Tehrani 1 Azari 1 Kurdish 1 Gilaki Afghani Tehrani 2 Lezgi Reng Avaaz Asouri RengTraditional RengOrch Bandari Azari 2 Kurdish 2 Kurdish 3 Greek Zeibekikos Tsifteteli Syrtorumba Hasapiko Hasaposerviko Kalamatianos Tsamikos Karsilamas 5/8 Greek Turkish 2/4OyunHavasi ArapOryantal Ciftetelli Vahde Azeri-Kafkas 5/8OyunHavasi 7/8OyunHavasi Misket 9/8Standart Halay PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi 83 Effect Type List / Effekttypliste / ● Harmony Types / Harmony-Typen / Types d’effets Harmony No. 01 Duet 02 Trio 03 Block 04 Country 05 Octave 06 Trill 1/4 note 07 Trill 1/6 note 08 Trill 1/8 note 09 Trill 1/12 note 10 Trill 1/16 note 11 Trill 1/24 note 12 Trill 1/32 note 13 Tremolo 1/4 note 14 Tremolo 1/6 note 15 Tremolo 1/8 note 16 Tremolo 1/12 note 17 Tremolo 1/16 note 18 Tremolo 1/24 note 19 Tremolo 1/32 note 20 Echo 1/4 note 21 Echo 1/6 note 22 Echo 1/8 note 23 Echo 1/12 note 24 Echo 1/16 note 25 Echo 1/24 note 26 Echo 1/32 note Description If you want to sound one of the harmony types 01-05, play keys to the right side of the Split Point while playing chords in the left side of the keyboard after turning Auto Accompaniment on. One, two or three notes of harmony are automatically added to the note you play. When playing back a Song that includes chord data, harmony is applied whichever keys are played. Wenn Sie möchten, dass einer der Harmonietypen 01-05 erklingt, schlagen Sie bitte nach Aktivierung der Begleitautomatik Tasten rechts vom Splitpunkt an, während Sie auf der linken Tastaturseite Akkorde spielen. Der von Ihnen gespielten Note werden automatisch eine, zwei oder drei Harmonienoten hinzugefügt. Bei der Wiedergabe von Songs mit Akkorddaten wird der Harmonieeffekt angewendet, gleichgültig, welche Tasten angeschlagen werden. Si vous voulez entendre un des types d’harmonie 01-05, jouez des notes à droite du point de partage tout en jouant des accords dans la partie gauche du clavier après avoir activé l’accompagnement automatique. Une, deux ou trois notes d’harmonie sont automatiquement ajoutées à la note que vous jouez. Lors de la reproduction d’un morceau contenant des données d’accord, l’harmonie est appliquée quelles que soient les notes jouées. 3 If you keep holding down two different notes, the notes alternate (in a trill) continuously. 3 Wenn Sie zwei verschiedene Noten gedrückt halten, werden die Noten fortlaufend abwechselnd gespielt (als Triller). Si vous maintenez deux notes différentes enfoncées, les notes alternent en continu (dans une trille). 3 3 If you keep holding down a single note, the note is repeated continuously. (The repeat speed differs depending on the selected type.) 3 Wenn Sie eine einzelne Note gedrückt halten, wird die Note fortlaufend wiederholt. (Die Wiederholungsgeschwindigkeit hängt vom ausgewählten Typ ab.) Si vous maintenez une note unique enfoncée, celle-ci est répétée en continu. (La vitesse de répétition varie en fonction du type sélectionné.) 3 3 If you keep holding down a note, echo is applied to the note played. (The echo speed differs depending on the selected type.) 3 Wenn Sie eine Note gedrückt halten, wird auf die gespielte Note die Echofunktion angewendet. (Die Echogeschwindigkeit hängt vom ausgewählten Typ ab.) Si vous maintenez une note enfoncée, un écho est appliqué à la note jouée. (La vitesse de l’écho varie en fonction du type sélectionné.) 3 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi 218 84 Harmony Type Liste des types d’effets ● Reverb Types / Reverb-Typen / Types d’effets Reverb No. Reverb Type Description 01-03 Hall 1-3 Concert hall reverb. Nachhall in einem Konzertsaal. Réverbération d’une salle de concert. 04-05 Room 1-2 Small room reverb. Nachhall in einem kleineren Raum. Réverbération d’une petite salle. 06-07 Stage 1-2 Reverb for solo instruments. Halleffekte für Soloinstrumente. Réverbération pour instruments solo. 08-09 Plate 1-2 Simulated steel plate reverb. Simulation des Halls in einer Stahlplatte. Simulation de la réverbération d’une plaque d’acier. Off No effect. Kein Halleffekt. Pas d’effet. 10 ● Chorus Types / Chorus-Typen / Types d’effets Chorus No. Description 1-2 Chorus 1-2 Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing. Herkömmlicher Chorus-Effekt mit vollem und warmem Klang. Programme de choeur classique avec un effet de choeur riche et chaud. 3-4 Flanger 1-2 This produces a rich, animated wavering effect in the sound. Hiermit wird eine volltönende und lebhafte Tonhöhenschwankung erzeugt. Vous obtenez un effet d’ondulation riche et animé dans le son. Off No effect. Kein Effekt. Pas d’effet. 5 219 Chorus Type PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi 85 86 220 PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi Change Control 0,32 1 6 38 7,10 11 64 71,73,74 2 Key's Ch's After Touch Pitch Bend Note ON Note OFF Velocity o x o o o x o x o x x o 9nH,v=1-127 x *1 *1 *1 0 - 127 : True voice ************** 3 x ************** Default Messages Altered Mode Note Number 1 - 16 x Default Changed Transmitted o o o x o o o o o x x o 9nH,v=1-127 x 0 - 127 0 - 127 3 x x 1 - 16 x Recognized [ PORTATONE ] MIDI Implementation Chart Basic Channel Function... YAMAHA Model PSR-A300 l i Expression Sustain Bank Select Modulation wheel Data Entry(MSB) Data Entry(LSB) Remarks Date:15-Nov-2004 Version:1.0 MIDI Implementation Chart / MIDI-Implementierungstabelle / 221 : True # x x x x o x Mode 1 : OMNI ON , POLY Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY o(120,126,127) o(121) o(122) o(123-125) o x o o x x x o o 0 - 127 o o o o o Mode 2 : OMNI ON ,MONO Mode 4 : OMNI OFF,MONO *1 Refer to #2 on pages 88, 89. :All Sound OFF :Reset All Cntrls :Local ON/OFF :All Notes OFF Mes- :Active Sense sages:Reset Aux x x x o o o : Song Pos. : Song Sel. : Tune *1 o 0 - 127 ************** o x o x o System : Clock Real Time: Commands Common System Exclusive Prog Change 72 84 91,93 96,97 100,101 o : Yes x : No Release Time Portamento Cntrl Effect 1,3 Depth RPN Inc,Dec RPN LSB,MSB Feuille d’implémentation MIDI PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi 87 MIDI Data Format / MIDI-Datenformat / NOTE: 1 By default (factory settings) the instrument ordinarily functions as a 16-channel multi-timbral tone generator, and incoming data does not affect the panel voices or panel settings. However, the MIDI messages listed below do affect the panel voices, auto accompaniment, and songs. • MIDI Master Tuning • System exclusive messages for changing the Reverb Type and Chorus Type. HINWEIS: 1 Im Standardbetrieb (Werkseinstellungen) funktioniert das Instrument gewöhnlich als multi-timbraler 16Kanal-Klangerzeuger, und eingehende Daten haben keinen Einfluß auf die Bedienfeld-Voices und die Bedienfeld-Einstellungen. Die im folgenden aufgeführten Befehle verändern jedoch dieBedienfeld-Voices, die automatische Begleitung und die Songs. • MIDI Master Tuning • Systemexklusive Meldungen zum Umschalten von Halltyp (Reverb Type) und Chorus-Typ. 2 Messages for these control change numbers cannot be transmitted from the instrument itself. However, they may be transmitted when playing the accompaniment, song or using the Harmony effect. 2 Befehle für diese Controller-Nummern können nicht vom Instrument selbst gesendet werden. Sie können jedoch gesendet werden, wenn die Begleitung gespielt oder der Harmony-Effekt verwendet wird. 3 Exclusive <GM System ON> F0H, 7EH, 7FH, 09H, 01H, F7H • This message automatically restores all default settings for the instrument, with the exception of MIDI Master Tuning. <MIDI Master Volume> F0H, 7FH, 7FH, 04H, 01H, ll, mm, F7H • This message allows the volume of all channels to be changed simultaneously (Universal System Exclusive). • The values of “mm” is used for MIDI Master Volume. (Values for “ll” are ignored.) <MIDI Master Tuning> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 27H, 30H, 00H, 00H, mm, ll, cc, F7H • This message simultaneously changes the tuning value of all channels. • The values of “mm” and “ll” are used for MIDI Master Tuning. • The default value of “mm” and “ll” are 08H and 00H, respectively. Any values can be used for “n” and “cc.” <Reverb Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 00H, mmH, llH, F7H • mm : Reverb Type MSB • ll : Reverb Type LSB Refer to the Effect Map (page 90) for details. <Chorus Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 20H, mmH, llH, F7H • mm : Chorus Type MSB • ll : Chorus Type LSB Refer to the Effect Map (page 90) for details. 4 When the accompaniment is started, an FAH message is transmitted. When accompaniment is stopped, an FCH message is transmitted.When the clock is set to External, both FAH (accompaniment start) and FCH (accompaniment stop) are recognized. 5 Local ON/OFF <Local ON> Bn, 7A, 7F <Local OFF> Bn, 7A, 00 Value for “n” is ignored. <MIDI Master Volume> F0H, 7FH, 7FH, 04H, 01H, ll, mm, F7H • Mit diesem Befehl kann die Lautstärke aller Kanäle gleichzeitig geändert werden (Universal System Exclusive). • Die Werte für „mm“ werden für MIDI Master Volume verwendet. (Werte für „ll“ werden ignoriert.) <MIDI Master Tuning> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 27H, 30H, 00H, 00H, mm, ll, cc, F7H • Durch diesen Befehl wird der Stimmungswert für alle Kanäle gleichzeitig geändert. • Die Werte von „mm“ und „ll“ werden für MIDI Master Tuning verwendet. • Der Standardwert beträgt für „mm“ 08H und für „ll“ 00H. Für „n“ und „cc“ können beliebige Werte verwendet werden. <Reverb Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 00H, mmH, llH, F7H • mm : Reverb Type MSB • ll : Reverb Type LSB Weitere Einzelheiten hierzu finden Sie in der EffektZuordnungstabelle (Seite 90). <Chorus Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 20H, mmH, llH, F7H • mm : Chorus Type MSB • ll : Chorus Type LSB Weitere Einzelheiten hierzu finden Sie in der EffektZuordnungstabelle (Seite 90). 4 Beim Starten der Begleitung wird eine FAH-Meldung gesendet. Wenn die Begleitung gestoppt wird, wird die Meldung FCH ausgegeben. Wenn die Clock auf „External“ eingestellt ist, werden sowohl FAH (Begleitung Start) als auch FCH (Begleitung Stop) erkannt. 5 Local ON/OFF <Local ON> Bn, 7A, 7F <Local OFF> Bn, 7A, 00 Der Wert für „n“ wird ignoriert. PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi 222 88 3 Exclusive <GM System ON> F0H, 7EH, 7FH, 09H, 01H, F7H • Durch diese Meldung werden automatisch alle Werksvorgaben des Instruments, mit Ausnahme des „MIDI Master Tuning“ (der Gesamtstimmung), wieder hergestellt. Format des données MIDI NOTE: 1 Le PSR-A300 fonctionne par défaut (réglages d’usine) comme un générateur de son multi timbre à 16 canaux. De ce fait, la réception de données n’affecte ni les voix de panneau ni les réglages de panneau. Cependant, les messages MIDI figurant dans la liste ci-dessous affectent les voix de panneau, l’accompagnement automatique et les morceaux. • MIDI Master Tuning • Messages exclusifs au système permettant de modifier les réglages Reverb Type et Chorus Type. 2 Les messages relatifs à ces numéros de changement de commande ne peuvent pas être transmis depuis le PSR-A300. Il est toutefois possible de les émettre pendant la reproduction de l’accompagnement ou l’exécution d’un morceau, et à l’aide de l’effet Harmony. 3 Messages exclusifs au système <GM System ON> F0H, 7EH, 7FH, 09H, 01H, F7H • Ce message rétablit automatiquement tous les réglages par défaut de l’instrument, à l’exception de la commande MIDI Master Tuning. <MIDI Master Volume> F0H, 7FH, 7FH, 04H, 01H, ll, mm, F7H • Ce message autorise la modification simultanée du volume de tous les canaux (Universal System Exclusive). • Les valeurs « mm » sont utilisées pour MIDI Master Volume. (Les valeurs « ll » sont ignorées). <MIDI Master Tuning> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 27H, 30H, 00H, 00H, mm, ll, cc, F7H • Ce message modifie simultanément la valeur de l’accord de tous les canaux. • Les valeurs « mm » et « ll » sont utilisées pour MIDI Master Tuning. • Les valeurs par défaut de « mm » et « ll » sont respectivement 08H et 00H. N’importe quelle valeur peut être utilisée pour « n » et « cc ». <Reverb Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 00H, mmH, llH, F7H • mm : Reverb Type MSB • ll : Reverb Type LSB Reportez-vous à la liste des effets (page 90) pour les détails. <Chorus Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 20H, mmH, llH, F7H • mm : Chorus Type MSB • ll : Chorus Type LSB Reportez-vous à la liste des effets (page 90) pour les détails. 4 Lors du lancement de l’accompagnement, un message FAH est envoyé. A l’arrêt de l’accompagnement, c’est un message FCH qui est transmis. Lorsque l’horloge est réglée sur External, les messages FAH (début de l’accompagnement) et FCH (arrêt de l’accompagnement) sont reconnus. 223 5 Local ON/OFF <Local ON> Bn, 7A, 7F <Local OFF> Bn, 7A, 00 La valeur « n » est ignorée. PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi 89 MIDI Data Format / MIDI-Datenformat / Format des données MIDI ■ Effect map / Effekt-Zuordnung / Liste des effets • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • * When a Type LSB value is received that corresponds to no effect type, a value corresponding to the effect type (coming the closest to the specified value) is automatically set. * The numbers in parentheses in front of the Effect Type names correspond to the number indicated in the display. * Lorsque la valeur Type LSB reçue ne correspond à aucun type d’effet, une valeur correspondant à un type d’effet (la plus proche possible de la valeur spécifiée) est automatiquement sélectionnée. * Les chiffres entre parenthèses qui précèdent les noms des types d’effet correspondent aux numéros apparaissant sur l’afficheur. * Wenn ein Type-LSB-Wert empfangen wird, der keinem Effekttyp zugewiesen ist, wird automatisch ein passender Wert eingestellt, der dem empfangenen Wert am nächsten kommt. * Die Nummern in Klammern vor den Effekttyp-Bezeichnungen entsprechen der im Display erscheinenden Nummern. ● REVERB TYPE LSB TYPE MSB 0 1 2 8 16 17 0 No Effect 1 (01)Hall1 2 Room 3 Stage (06)Stage1 (07)Stage2 4 Plate (08)Plate1 (09)Plate2 5...127 (02)Hall2 18 19 20 (03)Hall3 (04)Room1 (05)Room2 No Effect ● CHORUS TYPE LSB TYPE MSB 0...63 1 2 8 16 17 18 19 20 No Effect 64 Thru 65 Chorus 66 Celeste 67 Flanger 68...127 (2)Chorus2 (1)Chorus1 (3)Flanger1 (4)Flanger2 No Effect PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi 224 90 0 Specifications / Technische Daten / Spécifications Keyboards • 61 standard-size keys (C1-C6), with Touch Response Oriental Scale • Setting : C-B • Memory : 1-4 Display • LCD display (backlit) Pitch Bend Wheel • Range: ±1 octave Setup • STANDBY/ON • MASTER VOLUME: MIN-MAX Panel Controls • [L]/[REC TRACK 2], [R]/[REC TRACK 1], [LISTEN & LEARN], [TIMING], [WAITING], [A-B REPEAT]/[ACMP ON/OFF], [REW]/[INTRO/ENDING/rit.], [FF]/[[MAIN/AUTO FILL], [TEMPO/TAP], [REC], [PAUSE]/[SYNC START], [START/STOP], [SONG], [STYLE], [VOICE], [FUNCTION], [PORTABLE GRAND], [SOUND EFFECT KIT], [REVERB ON/OFF], [DEMO], [METRONOME ON/OFF], [SPLIT ON/OFF], [DUAL ON/OFF], [HARMONY ON/OFF], [TOUCH ON/OFF], number buttons [0]-[9], [+/ YES], [-/ NO], [ORIENTAL SCALE SETTING] C-B, [MEMORY], [PITCH BEND] Voice • 108 panel voices + 12 drum kits + 1 sound effect kit + 359 XGlite voices + 2 XGlite optional voices + 35 Oriental Voices + 6 Oriental Percussion Kits • Polyphony: 32 • DUAL • SPLIT 225 Speakers • 12cm x 2 Power Consumption • 10W (When using PA-3C power adaptor) Weight • 5.1kg (11 lbs. 4 oz.) (not including batteries) Supplied Accessories • Music Rest • Owner’s Manual Function • Style Volume, Song Volume, Transpose, Tuning, Pitch Bend Range, Split Point, Touch Sensitivity, Accompaniment Tuning, Oriental Scales, Main voice (Volume, Octave, Chorus Send Level), Dual voice (Voice, Volume, Octave, Chorus Send Level), Split voice (Voice, Volume, Octave, Chorus Send Level), Reverb Type, Reverb level, Chorus Type, Panel Sustain, Harmony Type, Harmony Volume, Style Registration, PC mode (PC1/PC2/Off), Local On/Off, External Clock, Initial Setup Send, Time Signature, Metronome Volume, Lesson Track (R), Lesson Track (L), Demo Cancel Recording • Song User Song: 5 Songs Recording Tracks: 1, 2 Amplifier • 2.5W + 2.5W Dimensions (W x D x H) • 945 x 370 x 128 mm (37-1/4" x 14-5/8" x 5-1/16") Education Feature • Chord Dictionary • Lesson 1-3 Song • 35 Preset Songs + 5 User Songs + Flash Memory • Song Clear • Song Volume Auxiliary jacks • PHONES/OUTPUT, DC IN 12V, MIDI IN/OUT, SUSTAIN Power Supply • Adaptor: Yamaha PA-3B/3C AC power adaptor • Batteries: Six “AA” size, LR6 or equivalent batteries Style • 135 preset Styles • 1 flash Style • Style Control: ACMP ON/OFF, SYNC START, START/STOP, INTRO/ENDING/rit., MAIN/AUTO FILL • Fingering: Multi fingering • Style Volume Effects • Reverb: 9 types • Chorus: 4 types • Harmony: 26 types MIDI • Local On/Off • Initial Setup Send • External Clock • PC mode Optional Accessories • AC Power Adaptor: PA-3B/PA-3C • USB-MIDI Interface: UX16 • Footswitch: FC4/FC5 • Keyboard Stand: L-2C/L-2L • Headphones: HPE-150 * Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer. * Die technischen Daten und Beschreibungen in dieser Bedienungsanleitung dienen nur der Information. Yamaha Corp. behält sich das Recht vor, Produkte oder deren technische Daten jederzeit ohne vorherige Ankündigung zu verändern oder zu modifizieren. Da die technischen Daten, das Gerät selbst oder Sonderzubehör nicht in jedem Land gleich sind, setzen Sie sich im Zweifel bitte mit Ihrem Yamaha-Händler in Verbindung. * Les caractéristiques techniques et les descriptions du mode d’emploi ne sont données que pour information. Yamaha Corp. se réserve le droit de changer ou modifier les produits et leurs caractéristiques techniques à tout moment sans aucun avis. Du fait que les caractéristiques techniques, les équipements et les options peuvent différer d’un pays à l’autre, adressez-vous au distributeur Yamaha le plus proche. PSR-A300 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi 91 Limited Warranty 90 DAYS LABOR 1 YEAR PARTS Yamaha Corporation of America, hereafter referred to as Yamaha, warrants to the original consumer of a product included in the categories listed below, that the product will be free of defects in materials and/or workmanship for the periods indicated. This warranty is applicable to all models included in the following series of products: PSR SERIES OF PORTATONE ELECTRONIC KEYBOARDS If during the first 90 days that immediately follows the purchase date, your new Yamaha product covered by this warranty is found to have a defect in material and/or workmanship, Yamaha and/or its authorized representative will repair such defect without charge for parts or labor. If parts should be required after this 90 day period but within the one year period that immediately follows the purchase date, Yamaha will, subject to the terms of this warranty, supply these parts without charge. However, charges for labor, and/or any miscellaneous expenses incurred are the consumers responsibility. Yamaha reserves the right to utilize reconditioned parts in repairing these products and/or to use reconditioned units as warranty replacements. THIS WARRANTY IS THE ONLY EXPRESS WARRANTY WHICH YAMAHA MAKES IN CONNECTION WITH THESE PRODUCTS. ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY APPLICABLE TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING THE WARRANTY OF MERCHANT ABILITY IS LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY. YAMAHA EXCLUDES AND SHALL NOT BE LIABLE IN ANY EVENT FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. Some states do not allow limitations that relate to implied warranties and/or the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages. Therefore, these limitations and exclusions may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights which vary from state to state. CONSUMERS RESPONSIBILITIES If warranty service should be required, it is necessary that the consumer assume certain responsibilities: 1. Contact the Customer Service Department of the retailer selling the product, or any retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the product for assistance. You may also contact Yamaha directly at the address provided below. 2. Deliver the unit to be serviced under warranty to: the retailer selling the product, an authorized service center, or to Yamaha with an explanation of the problem. Please be prepared to provide proof purchase date (sales receipt, credit card copy, etc.) when requesting service and/or parts under warranty. 3. Shipping and/or insurance costs are the consumers responsibility.* Units shipped for service should be packed securely. *Repaired units will be returned PREPAID if warranty service is required within the first 90 days. IMPORTANT: Do NOT ship anything to ANY location without prior authorization. A Return Authorization (RA) will be issued that has a tracking number assigned that will expedite the servicing of your unit and provide a tracking system if needed. 4. Your owners manual contains important safety and operating instructions. It is your responsibility to be aware of the contents of this manual and to follow all safety precautions. EXCLUSIONS This warranty does not apply to units whose trade name, trademark, and/or ID numbers have been altered, defaced, exchanged removed, or to failures and/or damages that may occur as a result of: 1. Neglect, abuse, abnormal strain, modification or exposure to extremes in temperature or humidity. 2. Improper repair or maintenance by any person who is not a service representative of a retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the product, an authorized service center, or an authorized service representative of Yamaha. 3. This warranty is applicable only to units sold by retailers authorized by Yamaha to sell these products in the U.S.A., the District of Columbia, and Puerto Rico. This warranty is not applicable in other possessions or territories of the U.S.A. or in any other country. Please record the model and serial number of the product you have purchased in the spaces provided below. Model___________________________ Serial #________________________________ Sales Slip #________________________________ Purchased from____________________________________________________________ Date______________________________________ (Retailer) YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA Electronic Service Division 6600 Orangethorpe Avenue Buena Park, CA 90620 KEEP THIS DOCUMENT FOR YOUR RECORDS. DO NOT MAIL! 226 For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below. Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante. NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario, M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: 416-298-1311 U.S.A. Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620, U.S.A. Tel: 714-522-9011 CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungsländern erhältlich. Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo. Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Belgium Rue de Geneve (Genevastraat) 10, 1140 - Brussels, Belgium Tel: 02-726 6032 FRANCE Yamaha Musique France BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France Tel: 01-64-61-4000 ITALY Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A. Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: 02-935-771 SPAIN/PORTUGAL MEXICO Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V. Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149, Col. Guadalupe del Moral C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México Tel: 55-5804-0600 BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda. Av. Reboucas 2636-Pinheiros CEP: 05402-400 Sao Paulo-SP. Brasil Tel: 011-3085-1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Sucursal de Argentina Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053, Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: 1-4371-7021 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá Tel: +507-269-5311 Yamaha-Hazen Música, S.A. Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230 Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain Tel: 91-639-8888 GREECE Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House 147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece Tel: 01-228 2160 SWEDEN EUROPE Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd. Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, England Tel: 01908-366700 IRELAND Danfay Ltd. 61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin Tel: 01-2859177 GERMANY Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Switzerland Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland Tel: 01-383 3990 POLAND Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Sp.z. o.o. Oddzial w Polsce ul. 17 Stycznia 56, PL-02-146 Warszawa, Poland Tel: 022-868-07-57 THE NETHERLANDS Yamaha Music Central Europe, Branch Nederland Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands Tel: 0347-358 040 Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd. 25/F., United Plaza, 1468 Nanjing Road (West), Jingan, Shanghai, China Tel: 021-6247-2211 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: 2737-7688 INDONESIA PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor) PT. Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: 21-520-2577 KOREA Yamaha Music Korea Ltd. Tong-Yang Securities Bldg. 16F 23-8 Yoido-dong, Youngdungpo-ku, Seoul, Korea Tel: 02-3770-0660 MALAYSIA PHILIPPINES DENMARK YS Copenhagen Liaison Office Generatorvej 6A DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark Tel: 44 92 49 00 FINLAND F-Musiikki Oy Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260, SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland Tel: 09 618511 Yupangco Music Corporation 339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO, Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines Tel: 819-7551 SINGAPORE Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd. #03-11 A-Z Building 140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015 Tel: 747-4374 TAIWAN Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB Grini Næringspark 1 N-1345 Østerås, Norway Tel: 67 16 77 70 ICELAND Skifan HF Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120 IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland Tel: 525 5000 OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: +49-4101-3030 Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd. 3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei. Taiwan 104, R.O.C. Tel: 02-2511-8688 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 891/1 Siam Motors Building, 15-16 floor Rama 1 road, Wangmai, Pathumwan Bangkok 10330, Thailand Tel: 02-215-2626 OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2317 AFRICA Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2312 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-60203900 THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd. Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya, Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: 3-78030900 Yamaha Scandinavia AB J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1 Box 30053 S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Tel: 031 89 34 00 NORWAY THE UNITED KINGDOM ASIA BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG MIDDLE EAST TURKEY/CYPRUS Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LB21-128 Jebel Ali Freezone P.O.Box 17328, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: +971-4-881-5868 HEAD OFFICE OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria 3006, Australia Tel: 3-9693-5111 NEW ZEALAND Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd. 146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa, Auckland, New Zealand Tel: 9-634-0099 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2312 Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-3273 [PK] 35 Yamaha PK CLUB (Portable Keyboard Home Page, English Only) http://www.yamahaPKclub.com/ Yamaha Manual Library http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/ U.R.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation © 2005 Yamaha Corporation A0 ???PO???.?-01 WE15380 Printed in China